Civil engineering, surveying and building Books

Book SynopsisBuilding Sustainability in East Asia: Policy, Design and Peopleillustrates the holistic approaches and individual strategies to building sustainability that have been implemented in construction projects in Asia. Top-down and bottom-up approaches (from formulating policy to constructing individual buildings) are effective in terms of the sustainable development of cities, and this book covers both, illustrated with a range of case study developments.Table of ContentsAbout the authors xi Foreword xii Preface xiv Acknowledgement xvii Section 1 On contexts 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Why sustainability matters 3 1.2 Why Asia matters 4 1.3 Why buildings matter 5 1.3.1 Root causes and solutions to the problem 6 1.3.2 Eco‐city principles 6 1.3.3 Liveable spaces 7 1.4 Dimensions of sustainable development 8 1.4.1 Policy support 8 1.4.2 Green market and consumption 9 1.4.3 Technology push 10 1.5 Sustainability in practice 10 1.5.1 History of green building in Asia 11 1.5.2 Capacity building – green professionals 11 1.5.3 Sustainable change for the green movement 15 1.6 Organisation of the book 15 2 Rapid urbanisation 16 2.1 Introduction 16 2.2 Asian urbanisation in context 16 2.3 Demographic changes 17 2.3.1 Global population trends 17 2.3.2 Urban population growth 18 2.3.3 The challenge of an ageing population 21 2.4 Economic changes 22 2.4.1 Growth in GDP 22 2.4.2 Increased income 22 2.4.3 Consuming society 24 2.5 Social changes 25 2.5.1 Housing needs 25 2.5.2 Employment needs 26 2.6 New growth model 26 2.6.1 Mega and compact cities 27 2.6.2 Green building markets 28 2.7 Summary 29 3 Urban environmental challenges 30 3.1 Introduction 30 3.2 Urban challenges in context 31 3.3 Climate change challenges 32 3.3.1 Vulnerability to extreme weather 32 3.3.2 Global warming 34 3.4 Urban environmental degradation 37 3.4.1 Air pollution 37 3.4.2 Energy depletion 39 3.4.3 Waste generation 42 3.4.4 Unhealthy urban environment 42 3.5 Liveability degradation 43 3.5.1 Urban heat Island 43 3.5.2 Ecological footprint 44 3.6 Summary 45 4 Quest for solutions 46 4.1 Introduction 46 4.2 History of international collaborations and partnerships 47 4.3 C40 cities climate leadership group initiative 47 4.3.1 Key issues 49 4.3.2 Action plan on buildings 49 4.4 WEF partnership for future of urban development 50 4.5 Regional integration 52 4.6 Changes for solutions 53 4.6.1 Re‐think of sustainable development framework 53 4.6.2 Issues of policy 54 4.6.3 Issues of practice/design 55 4.6.4 Issues of people 55 4.7 Paradigm shift 56 Section 2 On policy 57 5 Policy framework 59 5.1 Introduction 59 5.2 Policy framework 60 5.3 Policy priorities 61 5.3.1 The moving target 61 5.3.2 Prioritisation of policy issues 63 5.3.3 The Asian way of change 71 5.4 Policy instruments 71 5.4.1 Regulations and standards “The Stick” 73 5.4.2 Economic instruments “The Carrot and Stick” 74 5.4.3 Voluntary schemes instrument 74 5.5 Institutional arrangements 76 5.5.1 Hierarchy – who to lead 76 5.5.2 Government coordination and authority 78 5.5.3 Proposal for eco‐city implementation 79 5.6 Summary 80 6 Policy implementation 81 6.1 Introduction 81 6.2 General approach 81 6.3 Review of the regulations 83 6.3.1 Building energy regulations 84 6.3.2 Planning control for a better environment 86 6.4 Market solutions 87 6.4.1 Incentivising the market 87 6.5 Market‐based approach 90 6.5.1 Green building certification 90 6.5.2 Sustainability report and index 90 6.6 Public‐private partnership (PPP) 91 6.7 Collaboration with private sector 93 6.8 Capacity building 94 6.8.1 Demonstration projects and research and development 94 6.8.2 Education and training of green practitioners 95 6.9 Summary 96 Section 3 On design 97 7 Sustainability transformation 99 7.1 Introduction 99 7.2 Green transformation of building industry 100 7.2.1 Engaging stakeholders 100 7.2.2 Empowering the practitioners 102 7.3 Practice of building sustainability 103 7.3.1 Definition of sustainable building 103 7.3.2 Standardisation of practice 106 7.4 Sustainable building in action 107 7.4.1 Life‐cycle consideration 107 7.4.2 Design stage – integrated design 110 7.4.3 Construction stage – sustainable materials 113 7.4.4 Operation stage – behavioural changes 120 7.5 Building information modelling 121 7.6 Summary 123 8 Engineering solutions 124 8.1 Introduction 124 8.2 Design provisions for sustainable building 125 8.3 Adaptation to climate change and resilient designs 125 8.3.1 Extreme wind engineering 125 8.3.2 Flood mitigation and prevention 128 8.3.3 Seismic design 129 8.3.4 Fire engineering 130 8.4 High‐performance buildings 130 8.4.1 Building physics analysis 132 8.4.2 Energy appraisal 133 8.4.3 Indoor environment quality 133 8.4.4 Outdoor environment quality 135 8.5 Design innovations 135 8.5.1 Outside building: High‐performance envelope 137 8.5.2 Inside building: Low energy and carbon designs 143 8.6 Summary 146 9 De-carbonisation 147 9.1 Introduction 147 9.2 Building energy performance 148 9.3 Low/zero carbon design 152 9.3.1 Definition of zero carbon 152 9.3.2 Design strategy 152 9.4 Renewable energy for urban developments and buildings 158 9.4.1 Solar energy 160 9.4.2 Wind energy 162 9.4.3 Bioenergy 162 9.4.4 Hydropower 163 9.4.5 Marine/ocean energy 164 9.4.6 Geothermal energy 164 9.5 District‐wide de‐carbonisation 167 9.5.1 Micro‐energy grid 167 9.5.2 District energy 169 9.6 Towards a low‐carbon and smart city 172 9.7 Summary 173 Section 4 On people 175 10 Space for people 177 10.1 Introduction 177 10.2 Urban context of Asia city 178 10.2.1 Liveability 178 10.2.2 A compact and vertical city 178 10.2.3 An undesirable building environment 180 10.3 The quest for a quality built environment 181 10.3.1 A novel planning framework for the environment 181 10.3.2 The urban climatic map 182 10.3.3 Air ventilation 184 10.3.4 Microclimate and landscape design integration 184 10.4 Reducing the urban heat Island 187 10.5 Street canyon effect – roadside air pollution 191 10.6 Right of light 193 10.7 Health and well‐being 193 10.7.1 Natural ventilation 194 10.7.2 Daylight for habitation 194 10.7.3 Water quality 196 10.8 Summary 197 11 Community making 199 11.1 Introduction 199 11.2 Sustainable community 200 11.3 Community‐based design 201 11.3.1 Cultural aspect (social) 202 11.3.2 Placemaking (environment) 202 11.3.3 Sustainable housing (economics) 202 11.4 Neighbourhood assessment 206 11.4.1 History of overseas schemes 206 11.4.2 Definition of community/neighbourhood 207 11.4.3 Assessment aspects/categories 208 11.5 Development of BEAM plus neighbourhood in Hong Kong 210 11.5.1 Landscape and ecology in built environment 212 11.5.2 Stakeholder engagement 213 11.5.3 The establishment of BEAM plus neighbourhood 215 11.6 Summary 216 12 Low carbon living 217 12.1 Introduction 217 12.2 Carbon footprint of urban living 217 12.3 Behavioural changes 219 12.4 Changes in design culture 220 12.4.1 Task lighting 221 12.4.2 Thermal comfort 221 12.4.3 Natural ventilation 221 12.4.4 Green products 222 12.4.5 Smart metering 222 12.5 Eco‐education 222 12.6 Zero energy living experience 226 12.7 Community centre 228 12.8 Urban farming 230 12.9 Living LOHAS 231 12.10 Summary 234 Section 5 Way forward 235 13 Conclusions 237 On contexts … 237 On policy … 238 On design …. 238 On people …. 239 Way forward …. 239References 240 Index 250

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi 1 Introduction to Combustion Engines 1 1.1 Historical Background 1 1.2 Classifications 6 1.3 Engine Components 11 References 23 2 Gasoline Engine Technology 27 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Background 29 2.3 Charge Delivery Systems 32 2.4 Carburetor 33 2.5 Fuel Injection Systems 38 2.6 Injection Systems 40 2.7 Sensors 43 References 46 3 Diesel Engine Technology 49 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Injection Systems 57 References 65 4 Turbocharging 69 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Background 70 4.3 Conclusions 75 References 76 5 Combustion Based Noise 77 5.1 Introduction 77 5.2 Background 78 5.3 Conclusions 80 References 83 6 Superchargers 87 6.1 Introduction 87 6.2 Roots Supercharger 90 6.3 Centrifugal Supercharger 91 6.4 Screw Supercharger 92 References 94 7 Materials for Engine 95 7.1 Introduction 95 7.2 Structural Properties 96 7.3 Non-Structural Properties 97 7.4 Cast Iron 100 7.5 Aluminum 101 References 101 8 Vehicle Noise and Vibration 103 8.1 Introduction 103 8.2 Vehicle Systems 104 8.3 Transfer Paths 105 8.4 Features of NVH 106 8.5 Importance of Vehicle NVH 113 References 115 9 Power Train NVH 121 9.1 Introduction 121 9.2 Engine Vibrations 122 9.3 Combustion Noise 130 9.4 Spectrum Characteristics of Cylinder Pressure 134 9.5 Relationship between the Spectrum of Cylinder Pressure and Noise 138 9.6 Motion Based Noise 150 9.7 Piston Slap 152 9.8 Bearing Noise 168 9.9 Oil Pump Noise 172 Contents vii 9.10 Timing Chain and Belt Noise 176 9.11 Transmission Whine 180 9.12 Rattle 185 9.13 Clutch Noise 189 9.14 Flow Noise 196 9.15 Muffler 200 References 203 10 Body and Chassis System 211 10.1 Introduction 211 10.2 Vehicle Interior NVH 215 10.3 NVH Damping 226 References 237 11 Vehicle Testing 243 11.1 Introduction 243 11.2 Decomposition of Various Sources 244 11.3 Interior Noise 246 11.4 Psychoacoustic Analysis 247 11.5 Conclusions 251 References 251 Index 255

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplores and brings together the existent body of knowledge on building performance analysisShortlisted in the CIBSE 2020 Building Performance Awards Building performance is an important yet surprisingly complex concept. This book presents a comprehensive and systematic overview of the subject. It provides a working definition of building performance, and an in-depth discussion of the role building performance plays throughout the building life cycle. The book also explores the perspectives of various stakeholders, the functions of buildings, performance requirements, performance quantification (both predicted and measured), criteria for success, and the challenges of using performance analysis in practice. Building Performance Analysis starts by introducing the subject of building performance: its key terms, definitions, history, and challenges. It then develops a theoretical foundation for the subject, explores the complexity of performance assessment, and the way that performanceTable of ContentsEndorsement by IBPSA ix Foreword xi Preface xiii Acknowledgements xv Endorsements xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Building Performance: Framing, Key Terms and Definition 7 1.2 Performance in the Building Domain 14 1.2.1 Development of the Notion of Building Performance 15 1.2.2 History of Building Codes, Regulations and Rating Schemes 23 1.2.3 Selected Recent Developments in Building Performance 28 1.3 Outline of the Book 34 1.4 Reflections on Building Performance Analysis 37 1.5 Summary 38 1.6 Key References 41 Part I Foundation 43 2 Building Performance in Context 45 2.1 Building Life Cycle 47 2.2 Stakeholders 50 2.3 Building Systems 54 2.4 Building Performance Challenges 58 2.5 Building Performance Context in Current Practice 64 2.6 Reflections on the Complexity of the Context 67 2.7 Summary 68 2.8 Key References 70 3 Needs, Functions and Requirements 73 3.1 Requirement Specification 75 3.2 Requirement Types 83 3.3 Functional Requirements 86 3.4 Building Functions 90 3.5 Stakeholder World Views 96 3.6 Building Performance Requirements 99 3.7 Building Needs, Functions and Requirements in Current Practice 105 3.8 Reflections on Building Performance Requirements 109 3.9 Summary 111 3.10 Key References 114 Part II Assessment 117 4 Fundamentals of Building Performance 119 4.1 Performance: The Interface between Requirements and Systems 123 4.2 Quantifying Performance 128 4.3 Experimentation and Measurement 134 4.4 Building Performance Metrics, Indicators and Measures 140 4.4.1 Performance Metrics 141 4.4.2 Performance Indicators 144 4.4.3 Performance Measures 154 4.5 Handling and Combining Building Performance 157 4.6 Signs of Performance Issues 159 4.7 Building Performance in Current Practice 161 4.8 Reflections on Working with Building Performance 164 4.9 Summary 165 4.10 Key References 168 5 Performance Criteria 171 5.1 Goals, Targets and Ambitions 174 5.2 Benchmarks and Baselines 182 5.3 Constraints, Thresholds and Limits 189 5.4 Performance Categories and Bands 194 5.5 Criteria in Current Practice 196 5.6 Reflections on Performance Criteria 198 5.7 Summary 199 5.8 Key References 202 6 Performance Quantification 205 6.1 Physical Measurement 208 6.1.1 Selected Physical Measurements and Tests 209 6.1.2 Standards for Physical Measurement 228 6.2 Building Performance Simulation 234 6.2.1 Selected Building Simulation Tool Categories 239 6.2.2 Validation, Verification and Calibration 259 6.3 Expert Judgment 262 6.4 Stakeholder Evaluation 267 6.5 Measurement of Construction Process Performance 271 6.6 Building Performance Quantification in Current Practice 273 6.7 Reflections on Quantification Methods 275 6.8 Summary 276 6.9 Key References 279 7 Working with Building Performance 283 7.1 Examples: Selected Building Performance Analysis Cases 285 7.2 Criterion Development 293 7.3 Tool and Instrument Configuration 310 7.4 Iterative Analysis 313 7.5 Building Performance Analysis in Current Practice 314 7.6 Reflections on Working with Building Performance 318 7.7 Summary 319 7.8 Key References 321 Part III Impact 323 8 Design and Construction for Performance 325 8.1 Performance‐ Based Design 328 8.2 Performance‐ Based Design Decisions 343 8.2.1 Normative Decision Methods 350 8.2.2 Naturalistic Decision Making 353 8.2.3 Decision‐Making Challenges 355 8.3 Tools for Performance‐Based Design 356 8.4 Performance Visualization and Communication 369 8.5 Construction for Performance 374 8.6 Design and Construction for Performance Challenges 377 8.7 Reflections on Designing for Performance 379 8.8 Summary 381 8.9 Key References 383 9 Building Operation, Control and Management 387 9.1 Building Performance Management and Control 390 9.1.1 Building Automation Systems 393 9.1.2 Model‐Based Predictive Control 397 9.2 Performance Monitoring 398 9.2.1 Specialized Monitoring Techniques 405 9.2.2 International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol 407 9.3 Fault Detection and Diagnostics 408 9.4 Performance Service Companies and Contracts 413 9.5 Building Operation, Control and Management Challenges 417 9.6 Reflections on Building Automation and Monitoring 419 9.7 Summary 420 9.8 Key References 422 10 High Performance Buildings 425 10.1 Existing Definitions for High Performance Buildings 427 10.2 Emerging Technologies 431 10.3 Smart and Intelligent Buildings 435 10.4 High Performance Building Challenges 437 10.5 Reflection: A Novel Definition for High Performance Buildings 440 10.6 Summary 442 10.7 Key References 444 Epilogue 447 11 Emergent Theory of Building Performance Analysis 449 11.1 Observations, Explanations, Principles and Hypotheses 449 11.2 Suggested Guidelines for Building Performance Analysis 460 11.2.1 Building Performance Analysis During Design 460 11.2.2 Building Performance Analysis During Operation 462 11.2.3 Building Performance Analysis in Research 463 11.3 Future Challenges 463 11.4 Closure 465 Appendix A: Overview of Building Performance Aspects 467 Appendix B: Criterion Development Template 471 Appendix C: Tool/Instrument Configuration Checklist 473 Appendix D: Measurement Instruments 477 Glossary 481 Building Performance Abbreviations 487 Generic Abbreviations 489 List of Figures and Tables 493 Symbols and Units 497 About the Author 501 References: Longlist and Secondary Sources 503 Index 589

Read more less

Book SynopsisSince the first edition of Fracking was published, hydraulic fracturing has continued to be hotly debated. Credited with bringing the US and other countries closer to energy independence, and blamed for tainted drinking water and earthquakes, hydraulic fracturing (fracking) continues to be one of the hottest topics and fiercely debated issues in the energy industry and in politics. Covering all of the latest advances in fracking since the first edition was published, this expanded and updated revision still contains all of the valuable original content for the engineer or layperson to understand the technology and its ramifications. Useful not only as a tool for the practicing engineer solve day-to-day problems that come with working in hydraulic fracturing, it is also a wealth of information covering the possible downsides of what many consider to be a very valuable practice. Many others consider it dangerous, and it is important to see both sides of the argument, froTable of ContentsPreface xv An Introduction to Hydraulic Fracturing xvii 1 Environmental Impact – Reality and Myth and Nero Did Not Fiddle While Rome Burned 1 1.1 The Tower of Babel and How it Could be the Cause of Much of the Fracking Debate 2 2 Production Development 5 3 Fractures: Their Orientation and Length 11 3.1 Fracture Orientation 11 3.2 Fracture Length/ Height 13 4 Casing and Cementing 15 4.1 Blowouts 16 4.2 Surface Blowouts 17 4.3 Subsurface Blowouts 17 4.4 Horizontal Drilling 18 4.5 Fracturing and the Groundwater Debate 18 5 Pre-Drill Assessments 19 5.1 Basis of Design 21 6 Well Construction 23 6.1 Drilling 23 6.2 Completion 26 7 Well Operations 29 7.1 Well Plug and Abandonment “P&A” 30 7.2 Considerations 30 8 Failure and Contamination Reduction 43 8.1 Conduct Environmental Sampling Before and During Operations 43 8.2 Disclose the Chemicals Being Used in Fracking Operations 44 8.3 Ensure that Wellbore Casings are Properly Designed and Constructed 44 8.4 Eliminate Venting and Work Toward Green Completions 44 8.5 Prevent Flowback Spillage/Leaks 45 8.6 Dispose/Recycle Flowback Properly 45 8.7 Minimize Noise and Dust 45 8.8 Protect Workers and Drivers 46 8.9 Communicate and Engage 46 8.10 Record and Document 47 9 Frack Fluids and Composition 49 9.1 Uses and Needs for Frack Fluids 50 9.2 Common Fracturing Additives 50 9.3 Typical Percentages of Commonly Used Additives 53 9.4 Proppants 53 9.5 Silica Sand 55 9.6 Resin Coated Proppant 57 9.7 Manufactured Ceramics Proppants 58 9.8 Additional Types 58 9.9 Slickwater 59 10 So Where Do the Frack Fluids Go? 61 11 Common Objections to Drilling Operations 63 11.1 Noise 64 11.2 Changes in Landscape and Beauty of Surroundings 65 11.3 Increased Traffic 66 11.4 Subsurface Contamination of Ground Water 67 11.5 Impacts on Water Wells 67 11.6 Water Analysis 67 11.7 Types of Methane and What They Show Us 70 11.8 Biogenic 71 11.9 Thermogenic 71 11.10 Possible Causes of Methane in Water Wells 71 11.11 Surface Water and Soil Impacts 72 11.12 Spill Preparation and Documentation 72 11.13 Other Surface Impacts 73 11.14 Land Use Permitting 73 11.15 Water Usage and Management 74 11.16 Flowback Water 74 11.17 Produced Water 75 11.18 Flowback and Produced Water Management 76 11.19 Geological Shifts 76 11.20 Induced Seismic Event 77 11.21 Wastewater Disposal Wells 78 11.22 Site Remediation 78 11.23 Regulatory Oversight 78 11.24 Federal Level Oversight 79 11.25 State Level Oversight 79 11.26 Municipal Level Oversight 80 11.27 Examples of Legislation and Regulations 80 11.28 Frack Fluid Makeup Reporting 81 11.29 FracFocus 82 11.30 Atmospheric Emissions 83 12 Air Emissions Controls 85 12.1 Common Sources of Air Emissions 87 12.2 Fugitive Air Emissions 88 12.3 Silica Dust Exposure 89 12.4 Stationary Sources 89 12.5 The Clean Air Act 90 12.6 Regulated Pollutants 90 12.7 NAAQS Criteria Pollutants 91 12.8 Attainment Versus Non-attainment 91 12.9 Types of Federal Regulations 92 12.10 MACT/NESHAP HAPs 92 12.11 NSPS Regulations: 40 CFR Part 60 92 12.12 NSPS Subpart OOOO 93 12.13 Facilities/Activities Affected by NSPS OOOO 93 12.14 Other Types of Federal NSPS and NESHAP/MACT Regulations 95 12.15 NSPS Subpart IIII 95 12.16 NSPS Subpart JJJJ 95 12.17 NSPS Subpart KKK 95 12.18 MACT Subpart HH and Subpart HHH 95 12.19 MACT Subpart ZZZZ 96 12.20 Construction and Operating New Source Review Permits 96 12.21 Title V Permits 96 13 Chemicals and Products on Locations 99 13.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) 102 13.2 Contents of an MSDS 103 13.3 Product Identification 104 13.4 Hazardous Ingredients of Mixtures 104 13.5 Physical Data 105 13.6 Fire and Explosion Hazard Data 106 13.7 Health Hazard Data 106 13.8 Emergency and First Aid Procedures 107 13.9 Reactivity Data 107 13.10 Spill, Leak, and Disposal Procedures 107 13.11 Personal Protection Information 108 13.12 HCS 2012 Safety Data Sheets (SDS) 117 14 Public Perception, the Media, and the Facts 123 14.1 Regulation or Policy Topics: Media Coverage and Public Perception 128 15 Notes from the Field 137 15.1 Going Forward 150 16 Migration of Hydrocarbon Gases 153 16.1 Introduction 153 16.2 Geochemical Exploration for Petroleum 154 16.3 Primary and Secondary Migration of Hydrocarbons 157 16.3.1 Primary Gas Migration 157 16.3.2 Secondary Gas Migration 159 16.3.3 Gas Entrapment 159 16.4 Origin of Migrating Hydrocarbon Gases 161 16.4.1 Biogenic vs. Thermogenic Gas 161 16.4.1.1 Sources of Migrating Gases 161 16.4.1.2 Biogenic Methane 162 16.4.1.3 Thermogenic Methane Gas 165 16.4.2 Isotopic Values of Gases 167 16.4.3 Nonhydrocarbon Gases 168 16.4.4 Mixing of Gases 170 16.4.5 Surface Gas Sampling 172 16.4.6 Summary 172 16.5 Driving Force of Gas Movement 174 16.5.1 Density of a Hydrocarbon Gas under Pressure 174 16.5.2 Sample Problem (Courtesy of Gulf Publishing Company) 176 16.5.3 Other Methods of Computing Natural Gas Compressibility 177 16.5.4 Density of Water 181 16.5.5 Petrophysical Parameters Affecting Gas Migration 183 16.5.6 Porosity, Void Ratio, and Density 184 16.5.7 Permeability 188 16.5.8 Free and Dissolved Gas in Fluid 189 16.5.9 Quantity of Dissolved Gas in Water 191 16.6 Types of Gas Migration 192 16.6.1 Molecular Diffusion Mechanism 193 16.6.2 Discontinuous-Phase Migration of Gas 195 16.6.3 Minimum Height of Gas Column Necessary to Initiate Upward Gas Movement 198 16.6.4 Buoyant Flow 199 16.6.5 Sample Problem (Courtesy of Gulf Publishing Company) 200 16.6.6 Gas Columns 201 16.6.7 Sample Problem 2.2 (Courtesy of Gulf Publishing Company) 203 16.6.8 Continuous-Phase Gas Migration 204 16.7 Paths of Gas Migration Associated with Oilwells 207 16.7.1 Natural Paths of Gas Migration 209 16.7.2 Man-Made Paths of Gas Migration (boreholes) 211 16.7.3 Creation of Induced Fractures during Drilling 213 16.8 Wells Leaking Due to Cementing Failure 217 16.8.1 Breakdown of Cement 217 16.8.2 Cement Isolation Breakdown (Shrinkage—Circumferential Fractures) 217 16.8.3 Improper Placement of Cement 220 16.9 Environmental Hazards of Gas Migration 222 16.9.1 Explosive Nature of Gas 222 16.9.2 Toxicity of Hydrocarbon Gas 224 16.10 Migration of Gas from Petroleum Wellbores 227 16.10.1 Effect of Seismic Activity 228 16.11 Case Histories of Gas Migration Problems 228 16.11.1 Inglewood Oilfield, CA 230 16.11.2 Los Angeles City Oilfield, CA 231 16.11.2.1 Belmont High School Construction 233 16.11.3 Montebello Oilfield, CA 234 16.11.3.1 Montebello Underground Gas Storage 234 16.11.4 Playa Del Rey Oilfield, CA 235 16.11.4.1 Playa Del Rey underground Gas Storage 235 16.11.5 Salt Lake Oilfield, CA 238 16.11.5.1 Ross Dress for Less Department Store Explosion/Fire, Los Angeles, CA 238 16.11.5.2 Gilmore Bank 240 16.11.5.3 South Salt Lake Oilfield Gas Seeps from Gas Injection Project 241 16.11.5.4 Wilshire and Curson Gas Seep, Los Angeles, CA, 1999 241 16.11.6 Santa Fe Springs Oilfield, CA 241 16.11.7 El Segundo Oilfield, CA 244 16.11.8 Honor Rancho and Tapia Oilfields, CA 244 16.11.9 Sylmar, CA — Tunnel Explosion 244 16.11.10 Hutchinson, KS — Explosion and Fires 247 16.11.11 Huntsman Gas Storage, NE 247 16.11.12 Mont Belvieu Gas Storage Field, TX 248 16.11.13 Leroy Gas Storage Facility, WY 248 16.12 Conclusions 249 References and Bibliography 252 17 Subsidence as a Result of Gas/Oil/Water Production 261 17.1 Introduction 261 17.2 Theoretical Compaction Models 264 17.3 Theoretical Modeling of Compaction 270 17.3.1 Terzaghi’s Compaction Model 272 17.3.2 Athy’s Compaction Model 274 17.3.3 Hedberg’s Compaction Model 275 17.3.4 Weller’s Compaction Model 275 17.3.5 Teodorovich and Chernov’s Compaction Model 276 17.3.6 Beall’s Compaction Model 277 17.3.7 Katz and Ibrahim Compaction Model 277 17.4 Subsidence Over Oilfields 279 17.4.1 Rate of Subsidence 281 17.4.2 Effect of Earthquakes on Subsidence 282 17.4.3 Stress and Strain Distribution in Subsiding Areas 283 17.4.4 Calculation of Subsidence in Oilfields 286 17.4.5 Permeability Seals for Confined Aquifers 289 17.4.6 Fissures Caused by Subsidence 290 17.5 Case Studies of Subsidence over Hydrocarbon Reservoirs 292 17.5.1 Los Angeles Basin, CA, Oilfields, Inglewood Oilfield, CA 292 17.5.1.1 Baldwin Hills Dam Failure 294 17.5.1.2 Proposed Housing Development 297 17.5.2 Los Angeles City Oilfield, CA 297 17.5.2.1 Belmont High School Construction 297 17.5.3 Playa Del Rey Oilfield, CA 299 17.5.3.1 Playa Del Rey Marina Subsidence 299 17.5.4 Torrance Oilfield, CA 301 17.5.5 Redondo Beach Marina Area, CA 302 17.5.6 Salt Lake Oilfield, CA 303 17.5.7 Santa Fe Springs Oilfield, CA 305 17.5.8 Wilmington Oilfield, Long Beach, CA 306 17.5.9 North Stavropol Oilfield, Russia 318 17.5.10 Subsidence over Venezuelan Oilfields 324 17.5.10.1 Subsidence in the Bolivar Coastal Oilfields of Venezuela 325 17.5.10.2 Subsidence of Facilities 328 17.5.11 Po-Veneto Plain, Italy 335 17.5.11.1 Po Delta 336 17.5.12 Subsidence Over the North Sea Ekofisk Oilfield 343 17.5.12.1 Production 345 17.5.12.2 Ekofisk Field Description 346 17.5.12.3 Enhanced Oil Recovery Projects 348 17.5.13 Platform Sinking 348 17.6 Concluding Remarks 350 References and Bibliography 351 18 Effect of Emission of CO2 and CH4 into the Atmosphere 361 18.1 Introduction 361 18.2 Historic Geologic Evidence 363 18.2.1 Historic Record of Earth’s Global Temperature 363 18.2.2 Effect of Atmospheric Carbon Content on Global Temperature 366 18.2.3 Sources of CO2 370 18.3 Adiabatic Theory 373 18.3.1 Modeling the Planet Earth 373 18.3.2 Modeling the Planet Venus 375 18.3.3 Anthropogenic Carbon Effect on the Earth’s Global Temperature 380 18.3.4 Methane Gas Emissions 383 18.3.5 Monitoring of Methane Gas Emissions 385 References 385 19 Fracking in the USA 389 Appendix A: Chemicals Used in Fracking 729 Appendix B: State Agency Web Addresses 907 Bibliography: 911 Index 913

Read more less

Book SynopsisENCYCLOPEDIA OF RENEWABLE ENERGY Written by a highly respected engineer and prolific author in the energy sector, this is the single most comprehensive, thorough, and up-to-date reference work on renewable energy. The world's energy industry is and has always been volatile, sometimes controversial, with wild swings upward and downward. This has, historically, been mostly because most of our energy has come from fossil fuels, which is a finite source of energy. Every so often, a technology comes along, like hydrofracturing, that is a game-changer. But is it, really? Aren't we just delaying the inevitable with these temporary price fixes The only REAL game-changer is renewable energy. For decades, renewable energy sources have been sought, developed, and studied. Sometimes wind is at the forefront, sometimes solar, and, for the last decade or so, there has been a surge in interest for biofeedstocks and biofuels. There are also the old standbys of nuclear and geothermal energy, which hTable of ContentsIntroduction xxxvii A 1 B 99 C 227 D 329 E 365 F 423 G 481 H 585 I 651 J 681 K 683 L 689 M 741 N 781 O 807 P 835 Q 921 R 923 S 969 T 1057 U 1095 V 1105 W 1111 X 1199 Y 1203 Z 1207 Conversion Factors 1211 Further Reading 1213 About the Author 1215

Read more less

Book SynopsisReviews and describes both the fundamental and practical design procedures for the ultimate limit state design of ductile steel plated structures The new edition of this well-established reference reviews and describes both fundamentals and practical design procedures for steel plated structures. The derivation of the basic mathematical expressions is presented together with a thorough discussion of the assumptions and the validity of the underlying expressions and solution methods. Furthermore, this book is also an easily accessed design tool, which facilitates learning by applying the concepts of the limit states for practice using a set of computer programs, which can be downloaded. Ultimate Limit State Design of Steel Plated Structures provides expert guidance on mechanical model test results as well as nonlinear finite element solutions, sophisticated design methodologies useful for practitioners in industries or research institutions, and selTable of ContentsPreface xvii About the Author xix How to Use This Book xxi 1 Principles of Limit State Design 1 1.1 Structural Design Philosophies 1 1.2 Allowable Stress Design Versus Limit State Design 7 1.3 Mechanical Properties of Structural Materials 17 1.4 Strength Member Types for Plated Structures 39 1.5 Types of Loads 41 1.6 Basic Types of Structural Failure 42 1.7 Fabrication Related Initial Imperfections 43 1.8 Age Related Structural Degradation 60 1.9 Accident Induced Damage 73 References 73 2 Buckling and Ultimate Strength of Plate–Stiffener Combinations: Beams, Columns, and Beam–Columns 79 2.1 Structural Idealizations of Plate–Stiffener Assemblies 79 2.2 Geometric Properties 82 2.3 Material Properties 82 2.4 Modeling of End Conditions 83 2.5 Loads and Load Effects 84 2.6 Effective Width Versus Effective Breadth of Attached Plating 85 2.7 Plastic Cross-Sectional Capacities 93 2.8 Ultimate Strength of the Plate–Stiffener Combination Model Under Bending 100 2.9 Ultimate Strength of the Plate–Stiffener Combination Model Under Axial Compression 110 2.10 Ultimate Strength of the Plate–Stiffener Combination Model Under Combined Axial Compression and Bending 126 References 132 3 Elastic and Inelastic Buckling Strength of Plates Under Complex Circumstances 135 3.1 Fundamentals of Plate Buckling 135 3.2 Geometric and Material Properties 136 3.3 Loads and Load Effects 136 3.4 Boundary Conditions 137 3.5 Linear Elastic Behavior 138 3.6 Elastic Buckling of Simply Supported Plates Under Single Types of Loads 138 3.7 Elastic Buckling of Simply Supported Plates Under Two Load Components 139 3.8 Elastic Buckling of Simply Supported Plates Under More than Three Load Components 147 3.9 Elastic Buckling of Clamped Plates 149 3.10 Elastic Buckling of Partially Rotation Restrained Plates 149 3.11 Effect of Welding Induced Residual Stresses 158 3.12 Effect of Lateral Pressure Loads 159 3.13 Effect of Opening 163 3.14 Elastic–Plastic Buckling Strength 168 References 176 4 Large-Deflection and Ultimate Strength Behavior of Plates 179 4.1 Fundamentals of Plate Collapse Behavior 179 4.2 Structural Idealizations of Plates 185 4.3 Nonlinear Governing Differential Equations of Plates 189 4.4 Elastic Large-Deflection Behavior of Simply Supported Plates 191 4.5 Elastic Large-Deflection Behavior of Clamped Plates 201 4.6 Elastic Large-Deflection Behavior of Partially Rotation Restrained Plates 206 4.7 Effect of the Bathtub Deflection Shape 210 4.8 Evaluation of In-Plane Stiffness Reduction Due to Deflection 214 4.9 Ultimate Strength 234 4.10 Effect of Opening 251 4.11 Effect of Age Related Structural Deterioration 257 4.12 Effect of Local Denting Damage 260 4.13 Average Stress–Average Strain Relationship of Plates 261 References 267 5 Elastic and Inelastic Buckling Strength of Stiffened Panels and Grillages 271 5.1 Fundamentals of Stiffened Panel Buckling 271 5.2 Structural Idealizations of Stiffened Panels 272 5.3 Overall Buckling Versus Local Buckling 277 5.4 Elastic Overall Buckling Strength 278 5.5 Elastic Local Buckling Strength of Plating Between Stiffeners 283 5.6 Elastic Local Buckling Strength of Stiffener Web 283 5.7 Elastic Local Buckling Strength of Stiffener Flange 289 5.8 Lateral-Torsional Buckling Strength of Stiffeners 291 5.9 Elastic–Plastic Buckling Strength 299 References 299 6 Large-Deflection and Ultimate Strength Behavior of Stiffened Panels and Grillages 301 6.1 Fundamentals of Stiffened Panel Ultimate Strength Behavior 301 6.2 Classification of Panel Collapse Modes 302 6.3 Structural Idealizations of Stiffened Panels 305 6.4 Nonlinear Governing Differential Equations of Stiffened Panels 307 6.5 Elastic Large-Deflection Behavior After Overall Grillage Buckling 311 6.6 Ultimate Strength 315 6.7 Effects of Age Related and Accident Induced Damages 323 6.8 Benchmark Studies 323 References 331 7 Buckling and Ultimate Strength of Plate Assemblies: Corrugated Panels, Plate Girders, Box Columns, and Box Girders 333 7.1 Introduction 333 7.2 Ultimate Strength of Corrugated Panels 334 7.3 Ultimate Strength of Plate Girders 337 7.4 Ultimate Strength of Box Columns 347 7.5 Ultimate Strength of Box Girders 349 7.6 Effect of Age Related Structural Degradation 365 7.7 Effect of Accident Induced Structural Damage 365 References 366 8 Ultimate Strength of Ship Hull Structures 369 8.1 Introduction 369 8.2 Characteristics of Ship’s Hull Structures 369 8.3 Lessons Learned from Accidents 377 8.4 Fundamentals of Vessel’s Hull Girder Collapse 380 8.5 Characteristics of Ship Structural Loads 387 8.6 Calculations of Ship’s Hull Girder Loads 388 8.7 Minimum Section Modulus Requirement 392 8.8 Determination of Ultimate Hull Girder Strength 394 8.9 Safety Assessment of Ships 396 8.10 Effect of Lateral Pressure Loads 398 8.11 Ultimate Strength Interactive Relationships Between Combined Hull Girder Loads 403 8.12 Shakedown Limit State Associated with Hull Girder Collapse 408 8.13 Effect of Age Related Structural Degradation 410 8.14 Effect of Accident Induced Structural Damage 413 References 417 9 Structural Fracture Mechanics 421 9.1 Fundamentals of Structural Fracture Mechanics 421 9.2 Basic Concepts for Structural Fracture Mechanics Analysis 424 9.3 More on LEFM and the Modes of Crack Extension 427 9.4 Elastic–Plastic Fracture Mechanics 432 9.5 Fatigue Crack Growth Rate and Its Relationship to the Stress Intensity Factor 441 9.6 Buckling Strength of Cracked Plate Panels 443 9.7 Ultimate Strength of Cracked Plate Panels 450 References 467 10 Structural Impact Mechanics 471 10.1 Fundamentals of Structural Impact Mechanics 471 10.2 Load Effects Due to Impact 473 10.3 Material Constitutive Equation of Structural Materials Under Impact Loading 476 10.4 Ultimate Strength of Beams Under Impact Lateral Loads 485 10.5 Ultimate Strength of Columns Under Impact Axial Compressive Loads 487 10.6 Ultimate Strength of Plates Under Impact Lateral Pressure Loads 489 10.7 Ultimate Strength of Stiffened Panels Under Impact Lateral Loads 494 10.8 Crushing Strength of Plate Assemblies 494 10.9 Tearing Strength of Plates and Stiffened Panels 502 10.10 Impact Perforation of Plates 508 10.11 Impact Fracture of Plates and Stiffened Panels at Cold Temperature 510 10.12 Ultimate Strength of Plates Under Impact Axial Compressive Loads 511 10.13 Ultimate Strength of Dented Plates 513 References 533 11 The Incremental Galerkin Method 539 11.1 Features of the Incremental Galerkin Method 539 11.2 Structural Idealizations of Plates and Stiffened Panels 539 11.3 Analysis of the Elastic–Plastic Large-Deflection Behavior of Plates 542 11.4 Analysis of the Elastic–Plastic Large-Deflection Behavior of Stiffened Panels 552 11.5 Applied Examples 572 References 586 12 The Nonlinear Finite Element Method 587 12.1 Introduction 587 12.2 Extent of the Analysis 587 12.3 Types of Finite Elements 588 12.4 Mesh Size of Finite Elements 588 12.5 Material Modeling 593 12.6 Boundary Condition Modeling 596 12.7 Initial Imperfection Modeling 597 12.8 Order of Load Component Application 598 References 601 13 The Intelligent Supersize Finite Element Method 603 13.1 Features of the Intelligent Supersize Finite Element Method 603 13.2 Nodal Forces and Nodal Displacements of the Rectangular Plate Element 604 13.3 Strain versus Displacement Relationship 605 13.4 Stress versus Strain Relationship 607 13.5 Tangent Stiffness Equation 608 13.6 Stiffness Matrix for the Displacement Component, θ z 611 13.7 Displacement (Shape) Functions 611 13.8 Local to Global Transformation Matrix 612 13.9 Modeling of Flat Bar Stiffener Web and One-Sided Stiffener Flange 612 13.10 Applied Examples 613 References 632 Appendices 635 A.1 Source Listing of the FORTRAN Computer Program CARDANO 635 A.2 SI Units 636 A.3 Density and Viscosity of Water and Air 638 A.4 Scaling Laws for Physical Model Testing 638 Index 643

Read more less

Book SynopsisPROJECT BENEFIT REALISATION AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT Dispels the confusion between project management success and project success, showing how project sponsors can govern their projects to succeed in delivering the strategic benefits originally envisaged Project management success does not automatically lead to project success. Many large projects fail to live up to expectations, with between half and two-thirds of large projects either failing to deliver or delivering few strategic benefits. Traditional project management resources focus on delivering a project on time and on budget, yet they fail to supply top managers, many of whom find themselves in the role of accidental project sponsors, with guidance on how to govern their projects to succeed. Project Benefit Realisation and Project Management: The 6Q Governance Approach bridges the strategy to performance gap by providing boards, senior managers and project sponsors with the six critical questions nTable of ContentsList of Illustrations Preface 5 I. Introduction 6 The Board, Governance and Projects 6 Key Concepts 9 II. How to Govern Projects: 6 Questions Q1. What is the desired outcome? War Story – Lying to the Board How to know whether Q1 has been addressed adequately Q2. How much change? Q3. Sponsor Case Study – SkyHigh Q4. Success Measures Case Study – TechMedia Commentary Q5. The right project culture Case Study – The Agency Q6. Monitoring Case Study – TechMedia (contd. from p26) III. Tools and Techniques Q1 Strategy – Diagnostic Toolkit Case: A ‘routine’ project failure at TechServ Q2 Change – Tools and techniques Stakeholder Analysis Business Process Mapping Results Chain or Logic Model Influencer Analysis Case Study – The Agency Q4 Measurement – Tools and techniques Q6 Monitoring – tools and techniques IV. Further insight When do you ask each 6Q Governance™ question? The best guidance available V. The Future of Project Management and Governance Where do we go from here? The history and the future of project management Conclusion Appendix 1 – TechMedia Appendix 2 –SKYHIGH INVESTMENTS Appendix 3 –THE AGENCY Bibliography About the Authors Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides structural engineers with the knowledge and practical tools needed to perform structural designs for wind that incorporate major technological, conceptual, analytical and computational advances achieved in the last two decades. With clear explanations and documentation of the concepts, methods, algorithms, and software available for accounting for wind loads in structural design, it also describes the wind engineer''s contributions in sufficient detail that they can be effectively scrutinized by the structural engineer in charge of the design. Wind Effects on Structures: Modern Structural Design for Wind, 4th Edition is organized in four sections. The first covers atmospheric flows, extreme wind speeds, and bluff body aerodynamics. The second examines the design of buildings, and includes chapters on aerodynamic loads; dynamic and effective wind-induced loads; wind effects with specified MRIs; low-rise buildings; tall buildings; and moTrade Review"This is an excellent book following the tradition of the previous three editions in 1978, 1986 and 1996. The 4th edition is quite expanded and includes the most recent development in the field of wind engineering, making the book an excellent choice for any university graduate course in this area. (...) The 496-page book is clearly written, includes plenty of examples and utilizes suitable software, so it becomes indispensable for all researchers and graduate students in the wind engineering field. Practicing engineers, architects and other building design professionals will find this book very interesting and useful." Journal of Wind Engineering & Industrial Aerodynamics 212 (2021) 104635 “(The book) is a fundamental resource for both the experienced researcher and the practicing structural engineer.”Luca Caracoglia, F.ASCE, Journal of Structural Engineering, Volume 147, Issue 3 - March 2021, American Society of Civil EngineersTable of ContentsPreface to the Fourth Edition xix Introduction xxi Part I Atmospheric Flows, Extreme Wind Speeds, Bluff Body Aerodynamics 1 1 Atmospheric Circulations 3 2 The Atmospheric Boundary Layer 17 3 Extreme Wind Speeds 55 4 Bluff Body Aerodynamics 73 5 Aerodynamic Testing 105 6 Computational Wind Engineering 135 7 Uncertainties in Wind Engineering Data 157 Part II Design of Buildings 167 8 Structural Design for Wind 169 9 Stiffness Matrices, Second-Order Effects, and Influence Coefficients 179 10 Aerodynamic Loads 183 11 Dynamic and Effective Wind-Induced Loads 195 12 Wind Load Factors and Design Mean Recurrence Intervals 203 13 Wind Effects with Specified MRIs: DCIs, Inter-Story Drift, and Accelerations 211 14 Equivalent Static Wind Loads 219 15 Wind-Induced Discomfort in and Around Buildings 225 16 Mitigation of Building Motions 251 17 Rigid Portal Frames 259 18 Tall Buildings 267 Part III Aeroelastic Effects 283 19 Vortex-Induced Vibrations 287 20 Galloping and Torsional Divergence 297 21 Flutter 305 22 Slender Chimneys and Towers 315 23 Suspended-Span Bridges 331 Part IV Other Structures and Special Topics 347 24 Trussed Frameworks and Plate Girders 349 25 Offshore Structures 367 26 Tensile Membrane Structures 385 27 Tornado Wind and Atmospheric Pressure Change Effects 389 28 Tornado- and Hurricane-Borne Missile Speeds 399 Appendices 409 Appendix A Elements of Probability and Statistics 411 A.1 Introduction 411 A.2 Fundamental Relations 412 A.3 Random Variables and Probability Distributions 415 A.4 Descriptors of Random Variable Behavior 419 A.5 Geometric, Poisson, Normal, and Lognormal Distributions 420 A.6 Extreme Value Distributions 422 A.7 Statistical Estimates 425 A.8 Monte Carlo Methods 427 A.9 Non-Parametric Statistical Estimates 428 Appendix B Random Processes 433 B.1 Fourier Series and Fourier Integrals 433 B.2 Parseval’s Equality 435 B.3 Spectral Density Function of a Random Stationary Signal 435 B.4 Autocorrelation Function of a Random Stationary Signal 437 B.5 Cross-Covariance Function, Co-Spectrum, Quadrature Spectrum, Coherence 438 B.6 Mean Upcrossing and Outcrossing Rate for a Gaussian Process 439 B.7 Probability Distribution of the Peak Value of a Random Signal with Gaussian Marginal Distribution 441Appendix C Peaks-Over-Threshold Poisson-Process Procedure for Estimating Peaks 443 C.1 Introduction 443 C.2 Peak Estimation by Peaks-Over-Threshold Poisson-Process Procedure 444 C.3 Dependence of Peak Estimates by BLUE Upon Number of Partitions 451 C.4 Summary 451 Appendix D Structural Dynamics 455 D.1 Introduction 455 D.2 The Single-Degree-of-Freedom Linear System 455 D.3 Continuously Distributed Linear Systems 458 D.4 Example: Along-Wind Response 463 Appendix E Structural Reliability 467 E.1 Introduction 467 E.2 The Basic Problem of Structural Safety 468 E.3 First-Order Second-Moment Approach: Load and Resistance Factors 469 E.4 Structural Strength Reserve 475 E.5 Design Criteria for Multi-Hazard Regions 477 Appendix F World Trade Center Response to Wind 481 F.1 Overview 481 F.2 NIST-Supplied Documents 482 F.3 Discussion and Comments 482 Index 487

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface How to use this book CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 2: ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTANTS CHAPTER 3: POLLUTANTS, HEALTH, AND ENVIRONMENT CHAPTER 4: CHEMODYNAMICS OF POLLUTANTS CHAPTER 5: ENVIRONMENTAL TOXICOLOGY AND ECOTOXICOLOGY CHAPTER 6: GENETIC TOXICOLOGY AND ENDOCRINE DISRUPTION: ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMICALS CHAPTER 7: SOME PRINCIPLES OF POLLUTION ECOLOGY AND ECOTOXICOLOGY CHAPTER 8: POLLUTANTS IN THE OCEANS, ESTUARIES, AND FRESHWATER SYSTEMS CHAPTER 9: PESTICIDES CHAPTER10: PETROLEUM, COAL, AND BIOFUELS CHAPTER11: TOXIC ORGANIC POLLUTANTS CHAPTER 12: METALS CHAPTER 13: AIR POLLUTANTS CHAPTER 14: GREENHOUSE GASES, GLOBAL WARMING, AND CLIMATE CHANGE CHAPTER15: SOIL AND GOUNDWATER POLLUTION CHAPTER 16: SOLID, LIQUID, AND HAZARDOUS WASTES CHAPTER 17: POLLUTION MONITORING AND ASSESSMENT CHAPTER 18: HUMAN HEALTH AND ECOLOGICAL RISK ASSESSMENT CHAPTER19: MANAGEMENT OF HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS CHAPTER 20: POLLUTION: MOVING TOWARD A HEALTHY AND SUSTAINABLE FUTURE Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn introduction to the principles and practices of soil and groundwater remediation Soil and Groundwater Remediation offers a comprehensive and up-to-date review of the principles, practices, and concepts of sustainability of soil and groundwater remediation. The book starts with an overview of the importance of groundwater resource/quality, contaminant sources/types, and the scope of soil and groundwater remediation. It then provides the essential components of soil and groundwater remediation with easy-to-understand design equations/calculations and the practical applications. The book contains information on remediation basics such as subsurface chemical behaviors, soil and groundwater hydrology and characterization, regulations, cost analysis, and risk assessment. The author explores various conventional and innovative remediation technologies, including pump-and-treat, soil vapor extraction, bioremediation, incineration, thermally enhanced techniquesTable of ContentsAbout the Author xv Preface xvii Acknowledgments xxi Whom This Book is Written For xxiii To the Instructor xxv List of Symbols xxvii About the Companion Website xxxiii 1 Sources and Types of Soil and Groundwater Contamination 1 1.1 Uses of Surface Water vs. Groundwater 1 1.2 Groundwater Quantity vs. Groundwater Quality 4 1.3 Major Factors Affecting Groundwater Quality 6 1.4 Soil and Groundwater Contaminant Sources in the United States 8 1.4.1 Superfund Sites and Brownfields 9 1.4.2 RCRA Facilities and Underground Storage Tanks 12 1.4.3 DoD/DoE Sites 14 1.5 Contaminated Soil and Groundwater: A Global Perspective 14 1.6 Soil and Groundwater Remediation 16 1.6.1 Unique Challenges Relative to Air and Surface Water Pollution 16 1.6.2 Scope of Environmental Remediation 17 Bibliography 17 2 Subsurface Contaminant Fate and Transport 21 2.1 Frequent Soil and Groundwater Contaminants 22 2.1.1 Aliphatic and Aromatic Hydrocarbons 23 2.1.2 Halogenated Aliphatic Hydrocarbons 24 2.1.3 Halogenated Aromatic Hydrocarbons 25 2.1.4 Nitrogen‐containing Organic Compounds 26 2.1.5 Oxygenated Organic Compounds 27 2.1.6 Sulfur‐ and Phosphorus‐containing Organic Compounds 28 2.1.7 Inorganic Nonmetals, Metals, and Radionuclides 29 2.2 Abiotic and Biotic Chemical Fate Processes 30 2.2.1 Hydrolysis 31 2.2.2 Oxidation and Reduction 32 2.2.3 Biodegradation 35 2.3 Interphase Chemical Transport 35 2.3.1 Volatilization 36 2.3.2 Solubilization, Precipitation, and Dissolution 38 2.3.2.1 Solubility and Solubility Product for Inorganic Compounds 38 2.3.2.2 Solubility and Kow for Organic Compounds 41 2.3.3 Sorption and Desorption 42 2.4 Intraphase Chemical Movement 48 2.4.1 Advection 49 2.4.2 Dispersion and Diffusion 49 Bibliography 53 3 Soil and Groundwater Hydrology 59 3.1 Soil Composition and Properties 60 3.1.1 Constituents of Soils 60 3.1.2 Soil Physical and Chemical Properties 62 3.2 Basic Concepts of Aquifer and Wells 66 3.2.1 Vertical Distribution of Aquifer 66 3.2.2 Groundwater Well and Well Nomenclature 68 3.2.3 Hydrogeological Parameters 68 3.2.3.1 Specific Yield and Specific Retention 68 3.2.3.2 Hydraulic Conductivity and Permeability 70 3.2.3.3 Transmissivity and Storativity 71 3.3 Groundwater Movement 73 3.3.1 Flow in Saturated Zone 74 3.3.2 Flow in Unsaturated Zone 77 3.3.3 Flow to Wells in a Steady‐State Confined Aquifer 80 3.3.4 Flow to Wells in a Steady-State Unconfined Aquifer 82 3.3.5 Flow of Nonaqueous Phase Liquid 84 Bibliography 86 4 Legal, Economical, and Risk Assessment Considerations 91 4.1 Soil and Groundwater Protection Laws 92 4.1.1 Relevant Soil and Groundwater Laws in the United States 92 4.1.1.1 Safe Drinking Water Act 93 4.1.1.2 Resource Conservation and Recovery Act 94 4.1.1.3 Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act 95 4.1.1.4 Hazardous and Solid Waste Amendment 95 4.1.1.5 Superfund Amendment and Reauthorization Act 96 4.1.1.6 Small Business Liability Relief and Brownfields Revitalization Act 96 4.1.2 Framework of Environmental Laws in Other Countries 96 4.2 Cost Constraints in Remediation 97 4.2.1 Remediation Cost Elements 99 4.2.2 Basis for Remediation Cost Estimates 99 4.2.3 Cost Comparisons among Remediation Alternatives 101 4.3 Risk‐based Remediation 104 4.3.1 How Clean is Clean 104 4.3.2 Estimate Environmental Risk from Carcinogenic Compounds 108 4.3.3 Estimate Environmental Risk from Noncarcinogenic Compounds 112 4.3.4 Determine Risk-Based Cleanup Levels for Soil and Groundwater 113 4.3.4.1 Determining Maximum Concentration in Drinking Water and Air 114 4.3.4.2 Determining Allowable Soil Cleanup Level 115 4.3.4.3 Risk Involving Multimedia 116 Bibliography 118 5 Site Characterization for Soil and Groundwater Remediation 123 5.1 General Consideration of Site Characterization 124 5.1.1 Objectives and Scopes of Site Characterization 124 5.1.2 Basic Steps: Phase I, II, and III Assessment 125 5.1.2.1 Phase I Environmental Site Assessment 125 5.1.2.2 Phase II Environmental Site Assessment 126 5.2 Soil and Geologic Characterization 130 5.2.1 Stratigraphy, Lithology, and Structural Geology 130 5.2.2 Direct Drilling Methods 130 5.2.3 Drive Method Using Cone Penetrometer 132 5.2.4 Indirect Geophysical Methods 132 5.3 Hydrogeologic Site Investigation 138 5.3.1 Well Installation, Development, and Purging 138 5.3.2 Hydraulic Head and Flow Direction 139 5.3.2.1 Methods to Measure Hydraulic Head 140 5.3.2.2 Groundwater Flow Direction 140 5.3.3 Aquifer Tests to Estimate Hydraulic Conductivity 141 5.3.3.1 Slug Test: Hvorslev Method 142 5.3.3.2 Slug Test: Bouwer and Rice Method 143 5.3.3.3 Pumping Test: Theis Type‐Curve Method 143 5.4 Environmental Sampling and Analysis 146 5.4.1 Common Soil Samplers 146 5.4.2 Groundwater Sampling 148 5.4.2.1 Groundwater Sampling Tools 148 5.4.2.2 Cross‐Contamination in Groundwater Sampling 149 5.4.3 Vadose Zone Soil Gas and Water Sampling 150 5.4.4 Instruments for Chemical Analysis 150 Bibliography 152 6 Overview of Remediation Options 157 6.1 Types of Remediation Technologies 158 6.1.1 Classifications of Remediation Technologies 158 6.1.2 Common and Frequently Used Remediation Technologies 162 6.1.3 Technologies from Contaminant Perspectives 163 6.2 Development and Selection of Remediation Technologies 168 6.2.1 Remedial Investigation/Remedial Feasibility Study 172 6.2.2 Remediation Technologies Screening and Selection Criteria 174 6.2.3 Green and Sustainable Remediation 178 6.3 A Snapshot of Remediation Technologies 179 6.3.1 Description of Various Treatments 180 6.3.2 Treatment Train 180 Bibliography 183 7 Pump‐and‐Treat Systems 187 7.1 General Applications of Conventional Pump‐and‐Treat 188 7.1.1 Contaminant Removal versus Hydraulic Containment 188 7.1.2 Schemes of Injection/Extraction Well Placement 191 7.2 Design of Pump‐and‐Treat Systems 192 7.2.1 Capture Zone Analysis of Pump‐and‐Treat Optimization 194 7.2.2 Aboveground Treatment of Contaminated Groundwater 198 7.2.2.1 General Treatment Technologies Available 198 7.2.2.2 Design Considerations for Air Stripping 200 7.2.2.3 Design Considerations for Activated Carbon 202 7.3 Pump‐and‐Treat Limitations and Alterations 204 7.3.1 Residual Saturations of Nonaqueous Phase Liquid 204 7.3.1.1 Dissolved Contaminant from NAPLs 204 7.3.1.2 Residual Saturation 205 7.3.2 Tailing and Rebound Problems 209 7.3.2.1 Slow NAPL Dissolution 209 7.3.2.2 Slow Contaminant Desorption/Precipitate Dissolution 210 7.3.2.3 Slow Matrix Diffusion 211 7.3.2.4 Groundwater Velocity Variation 211 7.3.3 Alterations of Conventional Pump‐and‐Treat 212 7.3.3.1 Chemical Enhancement to Increase Contaminant Mobility and Solubility 213 7.3.3.2 Horizontal Wells, Inclined Wells, Interceptor Trenches, and Drains 213 7.3.3.3 Phased Extraction Wells, Adaptive Pumping, and Pulsed Pumping 215 7.3.3.4 Induced Fractures 216 7.3.3.5 Pumping in Conjunction with Permeable and Impermeable Barriers 217 Bibliography 219 8 Soil Vapor Extraction and Air Sparging 225 8.1 General Applications and Limitations of Vapor Extraction 226 8.1.1 Process Description and System Components 226 8.1.2 Chemical and Geologic Parameters Affecting Vapor Extraction 227 8.1.3 Pros and Cons of Vapor Extraction and Air Sparging 229 8.2 Soil Vapor Behavior and Gas Flow in Subsurface 231 8.2.1 Airflow Patterns in Subsurface 231 8.2.2 Vapor Equilibrium and Thermodynamics 233 8.2.3 Kinetics of Volatilization, Vapor Diffusion, and NAPL Dissolution 239 8.2.4 Darcy’s Law for Advective Vapor Flow 241 8.3 Design for Vapor Extraction and Air Sparging Systems 245 8.3.1 Quantitative Analysis for the Appropriateness of Soil Venting 245 8.3.2 Well Number, Flow Rate, and Well Location 249 8.3.3 Other Design Considerations 251 Bibliography 257 9 Bioremediation and Environmental Biotechnology 263 9.1 Principles of Bioremediation and Biotechnology 264 9.1.1 Microorganisms and Microbial Growth 265 9.1.1.1 Types of Microorganisms 265 9.1.1.2 Cell Growth on Contaminant 267 9.1.2 Reaction Stoichiometry and Kinetics 271 9.1.3 Biodegradation Potentials and Pathways 275 9.1.3.1 Biodegradation of Petroleum Aliphatic Hydrocarbons 276 9.1.3.2 Biodegradation of Single‐Ring Petroleum Aromatic Hydrocarbon (BTEX) 276 9.1.3.3 Biodegradation of Fuel Additives (MTBE) 278 9.1.3.4 Biodegradation of Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAHs) 278 9.1.3.5 Biodegradation of Chlorinated Aliphatic Hydrocarbons (CAHs) 279 9.1.3.6 Biodegradation of Chlorinated Aromatic Compounds 280 9.1.3.7 Biodegradation of Explosive Compounds 280 9.1.4 Optimal Conditions for Bioremediation 281 9.1.4.1 Hydrogeologic Parameters 282 9.1.4.2 Soil/Groundwater Physicochemical Parameters 283 9.1.4.3 Microbial Presence 285 9.1.4.4 Contaminant Characteristics 285 9.2 Process Description of Bioremediation and Biotechnologies 286 9.2.1 In Situ Bioremediation 287 9.2.2 Ex Situ Biological Treatment 290 9.2.2.1 Biopiles and Composting 290 9.2.2.2 Landfarming 292 9.2.2.3 Bioslurry Reactors 293 9.2.3 Sanitary Landfills 293 9.2.4 Phytoremediation and Constructed Wetland 294 9.3 Design Considerations and Cost‐Effectiveness 300 9.3.1 General Design Rationales 300 9.3.1.1 Design for In Situ Groundwater Bioremediation 300 9.3.1.2 Design for Bioventing 301 9.3.1.3 Design for Biosparging 301 9.3.1.4 Design for Biopiles and Composting 301 9.3.1.5 Design of Landfill 302 9.3.2 Cost Effectiveness Case Studies 302 Bibliography 305 10 Thermal Remediation Technologies 315 10.1 Thermal Destruction by Incineration 316 10.1.1 Principles of Combustion and Incineration 316 10.1.1.1 Combustion Chemistry and Combustion Efficiency 316 10.1.1.2 Heating Values of Fuels/Wastes 319 10.1.1.3 Oxygen (Air) Requirement 320 10.1.1.4 Three T’s of the Combustion/Incineration 323 10.1.2 Components of Hazardous Waste Incinerator Systems 324 10.1.2.1 General Applications: Pros and Cons 324 10.1.2.2 Incinerator System Components 325 10.1.2.3 Four Types of Combustion Chambers 326 10.1.3 Design Considerations for Incineration 328 10.1.3.1 Incinerator Size and Dimensions 329 10.1.3.2 Factors Affecting Incinerator Performance 331 10.1.4 Regulatory and Siting Considerations 332 10.2 Thermally Enhanced Technologies 332 10.2.1 Temperature Effects on Physicochemical and Biological Properties 333 10.2.2 Heat Transfer Mechanisms in Soil and Groundwater 338 10.2.3 Required Heat‐Up Time and Radius of Influence 338 10.2.4 Use of Hot Air, Steam, Hot Water, and Electro‐Heating 339 10.2.4.1 Hot Air, Steam, Hot Water, and Electro-Heating 339 10.2.4.2 Flow Chart to Select Thermal Processes 343 10.3 Vitrification 344 Bibliography 347 11 Soil Washing and Flushing 353 11.1 Basic Principles of Soil Washing and Flushing 354 11.1.1 Overview of Soil Washing and Flushing 354 11.1.2 Surfactant‐Enhanced Contaminant Solubilization 356 11.1.3 Surfactant‐Enhanced Contaminant Mobilization 358 11.1.4 Cosolvent Effects on Solubility and Mobilization 361 11.2 Process Description, Technology Applicability, and Limitations 363 11.2.1 Ex Situ Soil Washing 364 11.2.2 In Situ Soil Flushing and Cosolvent Flooding 368 11.3 Design and Cost‐Effectiveness Considerations 370 11.3.1 Chemical Additives in Soil Washing and Flushing 370 11.3.2 Recycle of Chemical Additives and Disposal of Flushing Wastes 373 Bibliography 375 12 Permeable Reactive Barriers 379 12.1 Reaction Mechanisms and Hydraulics in Reactive Barriers 380 12.1.1 Barrier Technologies as a Viable Option for Pump‐and‐Treat 380 12.1.2 Dechlorination Mediated through Redox Reactions by Zero‐Valent Iron 381 12.1.3 Other Abiotic and Biotic Processes in Reactive Barriers 384 12.1.4 Hydraulics and Fouling Problems in Reactive Barriers 386 12.2 Process Description of Reactive Barriers 388 12.2.1 Configurations of Reactive Barriers 388 12.2.2 Available Reactive Media and Selection 389 12.2.2.1 Types of Reactive Media 389 12.2.2.2 Reactive Media Selection 391 12.3 Design and Construction Considerations 392 12.3.1 Barrier Design Concept 392 12.3.2 Construction Methods 394 Bibliography 400 13 Modeling of Groundwater Flow and Contaminant Transport 403 13.1 Governing Equations for Groundwater Flow 404 13.1.1 Saturated Groundwater Flow under Steady‐State Condition (Laplace Equation) 404 13.1.2 Saturated Groundwater Flow under Transient Condition 406 13.1.3 Unsaturated Groundwater Flow under Transient Condition (Richards Equation) 407 13.2 Governing Equations for Contaminant Transport 408 13.2.1 General Mass Balance Equations Considering Advection and Dispersion 408 13.2.2 Governing Equations for Contaminant Transport in Unsaturated Zone 411 13.2.3 Governing Equations Incorporating Adsorption and Reaction 412 13.2.4 General Concepts and Equations Describing Multiphase Flow and Transport 415 13.2.4.1 Processes Relevant to Multiphase and Multiple Components 415 13.2.4.2 Framework of Governing Equations for Multiphase Flow and Transport 417 13.3 Analytical Solutions to Flow and Transport Processes 420 13.3.1 Darcy’s Law: 1‐D Flow in Unconfined Aquifer (Dupuit Equation) 420 13.3.2 Fick’s Second Law: 1‐D Diffusion Only Solutions 422 13.3.3 Advection and Dispersion: 1‐D, 2‐D, and 3‐D Solutions to Slug Injection 424 13.3.4 Advection and Dispersion: 1‐D Solutions to Continuous Injection 425 13.3.5 Advection and Dispersion: 2‐D and 3‐D Solutions to Continuous Injection 427 13.4 Numerical Solutions to Flow and Transport Processes 430 13.4.1 Partial Differential Equations and Numerical Methods 430 13.4.2 2‐D Laplace Equation Using Finite Difference Method 433 Bibliography 436 Appendix A Common Abbreviations and Acronyms 439 Appendix B Definition of Soil and Groundwater Remediation Technologies 445 Appendix C Structures and Properties of Important Organic Pollutants in Soil and Groundwater 451 Appendix D Unit Conversion Factors 459 Appendix E Answers to Selected Problems 461 Index 465 IUPAC Periodic Table of the Elements 477

Read more less

Book SynopsisExpert tips for the last piece in the paperless puzzle The Bluebeam Guidebook offers comprehensive coverage of the industry's leading PDF tool to help AEC professionals adopt a more efficient digital workflow. With desktop, mobile, and server-based products, Bluebeam makes collaboration and document coordination seamless, and provides a perfect complement to BIM software. This book shows you how to push the boundaries and discover the software's true capabilities. Written expressly for working AEC professionals, this book offers tips, tricks, and ideas that cater to industry-specific needs. Expert instruction and step-by-step guidance helps you get started quickly, and case studies feature users from firms such as Kiewit, Populus, Sundt Construction, and more to show you how Bluebeam is quickly becoming a critical component of design and construction. Master the industry's leading PDF software and alternative to Adobe Acrobat Create,Table of ContentsForeword ix Acknowledgments xi Introduction xiii Chapter 1: Taking the Leap: Switching from Red to Blue 1 Products and Feature Comparison 1 License Pricing 2 Value Proposition 5 For IT 9 Training 11 Conclusion 14 Chapter 2: Doing Red in Blue 15 Changing Preferences 15 Tabs and Toolbars 17 Creating PDFs 19 PDF Document Actions 21 Conclusion 35 Chapter 3: Redlining 37 The User Interface 37 Conclusion 65 Chapter 4: Redlining Together 67 Getting into Studio 69 Sessions 71 Projects 94 Managing Notifi cations 104 Conclusion 104 Chapter 5: Management of Change 105 Digital Slip Sheeting 105 Bluebeam Sets 114 Tags 123 Conclusion 135 Chapter 6: Issuing 137 Stamps 137 Flatten 142 Digital Signatures 143 Document Management Systems 152 Summary 154 Export 156 Conclusion 157 Chapter 7: Measuring and Estimating 159 Calibration 159 Measurement Tools 161 Estimating 174 Conclusion 187 Chapter 8: In the Field 189 Revu App for iPad 189 Mobile Access 208 Field-Generated Documents 210 Conclusion 224 Chapter 9: Go Digital, Document Assembly 225 PDF Forms 225 Functions 233 Batch Functions 238 Document Security 256 Conclusion 258 Chapter 10: Go Digital, Engineering 259 Measuring 259 Sketching 262 Comparing Documents 268 Layers 276 Batch Sign & Seal 284 3D PDFs 288 Conclusion 294 Chapter 11: Possibilities and Potential 295 Recent Bluebeam Trends 295 Recent Industry and Technology Trends 298 Untapped Potential 301 Future Possibilities and Potential Impacts 308 Conclusions and Final Thoughts 310 Index 313

Read more less

Book SynopsisWritten by one of the world''s foremost authorities on the subject, this is the most comprehensive and in-depth treatment available to environmental engineers and scientists for the remediation of groundwater, one of the earth''s most precious resources. Groundwater is one of the Earth''s most precious resources. We use it for drinking, bathing, and many other purposes. Without clean water, humans would cease to exist. Unfortunately, because of ignorance or lack of caring, groundwater is often contaminated through industrialization, construction or any number of other ways. It is the job of the environmental engineer to remediate the contaminated groundwater and make what has been tainted safe again.Selecting the proper remediation strategy and process is the key to moving forward, and, once this process has been selected, it must be executed properly, taking into consideration the costs, the type of contaminants that are involved, time frames, and many other factors.<Table of ContentsPreface xi About the Author xv 1 Conducting Groundwater Quality Investigations 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Evolution of Site Assessments 2 1.3 Technology Limitations and Cleanup Goals 14 1.4 Conceptual Models 14 1.4.1 Source and Release Information 15 1.4.2 Geologic and Hydrogeologic Characterization 16 1.4.3 Contaminant Distribution, Transport and Fate 17 1.4.4 Geochemistry Impacting Natural Biodegradation 17 1.5 Risk Assessment Concepts 18 1.6 Institutional Controls 20 1.7 Risk-Based Cleanup Goals and Screening Level Evaluations 20 1.8 Assessing Plume Migration Potential 25 2 The Family of DNAPLs 37 2.1 Defining DNAPL 37 2.2 Chemicals and Origins 38 2.2.1 Creosote and Coal Tars 38 2.2.2 Polychlorinated Biphenyls 41 2.2.3 Chlorinated Solvents 44 2.2.4 Mixtures 48 2.3 DNAPL Behavior 49 2.3.1 General Behavior and Concepts 49 2.3.2 Important Parameters for Site Characterization 56 2.4 Overview of Remediation Strategies 59 2.4.1 Remediation Goals 59 2.4.2 Technologies 63 2.4.2.1 Pump-and-Treat 63 2.4.2.2 Permeable Reactive Barriers 63 2.4.2.3 Physical Barriers 64 2.4.2.4 Enhanced Biodegradation 64 2.4.2.5 Thermal Technologies 64 2.4.2.6 Chemical Flushing 65 2.4.2.7 Excavation and Removal 65 2.4.2.8 Soil Vacuum Extraction 66 2.4.2.9 Water Flooding 66 2.4.2.10 Air Sparging 66 3 Hydrocarbons 69 3.1 Fate and Transport 69 3.1.1 General 69 3.1.2 Advective Transport 70 3.1.3 Dispersion 70 3.1.4 Sorption 71 3.1.5 Dilution and Recharge 73 3.1.6 Volatilization 73 3.2 Gasoline Compounds 74 3.2.1 General Description 74 3.2.2 The BTEX Compounds and MTBE 74 3.2.3 Properties of VOCs 75 3.2.4 Degradation 75 3.2.5 Half-Lifes 77 3.3 Pump and Treat 79 3.3.1 Concept 79 3.3.2 Non-Aqueous Phase Liquids 85 3.3.3 Contaminant Desorption and Precipitate Dissolution 86 3.3.4 Remedial Technologies 87 3.3.5 EPA Cost Data for Pump-and-Treat 89 4 1,4-Dioxane 95 4.1 Overview 95 4.2 Properties, Fate and Transport 98 4.3 Health Effects and Regulations 103 4.4 Remediation Technologies 104 4.4.1 Advanced Oxidation (Ex Situ) 109 4.4.2 Adsorption (GAC) (Ex Situ) 113 4.4.3 Bioremediation 113 4.4.4 Treatment in Soil 114 5 Perfluorinated Compounds (PFCS) 117 5.1 Overview 117 5.2 Origins of the Contaminants 118 5.3 PFAs Properties and Structures 121 5.3.1 General Description 121 5.3.2 Variations of PFAS 123 5.3.3 PFOS 126 5.3.4 PFOA 129 5.4 Environmental Fate and Transport 130 5.5 Groundwater Contamination 144 5.6 Water Treatment 149 5.7 Estimating Carbon Treatement Costs 157 6 Chlorinated Solvents 163 6.1 Physico-Chemical Properties of Chlorinated Solvents 163 6.2 Origins of Groundwater Contamination 167 6.3 Fate and Transport 168 6.3.1 Properties 168 6.3.2 Degradation and Daughter Products 170 6.3.3 Biodegradation Half-Life 173 6.3.4 DNAPL Migration 185 6.4 Groundwater Remediation Strategies 188 6.4.1 Preliminary Considerations 188 6.4.2 Soil Excavation, Treatment and Disposal 195 6.4.3 Soil Vapor Extraction 197 6.4.4 Enhanced Methods of Soil Vapor Extraction 201 6.4.5 In Situ Air Sparging 202 6.4.6 Enhanced Biodegradation 210 6.4.7 In-well Aeration and Recirculation 215 6.4.8 Reactive and Permeable Walls 216 6.5 Costs 217 6.5.1 Soil Excavation, Treatment and Disposal 217 6.5.2 Soil Vapor Extraction 220 6.5.3 Air Sparging Comparisons to other Technologies 227 7 Mineral Ions and Natural Groundwater Contaminants 233 7.1 Overview 233 7.2 Secondary Drinking Water Standards 236 7.3 Irrigation Water Quality Standards 238 7.3.1 Salts 238 7.3.2 Water Analysis Terminology 238 7.3.3 Types of Salt Problems 239 7.3.4 Salinity Hazard 241 7.3.5 Sodium Hazard 242 7.3.6 Trace Elements and Limits 242 7.4 Water Treatment Membrane Technologies 247 7.4.1 Overview 247 7.4.2 Reverse Osmosis (RO) 248 7.4.3 Nanofiltration 255 7.4.4 Microfiltration 258 7.4.5 Ultrafiltration 260 7.4.6 Treatment Costs 262 7.4.7 Secondary Wastes 265 7.4.8 Selection Criteria 265 7.5 Ion Exchange 266 7.5.1 Technology Description 266 7.5.2 Chelating Agents 271 7.5.3 Batch and Column Exchange Systems 272 7.5.4 Process Equipment 272 7.5.5 Cost Data 275 7.6 Crystallization 279 7.6.1 Technology Description 279 7.6.2 Forced-Circulation Crysallizers 286 7.6.3 Draft-tube Crystallizers and Draft-tube-baffle Crystallizers 288 7.6.4 Surface-Cooled Crystallizers 289 7.6.5 Oslo Crystallizers 291 7.6.6 Fluid-Bed Type Crystallizers 292 8 Heavy Metals and Mixed Media Remediation Technologies for Contaminated Soils and Groundwater 299 8.1 Nature of the Problem 299 8.2 Toxic Metal Chemical Forms, Speciation and Properties 300 8.3 Remedial Technology Strategies 306 8.3.1 Isolation 306 8.3.2 Capping 306 8.3.3 Subsurface Barriers 313 8.3.4 Immobilization 315 8.3.5 Solidification/Stabilization 317 8.3.6 Vitrification 321 8.3.7 Toxicity and Mobility Reduction 323 8.3.8 Wet Oxidation Process 331 8.3.9 Advanced Oxidation Technologies 333 8.3.10 Permeable Treatment Walls 343 8.3.11 Biological Treatment 344 8.3.12 Physical Separation 346 8.3.13 Extraction 349 8.3.14 Soil Washing 349 8.3.15 Soil Screening 350 8.3.16 Chemical Treatment 350 8.3.17 Physical Treatment 351 8.3.18 Pyrometallurgical Extraction 352 8.3.19 In Situ Soil Flushing 352 8.3.20 Electrokinetic Treatment 352 8.4 Cost Data 353 8.4.1 General Cost Information 353 8.4.2 Site Capping 356 8.4.3 In situ Solidification/Stabilization 358 8.4.4 Ex Situ Solidification/Stabilization 361 8.4.5 Soil Washing 365 8.4.6 Slurry Walls 367 Index 379

Read more less

Book SynopsisBridges the gaps between regulatory, engineering, and science disciplines in order to comprehensively cover pollutant fate and transport in environmental multimedia This book presents and integrates all aspects of fate and transport: chemistry, modeling, various forms of assessment, and the environmental legal framework. It approaches each of these topics initially from a conceptual perspective before explaining the concepts in terms of the math necessary to model the problem so that students of all levels can learn and eventually contribute to the advancement of water quality science. The first third ofPollutant Fate and Transport in Environmental Multimediais dedicated to the relevant aspects of chemistry behind the fate and transport processes. It provides relatively simple examples and problems to teach these principles. The second third of the book is based on the conceptual derivation and the use of common models to evaluate the importance of model parameters and sensitivity aTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xiii Acronyms xv Glossary xix About the Companion Website xxiii To the Instructor xxv To the Student xxvii To the Environmental Professional xxix How to Use the Book with Fate® and Associated Software xxxi Instructor/Student Resources xxxiii Part I Introduction 1 1 Sources and Types of Pollutants, Why We Need Modeling, and the Need to Study Historical Pollution Events 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Need for Modeling of Pollutants in Environmental Media 4 1.3 Pollution versus Contamination; Pollutant versus Contaminant 4 1.4 Pollution Classifications 5 1.5 Sources of Pollution 5 1.6 Historic Examples of Where Fate and Transport Modeling Are Useful 10 1.7 Environmental Laws 21 Concepts 22 Exercises 22 Bibliography 22 Part II Chemistry of Fate and Transport Modeling 25 2 Basic Chemical Processes in Pollutant Fate and Transport Modeling 27 2.1 The Liquid Medium: Water and the Water Cycle 27 2.2 Unique Properties of Water 28 2.3 Concentration Units 32 2.4 Chemical Aspects of Environmental Systems 32 2.5 Reactions and Equilibrium 44 2.6 Complexation 53 2.7 Equilibrium Sorption Phenomena 54 2.8 Transformation/Degradation Reactions 63 2.9 Fugacity Concepts and Modeling 67 2.10 Summary 68 Concepts 68 Exercises 68 References 69 3 Quantitative Aspects of Chemistry Toward Modeling 71 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 Calculation of the Free Metal Ion Concentration in Natural Waters 71 3.3 Methods for Determining Kd and Kp 83 3.4 Kinetics of the Sorption Process 85 3.5 Sorption Isotherms 87 3.6 Kinetics of Transformation Reactions 89 3.7 Numerical Chemical Speciation Models 90 3.8 Putting It All Together: Where Chemistry Enters Into the Modeling Effort 91 3.9 Basic Approach to Fate and Transport Modeling 93 Exercises 95 Bibliography 99 Part III Modeling 101 4 An Overview of Pollutant Fate and Transport Modeling 103 4.1 Modeling Approaches 103 4.2 Quality of Modeling Results 109 4.3 What Do You Do with Your Modeling Results? 109 Bibliography 110 5 Fate and Transport Concepts for Lake Systems 111 Case Study 1: Lake Onondaga 111 Case Study 2: Lake Erie, A More Positive Example 112 Chapter Overview 112 5.1 Introduction 112 5.2 Types of Lakes and Lake-forming Events 113 5.3 Input Sources 117 5.4 Stratification of Lake Systems 118 5.5 Environmental Sampling of Lake Systems 120 5.6 Important Factors in the Modeling of Lakes: Conceptual Model Development 122 5.7 Two Basic Mathematical Models for Lakes (Derivation by John Brooksbank in the Chapter Appendix) 126 5.8 Sensitivity Analysis 130 5.9 Limitations of Our Models 131 5.10 Remediation 131 5.11 Numerical Modeling Approaches for Large Lakes 133 5.12 Useful Algebraic Model Formulation 133 5.A Derivation of the two basic forms of fate and transport models for lake system: step (continuous) model and pulse (instantaneous) (derivations by John Brooksbank) 134 Concepts 136 Exercises 136 Bibliography 139 6 Fate and Transport of Pollutants in Rivers and Streams 141 Case Study: The Rhine River 141 6.1 Introduction 141 6.2 Examples of Rivers and Volumetric Flows of Water 142 6.3 Input Sources 143 6.4 Sampling of Surface Waters 143 6.5 Important Factors in the Modeling of Streams: Conceptualization of Terms 144 6.6 Mathematical Development of Transport Models (Derivations by John Brooksbank, Here and in Chapter Appendix) 147 6.7 Sensitivity Analysis 151 6.8 Limitations of Our Models 151 6.9 Remediation of Polluted Stream Systems 152 Suggested Papers for Class Discussion 153 Concepts 153 Exercises 153 Spreadsheet Exercise 156 6.A Model Derivatives for River and Stream Systems (Derivations by John Brooksbank) 156 Bibliography 161 7 Dissolved Oxygen Sag Curves in Streams: The Streeter–Phelps Equation 163 Case Study: Any Stream, Anywhere in the World 163 7.1 Introduction 163 7.2 Basic Input Sources (Wastewater Flow Rates and BOD Levels) 166 7.3 Sampling of Wastewater 168 7.4 Mass Balance-Based Development of the Basic Streeter–Phelps Model 168 7.5 Sensitivity Analysis 175 7.6 Limitations of Our Basic Model and More Elaborate Models 175 7.7 Remediation 175 7.8 One Last Note on Estuaries 177 Suggested Reading for Discussion 178 Concepts 178 Exercises 178 Spreadsheet Exercise 182 7.A Derivation of the Streeter-Phelps (DO Sag Curve) Equation (By John Brooksbank 182 Bibliography 184 8 Fate and Transport Concepts for Groundwater Systems 187 Case Study: The Test Area North Deep Well Injection Site at the Idaho National Environmental and Engineering Laboratory (INEEL) 187 8.1 Introduction 187 8.2 Input Sources 188 8.3 Monitoring Wells 189 8.4 Groundwater Sampling Equipment 195 8.5 Chemistry Experiments Used to Support Modeling Efforts 195 8.6 Direction of Water Flow (The Three-Point Problem) 200 8.7 Physical Parameters Important in Pollutant Fate and Transport 202 8.8 Derivation of Mathematical Models for Groundwater 208 8.9 Sensitivity Analysis 213 8.10 Limitations of Our Models 213 8.11 Remediation 214 8.12 Numerical Models Used by Professionals 216 Suggested Papers for Class Discussion 216 Concepts 216 Exercises 216 Spreadsheet Exercise 219 Bibliography 219 9 Fate and Transport Concepts Atmospheric Systems 221 Case Study: The Union Carbide-Bhopal Accident 221 9.1 Introduction 222 9.2 Input Sources 222 9.3 Atmospheric Sampling Equipment and Efforts 222 9.4 Important Factors in the Modeling of Atmospheric Pollution: Conceptual Model Development 224 9.5 Mathematical Development of Model 227 9.6 Sensitivity Analysis 233 9.7 Limitations of Our Model 234 9.8 Remediation 235 9.9 Models Used by Professionals 235 Concepts 235 Suggested Reading for Class Discussions 235 Exercises 235 Plume (step or continuous) Input Problems 236 Puff (Pulse or Instantaneous) Pollutant Inputs 236 Spreadsheet Exercise 237 Bibliography 237 10 Regulatory Environmental Modeling Practices and Software 239Raymond C. Whittemore 10.1 Introduction 239 10.2 Generic Model Types 239 10.3 Model Availability 240 10.4 Atmospheric Quality Models 240 10.5 Surface Water Models 242 10.6 Large-Scale Watershed Models 246 10.7 Subsurface or Groundwater Models 248 10.8 Modeling of Toxic Substances 250 10.9 Human Health Risk Assessment 251 10.10 Other Useful Regulatory Models 251 Exercises 251 Bibliography 252 Part IV Toxicology and Risk Assessment 255 11 Toxicology, Risk Assessment, Cost–Benefit Analysis, and Life Cycle Assessment 257 11.1 Introduction 257 11.2 Toxicology 257 11.3 Risk Assessment 258 11.4 Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) 274 11.5 Benefit–Cost Analysis 276 11.6 Summary 276 Concepts 276 Exercises 277 Bibliography 280 Part V Environmental Legislation in the United States 281 12 US Environmental Laws 283Frank Dunnivant, Lance DeMuth, Savanna Ferguson, Rose Kormanyos, Loren Sackett, and Jill Schulte 12.1 Environmental Movements in the United States 283 12.2 The History of the Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA) 284 12.3 Major US Environmental Laws 285 12.4 EPA’s Record 300 12.5 Environmental Permitting and Compliance 302 12.6 International Agreements/Treaties Involving the United States 302 12.7 Summary 305 Exercises 305 Disclaimer 305 Bibliography 305 13 Environmental Policy in the European Union 307Steven Woolston and Aisha Kimbrough 13.1 Introduction to the European Union 307 13.2 The Environment and the European Union 307 13.3 The Early Stages of the EU’s Environmental Efforts 307 13.4 Existing Environmental Legislation 308 13.5 Waste Management Legislation 308 13.6 Water Legislation 309 13.7 Air Quality Legislation 309 13.8 Environmental Disasters 310 Bibliography 310 14 Environmental Laws in China 311Zeyu Liu (刘泽宇) and Yi Xu (徐逸) 14.1 Environmental Law and Policy in the People’s Republic of China 311 14.2 Brief Introduction to China 311 14.3 Economy and the Environment 311 14.4 History of Environmental Law and Policy 312 14.5 Existing Environmental Law and Policy 314 14.6 Challenges and the Future of Environmental Governance 314 14.7 Can China Take on the Leading Role in the Global Environmental Governance? 315 Bibliography 316 Part VI World Class Pollutants 319 15 World Class Pollutants 321Frank Dunnivant and Emily Welborn 15.1 Mercury 321 15.2 Lead 323 15.3 PCBs 325 15.4 DDT 326 15.5 Endocrine Disruptors 328 15.6 Plastics 330 15.7 Carbon Dioxide and Climate Change 331 Bibliography 332 Part VII Supporting Laboratory Experiments 335 16 Laboratory Experiments 337 16.1 Introduction 337 16.2 Keeping a Legally Defensible Laboratory Notebook 337 16.3 Quarter- and Semester-Long Experiments 338 16.4 Pollutant Fate and Transport Experiments for the Last Two Dispersion Experiments 338 16.5 The Measurement of Dispersion in a Simulated River System 355 16.6 The Measurement of Dispersion and Sorption in a Simulated Groundwater System 358 Bibliography 365 Index 367

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive review of the science and engineering behind future propulsion systems and energy sources in sustainable aviation Future Propulsion Systems and Energy Sources in Sustainable Aviation is a comprehensive reference that offers a review of the science and engineering principles that underpin the concepts of propulsion systems and energy sources in sustainable air transportation. The author, a noted expert in the field, examines the impact of air transportation on the environment and reviews alternative jet fuels, hybrid-electric and nuclear propulsion and power. He also explores modern propulsion for transonic and supersonic-hypersonic aircraft and the impact of propulsion on aircraft design. Climate change is the main driver for the new technology development in sustainable air transportation. The book contains critical review of gas turbine propulsion and aircraft aerodynamics; followed by an insightful presentation of the aviation impact on environment. Future fuels aTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xvii Abbreviations and Acronyms xix About the Companion Website xxvii 1 Aircraft Engines – A Review 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Aerothermodynamics of Working Fluid 1 1.2.1 Isentropic Process and Isentropic Flow 6 1.2.2 Conservation of Mass 6 1.2.3 Conservation of Linear Momentum 7 1.2.4 Conservation of Angular Momentum 7 1.2.5 Conservation of Energy 8 1.2.6 Speed of Sound and Mach Number 10 1.2.7 Stagnation State 11 1.3 Thrust and Specific Fuel Consumption 12 1.3.1 Takeoff Thrust 16 1.3.2 Installed Thrust – Some Bookkeeping Issues on Thrust and Drag 16 1.3.3 Air‐Breathing Engine Performance Parameters 18 1.3.3.1 Specific Thrust 18 1.3.3.2 Specific Fuel Consumption and Specific Impulse 19 1.4 Thermal and Propulsive Efficiency 20 1.4.1 Thermal Efficiency 20 1.4.2 Propulsive Efficiency 22 1.4.3 Engine Overall Efficiency and Its Impact on Aircraft Range and Endurance 24 1.5 Gas Generator 27 1.6 Engine Components 28 1.6.1 The Inlet 28 1.6.2 The Nozzle 30 1.6.3 The Compressor 36 1.6.4 The Combustor 40 1.6.5 The Turbine 44 1.7 Performance Evaluation of a Turbojet Engine 52 1.8 Turbojet Engine with an Afterburner 54 1.8.1 Introduction 54 1.8.2 Analysis 56 1.9 Turbofan Engine 59 1.9.1 Introduction 59 1.9.2 Analysis of a Separate‐Exhaust Turbofan Engine 60 1.9.3 Thermal Efficiency of a Turbofan Engine 64 1.9.4 Propulsive Efficiency of a Turbofan Engine 65 1.9.5 Ultra‐High Bypass (UHB) Geared Turbofan Engines 69 1.9.6 Analysis of Mixed‐Exhaust Turbofan Engines with Afterburners 73 1.9.6.1 Mixer 74 1.9.6.2 Mixed‐Turbofan Cycle Analysis 76 1.9.6.3 Solution Procedure 77 1.10 Turboprop Engine 84 1.10.1 Introduction 84 1.10.2 Turboprop Cycle Analysis 85 1.10.2.1 The New Parameters 85 1.10.2.2 Design‐Point Analysis 86 1.10.2.3 Optimum Power Split between the Propeller and the Jet 90 1.10.2.4 Advanced Propeller: Prop‐Fan 94 1.11 High‐Speed Air‐Breathing Engines 95 1.11.1 Supersonic Combustion Ramjet 99 1.11.1.1 Inlet Analysis 99 1.11.1.2 Scramjet Combustor 101 1.11.1.3 Scramjet Nozzle 103 1.12 Rocket‐Based Airbreathing Propulsion 103 1.13 Summary 104 References 105 2 Aircraft Aerodynamics – A Review 109 2.1 Introduction 109 2.2 Similarity Parameters in Compressible Flow: Flight vs. Wind Tunnel 111 2.3 Physical Boundary Conditions on a Solid Wall (in Continuum Mechanics) 113 2.4 Profile and Parasite Drag 115 2.4.1 Boundary Layers 115 2.4.1.1 Case 1: Incompressible Laminar Flow 116 2.4.1.2 Case 2: Laminar Compressible Boundary Layers 125 2.4.1.3 Case 3: Turbulent Boundary Layers 129 2.4.1.4 Case 4: Transition 132 2.4.2 Profile Drag of an Airfoil 135 2.5 Drag Due to Lift 141 2.5.1 Classical Theory 141 2.5.2 Optimal Spanloading: The Case of Bell Spanload 147 2.6 Waves in Supersonic Flow 150 2.6.1 Speed of Sound 150 2.6.2 Normal Shock Wave 152 2.6.3 Oblique Shock Waves 152 2.6.4 Expansion Waves 155 2.7 Compressibility Effects and Critical Mach Number 157 2.8 Drag Divergence Phenomenon and Supercritical Airfoil 161 2.9 Wing Sweep 163 2.10 Delta Wing Aerodynamics 166 2.10.1 Vortex Breakdown 167 2.11 Area‐Rule in Transonic Aircraft 169 2.12 Optimum Shape for Slender Body of Revolution of Length ℓ in Supersonic Flow 171 2.12.1 Sears‐Haack Body 174 2.12.2 Von Karman Ogive of Length ℓ and Base Area, S(ℓ), for Minimum Axisymmetric Nose Wave Drag 175 2.13 High‐Lift Devices: Multi‐Element Airfoils 175 2.14 Powered Lift and STOL Aircraft 179 2.15 Laminar Flow Control, LFC 180 2.16 Aerodynamic Figures of Merit 182 2.17 Advanced Aircraft Designs and Technologies for Leaner, Greener Aviation 188 2.18 Summary 194 References 195 3 Understanding Aviation’s Impact on the Environment 201 3.1 Introduction 201 3.2 Combustion Emissions 202 3.2.1 Greenhouse Gases 202 3.2.2 Carbon Monoxide, CO, and Unburned Hydrocarbons, UHC 205 3.2.3 Oxides of Nitrogen, NOx 208 3.2.4 Impact of NO on Ozone in Lower and Upper Atmosphere 209 3.2.4.1 Lower Atmosphere 209 3.2.4.2 Upper Atmosphere 211 3.2.5 Impact of NOx Emissions on Surface Air Quality 213 3.2.6 Soot/Smoke and Particulate Matter (PM) 214 3.2.7 Contrails, Cirrus Clouds, and Impact on Climate 215 3.3 Engine Emission Standards 215 3.4 Low‐Emission Combustors 216 3.5 Aviation Fuels 219 3.6 Interim Summary on Combustion Emission Impact on the Environment 225 3.7 Aviation Impact on Carbon Dioxide Emission: Quantified 227 3.8 Noise 232 3.8.1 Introduction 232 3.8.1.1 General Discussion 232 3.8.1.2 Sound Intensity 236 3.8.1.3 Acoustic Power 236 3.8.1.4 Levels and Decibels 237 3.8.1.5 Sound Power Level in Decibels, dB 237 3.8.1.6 Sound Intensity Level in Decibels, dB 237 3.8.1.7 Sound Pressure Level in Decibels, dB 237 3.8.1.8 Multiple Sources 237 3.8.1.9 Overall Sound Pressure Level in Decibels, dB 238 3.8.1.10 Octave Band, One‐Third Octave Band, and Tunable Filters 238 3.8.1.11 Adding and Subtracting Noise Sources 239 3.8.1.12 Weighting 239 3.8.1.13 Effective Perceived Noise Level (EPNL), dB, and Other Metrics 240 3.8.1.14 Pulsating Sphere: Model of a Monopole 241 3.8.1.15 Two Monopoles: Model of a Dipole 242 3.8.1.16 Two Dipoles: Model of Quadrupole 243 3.8.2 Sources of Noise Near Airports 244 3.8.3 Engine Noise 245 3.8.4 Subsonic Jet Noise 249 3.8.5 Supersonic Jet Noise 251 3.9 Engine Noise Directivity Pattern 253 3.10 Noise Reduction at the Source 256 3.10.1 Wing Shielding 256 3.10.2 Fan Noise Reduction 256 3.10.3 Subsonic Jet Noise Mitigation 260 3.10.3.1 Chevron Nozzle 260 3.10.3.2 Acoustic Liner in Exhaust Core 261 3.10.4 Supersonic Jet Noise Reduction 262 3.11 Sonic Boom 263 3.12 Aircraft Noise Certification 268 3.13 NASA’s Vision: Quiet Green Transport Technology 272 3.14 FAA’s Vision: NextGen Technology 273 3.15 The European Vision for Sustainable Aviation 274 3.16 Summary 275 References 276 4 Future Fuels and Energy Sources in Sustainable Aviation 283 4.1 Introduction 283 4.2 Alternative Jet Fuels (AJFs) 288 4.2.1 Choice of Feedstock 291 4.2.2 Conversion Pathways to Jet Fuel 292 4.2.3 AJF Evaluation and Certification/Qualification 293 4.2.4 Impact of Biofuel on Emissions 294 4.2.5 Advanced Biofuel Production 296 4.2.6 Lifecycle Assessment of Bio‐Based Aviation Fuel 303 4.2.7 Conversion of Bio‐Crops to Electricity 305 4.3 Liquefied Natural Gas, LNG 305 4.3.1 Composition of Natural Gas and LNG 307 4.4 Hydrogen 308 4.4.1 Hydrogen Production 310 4.4.2 Hydrogen Delivery and Storage 312 4.4.3 Gravimetric and Volumetric Energy Density and Liquid Fuel Cost 312 4.5 Battery Systems 312 4.5.1 Battery Energy Density 314 4.5.2 Open‐Cycle Battery Systems 315 4.5.3 Charging Batteries in Flight: Two Examples 316 4.5.4 All‐Electric Aircraft: Voltair Concept Platform 316 4.6 Fuel Cell 318 4.7 Fuels for the Compact Fusion Reactor (CFR) 320 4.8 Summary 321 References 322 5 Promising Technologies in Propulsion and Power 325 5.1 Introduction 325 5.2 Gas Turbine Engine 326 5.2.1 Brayton Cycle: Simple Gas Turbine Engine 326 5.2.2 Turbofan Engine 327 5.3 Distributed Combustion Concepts in Advanced Gas Turbine Engine Core 330 5.4 Multifuel (Cryogenic‐Kerosene), Hybrid Propulsion Concept 335 5.5 Intercooled and Recuperated Turbofan Engines 335 5.6 Active Core Concepts 340 5.7 Topping Cycle: Wave Rotor Combustion 340 5.8 Pulse Detonation Engine (PDE) 351 5.9 Humphrey Cycle vs. Brayton: Thermodynamics 351 5.9.1 Idealized Laboratory PDE: Thrust Tube 353 5.9.2 Pulse Detonation Ramjets 355 5.9.3 Turbofan Engine with PDE 356 5.9.4 Pulse Detonation Rocket Engine (PDRE) 357 5.9.5 Vehicle‐Level Performance Evaluation of PDE 358 5.10 Boundary‐Layer Ingestion (BLI) and Distributed Propulsion (DP) Concept 358 5.10.1 Aircraft Drag Reduction Through BLI 360 5.10.2 Aircraft Noise Reduction: Advanced Concepts 362 5.10.3 Multidisciplinary Design Optimization (MDO) of a BWB Aircraft with BLI 365 5.11 Distributed Propulsion Concept in Early Aviation 367 5.12 Distributed Propulsion in Modern Aviation 368 5.12.1 Optimal Number of Propulsors in Distributed Propulsion 371 5.12.2 Optimal Propulsor Types in Distributed Propulsion 372 5.13 Interim Summary on Electric Propulsion (EP) 384 5.14 Synergetic Air‐Breathing Rocket Engine; SABRE 386 5.15 Compact Fusion Reactor: The Path to Clean, Unlimited Energy 388 5.16 Aircraft Configurations Using Advanced Propulsion Systems 389 5.17 Summary 395 References 396 6 Pathways to Sustainable Aviation 403 6.1 Introduction 403 6.2 Pathways to Certification 403 6.3 Energy Pathways in Sustainable Aviation 405 6.4 Future of GT Engines 407 6.5 Summary 409 References 410 Index 411

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe revised and updated edition of this classic book on the JCT Minor Works Building Contracts The JCT Minor Works Building Contracts 2016 offers a concise overview of this agreement, which continues to be the most popular JCT contract, as it used on the sorts of small works that most architects and builders encounter routinely. Written in straightforward terms, the book is formatted in short chapters with accessible sub-headings, and the author avoids legal and pseudo-legal wording where possible. Some explanations from first principles are included where it is thought they would be helpful and occasionally, where the precise legal position is unclear, the author uses his significant experience to offer a view. Overall, the information is presented in a manner that it is easy to understand, use and reference. The 2016 edition of the contract contains a great many changes from previous editions and these are all covered. For example, the book incluTable of ContentsPreface to the fifth edition x Abbreviations xii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Some general things about contracts 1 1.2 Some background to MW and MWD 4 1.3 When to use MW and MWD 5 1.4 How to use 7 1.5 What is the contract? 9 1.6 How to complete the contract form 10 1.7 Priority of documents 16 1.8 Inconsistencies and divergences 16 1.9 Custody and copies 19 1.10 Limits to use 20 1.11 Notices, time and the law 20 1.12 Common problems 21 2 Some basics 24 2.1 Works 24 2.2 Drawings 24 2.3 Copyright 25 2.4 Specification 25 2.5 Schedules 25 2.6 Privity of contract and third party rights 26 2.7 Base date 26 2.8 Common problems 26 3 Things you must know 29 3.1 The Housing Grants, Construction and Regeneration Act 1996 (as amended) 29 3.2 Express and implied terms 31 3.3 Limitation periods 32 3.4 Letters of intent 34 3.5 Quantum meruit 35 3.6 Common problems 36 4 Architect’s powers and duties 37 4.1 Authority and duties 37 4.2 Duty to act fairly 43 4.3 An architect in a local authority or similar 44 4.4 Express provisions of the contract 45 4.5 Common problems 50 5 Contractor’s powers and duties 51 5.1 Contractor’s obligations: express and implied 51 5.2 Basic principles 51 5.3 Carrying out the Works 59 5.4 Workmanship and materials 61 5.5 Statutory obligations 63 5.6 Contractor’s representative 63 5.7 Compliance with architect’s instructions 64 5.8 Suspension of obligations 64 5.9 Common problems 65 6 Employer’s powers and duties 67 6.1 Powers and duties: in the contract and elsewhere 67 6.2 Rights under MW and MWD 72 6.3 Other rights 73 6.4 Duties under MW and MWD 73 6.5 Retention 76 6.6 Other duties 76 6.7 Common problems 77 7 Quantity surveyor 78 7.1 Appointment 78 7.2 Duties 79 7.3 Responsibilities 81 7.4 Common problems 82 8 Clerk of works 85 8.1 Appointment 85 8.2 Duties 87 8.3 Responsibilities 90 8.4 Common problems 90 9 Sub‐contractors and suppliers 92 9.1 General 92 9.2 Differences between assignment and sub‐contracting 92 9.3 Assignment 92 9.4 Sub‐contracting 93 9.5 Nominated sub-contractors 94 9.6 Common problems 96 10 Statutory matters and work outside the contract 98 10.1 Statutory authorities 98 10.2 Works not forming part of the contract 100 10.3 Common problems 101 11 Insurance 103 11.1 Important 103 11.2 Injury to or death of persons 104 11.3 Damage to property 105 11.4 Insurance of the Works 106 11.5 Evidence of insurance 108 11.6 Loss or damage 109 11.7 Common problems 110 12 Possession of the site 111 12.1 Important points 111 12.2 Date for possession 112 12.3 Failure to give possession 112 12.4 Common problems 114 13 Extension of time 116 13.1 Why necessary? 116 13.2 Extension of time 117 13.3 Reasons 119 13.4 Failure to notify delay 120 13.5 Does an extension of time entitle the contractor to any money? 121 13.6 Common problems 121 14 Liquidated damages 123 14.1 What are liquidated damages? 123 14.2 Liquidated damages or penalty? 124 14.3 Procedure 125 14.4 Common problems 126 15 Financial claims 127 15.1 General 127 15.2 Dealing with loss and/or expense 128 15.3 Types of claims 130 15.4 Common problems 132 16 Architect’s instructions 134 16.1 Architect’s instructions 134 16.2 Contractor’s objection 138 16.3 Specific instructions 139 16.4 Other instructions which will be empowered 140 16.5 Common problems 141 17 Variations 143 17.1 Variations 143 17.2 Valuation 145 17.3 Provisional sums 146 17.4 Common problems 147 18 Payment 149 18.1 Important to read this first 149 18.2 Contract Sum 150 18.3 Interim certificates 153 18.4 Final certificate 157 18.5 Effect of certificate 161 18.6 Failure to pay 161 18.7 Retention 161 18.8 Common problems 162 19 Practical completion 164 19.1 Practical completion 164 19.2 The contract says 164 19.3 Consequences of practical completion 167 19.4 Common problems 167 20 Defects liability 169 20.1 During construction 169 20.2 During the rectification period 169 20.3 Defects, shrinkages and other faults 170 20.4 Frost 172 20.5 Procedure 172 20.6 Making Good 174 20.7 Certificate of making good 176 20.8 Common problems 177 21 Termination 178 21.1 Preliminary thoughts 178 21.2 If no termination in the contract 179 21.3 Termination by the employer 180 21.4 Consequences of employer termination 186 21.5 Termination by the contractor 187 21.6 Consequences of contractor termination 194 21.7 Termination by either employer or contractor 194 21.8 Termination after loss or damage to existing structures 195 21.9 Reinstatement 195 21.10 Common problems 195 22 Contractor’s designed portion (CDP) 198 22.1 Principles 198 22.2 Contractor’s obligations 198 22.3 Inconsistences and divergences 200 22.4 Variations 201 22.5 Other matters 201 22.6 Common problems 202 23 Dispute resolution procedures 203 23.1 General 203 23.2 Choice 203 23.3 The Construction Act 1996 205 23.4 Adjudication in general 205 23.5 Pros and cons 206 23.6 Adjudication in detail 208 23.7 Arbitration 217 23.8 Legal proceedings (litigation) 222 23.9 Mediation 223 23.10 Common problems 223 Notes and references 224 Table of cases 234 Clause number index to text 241 Subject index 244

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisA reference for engineers, scientists, and academics who want to be abreast of the latest industrial separation/treatment technique, this new volume aims at providing a holistic vision on the potential of advanced membrane processes for solving challenging separation problems in industrial applications. Separation processes are challenging steps in any process industry for isolation of products and recycling of reactants. Membrane technology has shown immense potential in separation of liquid and gaseous mixtures, effluent treatment, drinking water purification and solvent recovery. It has found endless popularity and wide acceptance for its small footprint, higher selectivity, scalability, energy saving capability and inherent ease of integration into other unit operations. There are many situations where the target component cannot be separated by distillation, liquid extraction, and evaporation. The different membrane processes such as pervaporation, vapor permeatioTable of ContentsPreface xvii 1 Tackling Challenging Industrial Separation Problems through Membrane Processes 1 Siddhartha Moulik, Sowmya Parakala and S. Sridhar 1.1 Water: The Source of Life 2 1.2 Significance of Water/Wastewater Treatment 5 1.3 Wastewater Treatment Techniques 8 1.4 Membrane Technologies for Water/Wastewater Treatment 11 1.5 Membranes: Materials, Classification and Configurations 12 1.5.1 Types of Membranes 12 1.5.1.1 Symmetric Membranes 12 1.5.1.2 Asymmetric Membranes 13 1.5.1.3 Electrically Charged Membranes 14 1.5.1.4 Inorganic Membranes 14 1.5.2 Membranes Modules and Their Characteristics 14 1.6 Introduction to Membrane Processes 17 1.6.1 Conventional Membrane Processes 17 1.7 CSIR-IICT’s Contribution for Water/Wastewater Treatment 21 1.7.1 Nanofiltration Plant for Processing Coke Oven Wastewater in Steel Industry 22 1.8 Potential of Pervaporation (PV), Vapor Permeation (VP), and Membrane Distillation (MD) in Wastewater Treatment 24 1.9 Conclusion 32 References 33 2 Pervaporation Membrane Separation: Fundamentals and Applications 37 Siddhartha Moulik, Bukke Vani, D. Vaishnavi and S. Sridhar 2.1 Introduction and Historical Perspective 38 2.2 Principle 40 2.2.1 Mass Transfer 42 2.2.2 Factors Affecting Membrane Performance 44 2.3 Membranes for Pervaporation 45 2.4 Applications of Pervaporation 46 2.4.1 Solvent Dehydration 46 2.4.2 Organophilic Separation 55 2.4.2.1 Removal of VOCs 57 2.4.2.2 Extraction of Aroma Compounds 58 2.4.3 Organic/Organic Separation 64 2.4.3.1 Separation of Polar/Non-Polar Mixture 64 2.4.3.2 Separation of Aromatic/Alicyclic Mixtures 70 2.4.3.3 Separation of Aromatic/Aliphatic/Aromatic Hydrocarbons 71 2.4.3.4 Separation of Isomers 72 2.5 Conclusions and Future Prospects 77 References 78 3 Pervaporation for Ethanol-Water Separation and Effect of Fermentation Inhibitors 89 Anjali Jain, Sushant Upadhyaya, Ajay K. Dalai and Satyendra P. Chaurasia 3.1 Introduction 90 3.2 Theory of Pervaporation 91 3.2.1 Applications of Pervaporation 92 3.2.2 Advantages of Pervaporation 93 3.2.3 Pervaporation Performance Evaluation Parameters 93 3.3 Various Membranes Used for the Recovery of Ethanol 94 3.3.1 Organic Membranes 94 3.3.2 Inorganic Membranes 102 3.3.3 Mixed Matrix Membranes 104 3.4 Effects of Process Variables on Ethanol Concentration in PV 106 3.4.1 Effect of Feed Flow Rate 106 3.4.2 Effect of Ethanol Concentration in Feed 107 3.4.3 Effect of Feed Temperature 108 3.4.4 Effect of Permeate Pressure 109 3.5 Effect of Fermentation Inhibitors on Pervaporation Performance 109 3.5.1 Effect of Furfural Concentration 112 3.5.2 Influence of Hydroxymethyl-Furfural 113 3.5.3 Effect of Vanillin 114 3.5.4 Effect of Acetic Acid 115 3.5.5 Effect of Catechol 116 3.6 Conclusions 116 References 117 4 Dehydration of Acetonitrile Solvent by Pervaporation through Graphene Oxide/Poly(Vinyl Alcohol) Mixed Matrix Membranes 123 Siddhartha Moulik, D.Vaishnavi and S.Sridhar 4.1 Introduction 124 4.2 Materials and Methods 126 4.2.1 Materials 126 4.2.2 Preparation of Graphene Oxide 126 4.2.3 Fabrication of GO Membrane 127 4.2.4 Structural Characterization of GO/PVA Mixed Matrix Membrane 127 4.2.5 Pervaporation Experiments 127 4.2.6 Determination of Diffusion Coefficients 129 4.2.7 Membrane Characterization 130 4.2.8 Hydrodynamic Simulation 130 4.2.8.1 Specification of Computational Domain and Governing Equations 130 4.3 Results and Discussions 132 4.3.1 Scanning Electron Microscope 132 4.3.2 Differential Scanning Calorimeter 132 4.3.3 Effect of GO concentration on PV Performance 134 4.3.4 Sorption Behavior 135 4.3.5 Concentration Distribution of Water within the Membrane 135 4.3.6 Effect of Feed Water Concentration 137 4.3.7 Effect of Permeate Pressure 137 4.4 Conclusions 139 References 139 5 Recovery of Acetic Acid from Vinegar Wastewater Using Pervaporation in a Pilot Plant 141 Haresh K Dave and Kaushik Nath 5.1 Introduction 142 5.2 Materials and Methods 144 5.2.1 Chemicals and Membranes 144 5.2.2 Preparation and Cross-Linking of Membrane 144 5.2.3 Equilibrium Sorption in PVA-PES Membrane 144 5.2.4 Permeation Experimental Study 145 5.2.5 Flux and Separation Factor 146 5.2.6 Permeability and Membrane Selectivity 147 5.2.7 Diffusion and Partition Coefficient 147 5.2.8 Thermogravimetric Analysis 148 5.2.9 FTIR Analysis 148 5.2.10 AFM and SEM Analysis 148 5.2.11 Mechanical Properties 149 5.3 Results and Discussion 149 5.3.1 Sorption in PVA-PES Membrane 149 5.3.2 Effect of Feed Composition on Flux and Separation Factor 151 5.3.3 Activation Energy and Heat of Sorption 152 5.3.4 Permeability, Permeance and Intrinsic Membrane Selectivity 153 5.3.5 Diffusion and Partition Coefficient 154 5.3.6 Thermogravimetric Analysis 156 5.3.7 Surface Chemistry by FTIR Analysis 156 5.3.8 Surface Topology by AFM Analysis 159 5.3.9 Surface Topology by SEM Analysis 161 5.3.10 Mechanical Properties of the Membrane 162 5.3.11 Reusability of the Membrane 163 5.4 Conclusion 164 Nomenclature 165 Acknowledgement 165 References 166 6 Thermodynamic Models for Prediction of Sorption Behavior in Pervaporation 169 Reddi Kamesh, Sumana Chenna and K. Yamuna Rani 6.1 Introduction 170 6.2 Thermodynamic Models for Sorption 172 6.2.1 Flory-Huggins Models 172 6.2.1.1 Models for Single Liquid Sorption in Polymer 172 6.2.1.2 Models for Binary Liquid Sorption in Polymer 175 6.2.2 UNIQUAC Model 180 6.2.2.1 Calculation of Binary Solvent-Solvent Interaction Parameters (τij & τji) 181 6.2.2.2 Calculation of Binary Polymer-Solvent Interaction Parameters (τim, τmi & τjm, τmj) 184 6.2.2.3 Prediction of Sorption Levels for a Ternary System Using UNIQUAC Model 185 6.2.3 UNIQUAC-HB Model 187 6.2.3.1 Calculation of Binary Solvent-Solvent Interaction Parameters (τʹij and τʹji ) 187 6.2.3.2 Calculation of Binary Solvent-Polymer Interaction Parameters 188 6.2.3.3 Prediction of Sorption Levels for a Ternary System 189 6.2.4 Modified NRTL Model 190 6.2.4.1 Calculation of Binary Solvent-Solvent Interaction Parameters (τ12 & τ21) 192 6.2.4.2 Calculation of Binary Polymer-Solvent Interaction Parameters (τiM & τMi) 192 6.2.4.3 Prediction of Sorption Behavior for a Ternary System – Method 1 193 6.2.4.4 Prediction of Sorption Behavior for a Ternary System – Method 2 194 6.3 Computational Procedure 196 6.4 Case Study 202 6.5 Summary and Conclusions 207 References 208 7 Molecular Dynamics Simulation for Prediction of Structure-Property Relationships of Pervaporation Membranes 211 Shaik Nazia, Siddhartha Moulik, Jega Jegatheesan, Suresh K. Bhargava and S. Sridhar 7.1 Introduction and Historical Perspective 212 7.2 Molecular Dynamics (MD) Simulations 213 7.3 Calculation of Interaction Parameters 214 7.4 Calculation of Permeation Properties 216 7.5 Free Volume Analysis 220 7.6 Conclusions 224 References 224 8 Vapor Permeation: Fundamentals, Principles and Applications 227 Siddhartha Moulik, Sowmya Parakala and S. Sridhar 8.1 Introduction and Historical Perspective 228 8.2 Principle 229 8.3 Mass Transfer Models in Vapor Permeation 231 8.4 Membranes for VP 233 8.4.1 Inorganic Membranes 233 8.4.2 Polymeric Membranes: 236 8.4.3 Mixed Matrix Membranes (MMMs) 239 8.5 Applications of Vapor Permeation 243 8.6 Conclusions and Future Trends 252 References 252 9 Vapor Permeation - A Thermodynamic Perspective 257 Sujay Chattopadhyay 9.1 Introduction 258 9.2 Parameters Influencing Vapor Permeation 259 9.3 Sorption in Polymeric Materials 262 9.3.1 Sorption of Pure Liquid or Vapors 263 9.3.2 Sorption of Binary Mixtures of Liquids and Vapors 264 9.4 Vapor Permeation in Polymeric Membranes 265 9.4.1 Vapor Permeation Through Rubbery Membranes 265 9.4.2 Vapor Permeation Through Glassy Membranes 265 9.4.3 Vapor Permeation Through Crystalline Polymers 267 9.5 Thermodynamics of Penetrant/Polymer Membrane 268 9.6 Non-Equilibrium Thermodynamics 271 9.7 Design of Vapor Permeation Membrane with High Selectivity 273 9.8 Membranes and Membrane Modules 276 9.9 Applications of Vapor Permeation 277 9.10 Conclusion 279 References 280 10 Vapor Permeation: Theory and Modelling Perspectives 283 Harsha Nagar, P. Anand and S. Sridhar 10.1 Introduction 284 10.2 Advantages of Vapor Permeation Process 287 10.3 Mass Transfer Mechanism in VP Process 287 10.4 Fundamentals of Vapor Permeation Modelling 288 10.4.1 Solution-Diffusion Mechanisms 289 10.4.2 Diffusion Modelling 290 10.4.2.1 Multi-Component Diffusion 292 10.4.3 Solubility Modelling 293 10.4.3.1 Equation of State Approach 293 10.4.3.2 Lattice Fluid-Based Models 294 10.5 Case Studies of VP Modelling 296 10.5.1 Modelling of a Multi-Component System for Vapor Permeation Process 296 10.5.2 Cost Effective Vapor Permeation Process for Isopropanol Dehydration 298 10.5.3 Vapor Permeation Modeling for Inorganic Shell and Tube Membranes. 299 10.6 Conclusion 301 References 302 11 Membrane Distillation: Historical Perspective and a Solution to Existing Issues of Membrane Technology 305 Siddhartha Moulik, Sowmya Parakala and S. Sridhar 11.1 Introduction and Historical Perspective of Membrane Distillation 306 11.2 Principle of Membrane Distillation 308 11.3 Mass Transfer in MD 312 11.4 Parameters Affecting Performance of MD 314 11.5 Heat Transfer in MD 317 11.6 Membranes for MD 318 11.7 Applications of Membrane Distillation 328 11.7.1 Seawater Desalination 328 11.7.2 Drinking Water Purification 333 11.7.3 Oily Wastewater Treatment 338 11.7.4 Solvent Dehydration 340 11.7.5 Treatment of Textile Industrial Effluent 343 11.7.6 Food Industrial Applications 345 11.7.7 Treatment of Radioactive Waste Water 346 11.7.8 Dairy Effluent Treatment 347 11.8 Conclusions and Future Trends 350 References 351 12 Dewatering of Diethylene Glycol and Lactic Acid Solvents by Membrane Distillation Technique 357 M. Madhumala, I. Ravi Kiran, Shakarachar M. Sutar and S. Sridhar 12.1 Introduction 358 12.2 Materials and Methods 360 12.2.1 Materials 360 12.2.2 Membrane Synthesis 360 12.2.2.1 Synthesis of Microporous Hydrophobic ZSM-5/PVC Mixed Matrix Membrane 360 12.2.2.2 Synthesis of Ultraporous Hydrophobic Polyvinylchloride Membrane 361 12.2.3 Experimental 361 12.2.3.1 Description of Membrane Distillation Set-up 361 12.2.3.2 Experimental Procedure 362 12.2.4 Membrane Characterization Techniques 363 12.2.4.1 Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy (FT-IR) 363 12.2.4.2 X-Ray Diffraction Studies (XRD) 363 12.2.4.3 Thermo Gravimetric Analysis (TGA) 364 12.2.4.4 Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) 364 12.2.4.5 Contact Angle Measurement 364 12.3 Results and Discussion 364 12.3.1 Membrane Characterization 364 12.3.1.1 FTIR 364 12.3.1.2 XRD 366 12.3.1.3 TGA 367 12.3.1.4 SEM 368 12.3.1.5 Contact Angle Measurement 369 12.3.2 Case Study 1: Dehydration of Lactic Acid Using ZSM-5 Loaded Polyvinyl Chloride Membrane 369 12.3.2.1 Effect of Feed Lactic Acid Concentration on Membrane Performance 369 12.3.3 Case Study 2: Dehydration of Diethylene Glycol Using Ultraporous PVC Membrane 371 12.3.3.1 Effect of Feed Diethylene Glycol Concentration on Membrane Performance 371 12.4 Conclusions 372 References 373 13 Graphene Oxide/Polystyrene Mixed Matrix Membranes for Desalination of Seawater through Vacuum Membrane Distillation 375 Siddhartha Moulik, Sowmya Parakala and S. Sridhar 13.1 Introduction 376 13.1.1 Graphene and its Derivatives 378 13.2 Materials and Methods 380 13.2.1 Materials 380 13.2.2 Preparation of Graphene Oxide 380 13.2.3 Membrane Synthesis 381 13.2.4 Performance of the Crosslinked GO Loaded PS Membrane 382 13.2.5 Membrane Distillation Experiment 383 13.2.6 Membrane Characterization 384 13.2.7 Computational Fluid Dynamics Study 384 13.2.7.1 Model Development 384 13.3 Results and Discussions 388 13.3.1 Membrane Characterization 388 13.3.1.1 SEM 388 13.3.1.2 Contact Angle Measurement 389 13.3.1.3 FTIR 390 13.3.1.4 Raman Spectra 391 13.3.2 Effect of GO Concentration on MD Performance 391 13.3.3 Concentration Profile of Water Vapor within the Membrane 392 13.3.4 Effect of Feed Salt Concentration 393 13.3.5 Effect of Degree of Vacuum on MD Performance 395 13.3.6 Effect of Membrane Thickness 395 13.4 Conclusion 396 References 397 14 Vacuum Membrane Distillation for Water Desalination 399 Sushant Upadhyaya, Kailash Singh, S.P. Chaurasia, Rakesh Baghel and Sarita Kalla 14.1 Introduction 400 14.2 Membrane Distillation 400 14.2.1 Direct Contact Membrane Distillation (DCMD) 400 14.2.2 Air Gap Membrane Distillation (AGMD) 401 14.2.3 Sweeping Gas Membrane Distillation (SGMD) 401 14.2.4 Vacuum Membrane Distillation (VMD) 401 14.3 Selection Criteria for MD Membrane 402 14.4 Characterization of Membranes in MD 403 14.5 Applications 403 14.6 Modelling in MD 404 14.7 Mass and Heat Transport in VMD 407 14.8 Recovery Modelling in VMD 410 14.9 Operating Variables Influence on VMD Process 411 14.9.1 Variation in Permeate Flux with Feed Rate 411 14.9.2 Variation in Permeate Flux with Feed Inlet Temperature 412 14.9.3 Variation in Permeate Flux with Permeate Pressure 415 14.9.4 Variation in Permeate Flux with Feed Salt Concentration 416 14.9.5 Effect of Runtime 417 14.10 Water Recovery 418 14.11 Fouling on Membrane 420 14.12 Conclusions 424 Nomenclature 425 Greek Symbols 426 References 426 15 Glycerol Purification Using Membrane Technology 431 Priya Pal, S.P.Chaurasia, Sushant Upadhyaya, Madhu Agarwal and S. Sridhar 15.1 Introduction 432 15.2 Glycerol 433 15.2.1 Impurities Present in Crude Glycerol 433 15.3 Sources of Glycerol 434 15.3.1 Transesterification Reaction 435 15.3.2 Saponification of Oils and Fats 436 15.3.3 Hydrolysis of Oils and Fats 436 15.4 Purification Processes 440 15.4.1 Conventional Method (Physicochemical Method) 440 15.4.1.1 Pre-Treatment (Acidification and Neutralization) 440 15.4.1.2 Solvent Removal 441 15.4.1.3 Activated Charcoal Treatment for Color Removal 442 15.4.1.4 Ion-Exchange Adsorption 442 15.4.2 Membrane Technology 443 15.4.2.1 Membrane Distillation (MD) 443 15.4.2.2 Operating Variables Affecting VMD Process 447 15.5 Material and Methods 453 15.5.1 Materials 453 15.5.2 Synthesis of Hydrophobic Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Membrane 453 15.5.3 Methods 453 15.5.4 Membrane Characterization 455 15.5.4.1 Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) 455 15.5.4.2 Membrane Porosity Measurement 455 15.5.4.3 Membrane Thickness 456 15.5.4.4 Contact Angle 456 15.5.4.5 FTIR 457 15.6 Results and Discussion 457 15.6.1 Characterization of Membrane 457 15.6.2 Effect of Glycerol Concentration on Flux and Percentage Rejection 459 15.7 Conclusions 459 Nomenclature 460 References 461 16 Reclamation of Water and Toluene from Bulk Drug Industrial Effluent by Vacuum Membrane Distillation 467 Pavani Vadthya, Y.V.L. Ravikumar and S. Sridhar 16.1 Introduction 468 16.2 Materials and Methods 469 16.2.1 Materials 469 16.2.2 Membrane Synthesis 469 16.2.3 Membrane Characterization 470 16.2.3.1 Fourier-Transform Infrared Spectroscopy (FTIR) 470 16.2.3.2 Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) 470 16.2.3.3 X-Ray Diffraction Studies (XRD) 470 16.2.3.4 Sorption Studies 470 16.2.4 Experimental Set Up 471 16.2.5 Experimental Procedure 471 16.2.6 Flux 471 16.2.7 Refractive Index 472 16.3 Results and Discussion 472 16.3.1 Membrane Characterization 472 16.3.1.1 FTIR 472 16.3.1.2 SEM 473 16.3.1.3 XRD 473 16.3.1.4 Sorption Studies 474 16.3.2 Effect of Membrane Thickness 476 16.3.3 Effect of Polymer Loading 476 16.3.4 Effect of Permeate Pressure 477 16.4 Conclusions 479 References 480 Index 481

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical treatise on the processes and standards required for the effective time management of major construction projects This book uses logical step-by-step procedures and examples from inception and risk appraisalthrough design and construction to testing and commissioningto show how an effective and dynamic time model can be used to manage the risk of delay in the completion of construction projects. Integrating with the CIOB major projects contract, the new edition places increased emphasis on the dynamic time model as the way to manage time and cost in major projects, as opposed to the use of a static target baseline program. It includes a new chapter distinguishing the principal features of the dynamic time model and its development throughout the life of a project from inception to completion. Guide to Good Practice in the Management of Time in Major ProjectsDynamic Time Modelling, 2nd Edition features new appendices covering matters sucTable of ContentsPreface xi Introduction to Second Edition xiii Acknowledgements xv Table of Figures xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Core principles of time management 1 1.2 The dynamic time model 4 1.3 Mission statement 6 1.4 Genesis of the Guide 7 1.5 Purpose of the Guide 7 1.6 Risk management 8 1.7 Planning and scheduling 9 1.8 The planning method statement 10 1.9 The project scheduler 10 1.10 Time management 11 1.11 Building information modelling 12 2 Strategy 13 2.1 Planning method statement strategy 13 2.2 Consultant and contractor selection strategy 14 2.3 Contracting strategy 15 2.4 Project planning strategy 16 2.5 Progress record strategy 17 2.6 Schedule design strategy 18 2.7 Schedule update strategy 18 2.8 Schedule revision strategy 19 2.9 Time risk management strategy 20 2.10 Schedule quality control strategy 22 2.11 Building information modelling strategy 22 2.12 Communication strategy 23 3 The dynamic time model 25 3.1 Introduction 25 3.2 The initial development schedule 27 3.3 The updated development schedule 28 3.4 Calculating the predicted effect of intervening events on the development schedule 30 3.5 Planning to overcome the predicted effects of an intervening event 31 3.6 Revision of the development schedule 32 3.7 Time management of pre-construction activities 33 3.8 The initial working schedule 33 3.9 The updated working schedule 34 3.10 Calculating the predicted effect of intervening events on the working schedule 36 3.11 Planning to overcome the predicted effects of an intervening event 37 3.12 Revision of the working schedule 38 3.13 Continuing time management of construction activities 39 3.14 Benchmarking 40 4 Developing the dynamic time model 41 4.1 Introduction 41 4.2 Schedule density design 42 Scheduling at Low Density 43 Scheduling at Medium Density 43 Scheduling at High Density 44 4.3 Planning method statement 44 Planning method statement at Low Density 45 Planning method statement at Medium Density 46 Planning method statement at High Density 46 Documentation of corrections 46 4.4 Software considerations 47 4.5 The structure of the schedule 48 4.6 Schedule types 48 The Development schedule 49 Tender schedule 49 Working schedule 49 Occupational commissioning schedule 50 As-built schedule 50 4.7 Schedule design 50 4.8 Schedule integration 51 Schedule subcontracting 52 Master schedule and subproject 52 Milestone management 53 4.9 Risk and contingencies 53 Contingencies at Low Density 54 Contingencies at Medium Density 56 Contingencies at High Density 56 4.10 Scheduling techniques 56 Bar charts 57 Line-of-balance diagram 57 Time chainage diagram 58 Arrow diagram method (ADM) 59 Precedence diagram method (PDM) 60 Linked bar chart 61 Building information modelling 61 4.11 Work breakdown structure 62 4.12 Schedule communication 64 Executive summary report 66 Senior management report 66 Project manager’s report 66 Section manager’s report 66 Short-term look-ahead report 67 4.13 Calendars 67 Calendars at Low Density 70 Calendars at Medium Density 70 Calendars at High Density 70 4.14 Work type definition 70 4.15 Activity identifier coding 70 Activity ID at Low Density 71 Activity ID at Medium Density 71 Activity ID at High Density 71 Activity ID trailing numbers 72 Simplified Activity ID 73 4.16 Activity description 74 Descriptions at Low Density 74 Descriptions at Medium Density 74 Descriptions at High Density 74 4.17 Activity content codes 75 4.18 Activity cost codes 76 Cost coding at Low Density 77 Cost coding at Medium Density 77 Cost coding at High Density 77 4.19 Activity duration 78 Estimating durations using industry standards 79 Estimating durations using benchmarking 79 Estimating activity duration by comparison with other projects 79 Calculating activity duration from resources and work content 80 Specified activity duration 80 Activity duration at Low Density 81 Activity durations at Medium Density 81 Activity durations at High Density 81 4.20 Resource scheduling 82 Resources at Low Density and Medium Density 83 Resources at High Density 83 Strategic resource allocation 85 4.21 Permits and licences 86 4.22 Utilities and third-party projects 87 4.23 Schedule logic 87 Engineering logic 87 Preferential logic 88 Resource logic 88 Zonal logic 88 4.24 Density logic 88 4.25 Activity logic 89 Start-to-start 89 Finish-to-finish 89 Finish-to-start 90 Start-to-finish 90 Computational inconsistencies 90 4.26 Lags 90 Lagged finish-to-finish 91 Lagged finish-to-start 91 Lagged start-to-start 92 Lagged start-to-start and finish-to-finish 92 Negative lag 93 Lags at Low Density 93 Lags at Medium Density 93 Lags at High Density 93 4.27 Logical constraints 94 Flexible constraints 94 Moderate constraints 94 Inflexible constraints 95 Inflexible combinations of constraints 96 4.28 Float 96 Free float 97 Total float 97 Negative float 97 4.29 Critical path 97 4.30 Schedule quality assurance 99 Review for buildability 100 Review for schedule content 100 Review for schedule integrity 102 Review for constraints 103 Review for open ends 103 Review for long lags 103 Review for negative lags 104 Review for ladders 104 Review for scheduling options 105 Review for critical paths 105 5 Managing the dynamic time model 107 5.1 Introduction 107 5.2 Data communication systems 109 5.3 Building information modelling 110 5.4 Record-keeping 111 Spreadsheet-recorded data 111 Database-recorded data 111 Record types 114 5.5 Progress records 114 Progress record content 114 Activity identification data 115 Activity description 115 Date of record 115 The resource 115 Start and finish dates 116 Author of the record 116 Progress data 116 Quality control records 117 Information flow records 117 5.6 Updating the schedule 118 5.7 Schedule review and revision 119 Review for better information 120 Better design information 120 Better procurement information 120 Refinements to work content 120 Review for short-term work 120 Change in methodology 121 Repetitive activities 121 Change in activity descriptions 122 Change in activity durations 122 Change in logic 122 Change in cost profile 122 Consequential change in criticality 123 5.8 Change control 124 Identifying intervening events 124 Voluntary and implied variations and other instructed changes 126 Variations 126 Prime cost and provisional sums 126 Employer’s acts or omissions 127 Acts or omissions of third parties 129 Neutral events 129 Disruption 129 Calculating the effect of intervening events 129 5.9 Progress monitoring 131 Schedule comparison 131 Baseline target schedule (static) 132 Variable baseline target (dynamic) 133 Delay caused by a contractor’s risk event 133 Delay caused by an employer’s risk event 134 Jagged line 134 Count the squares 134 Milestone monitoring 135 Cash-flow monitoring 136 Earned-value management 136 Resource monitoring 138 Building information modelling 138 5.10 Acceleration and recovery 138 6 Communicating the dynamic time model 141 6.1 Introduction 141 6.2 Proactive communication: promoting the plan 141 6.3 Reactive communication: reporting 142 6.4 Report types 143 Contractual notice 143 Managerial reports 145 Executive summary 145 6.5 Reporting formats 147 6.6 Feedback and benchmarking 147 APPENDICES 151 Appendix 1 – Time risks which may be borne by the employer 151 Appendix 2 – Case studies in strategic planning 155 Appendix 3 – The nature of complex projects 167 Appendix 4 – The dynamic time model – a flow chart 169 Appendix 5 – Case studies in high density scheduling contents 171 Appendix 6 – Desirable attributes of scheduling software 177 Appendix 7 – Industry productivity guides 187 Appendix 8 – Sample notice of delay 189 Glossary of terms 191 Index 213

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to effective corporate and project management in the construction industry with a focus on the role that people play in the process Global Construction Success explores the importance that human dynamics play in risk management of construction projects. Every time a project is structured, designed and built, personal behaviours and inputs can either lead to success or be the cause of failure. With contributions from noted experts on the topic, the book offers insight into stakeholders' reactions in a variety of situations, provides expert analyses of risk management and proposes potential solutions and recommendations in order to ensure effective construction management. The book explores common causes of project failure, outlines the key factors of successful projects, shows how to implement Public Private Partnerships, explores the different stages of structuring projects and reveals what it takes to manage difficult client/contractor relationships. International case studTrade ReviewLord Andrew Adonis – Chair of the UK National Infrastructure Commission 2017 “Charles O’Neil and his co-authors have produced an impressive and important contribution to the construction industry that should be read by everyone involved in construction projects”. _________________________________________________________________________________ Ian Rogers – Senior Legal Adviser, Arup “This hard-hitting collection of essays reveals the real problems in the construction industry, identifying not just the symptoms and how they might be treated, but also tackling the underlying causes. People and governance are top of the list and until these are addressed, change will be merely superficial. It is a vitally important contribution to the debate over the future of a key global industry”. _________________________________________________________________________________ Datuk Sundra Rajoo – Director Asian International Arbitration Centre (AIAC) – Past President of the Chartered Institute of Arbitrators, U.K. (2016) “This book is an exceptional collection of insight and wisdom from various experts across the global construction industry. It provides a 360-degree overview of the current state of international construction, including impacts of globalization, a detailed analysis of industry and regional trends in construction as well as the challenges faced by various sectors in the industry, making it relevant across the globe. This book is also written in simple and effective language, identifying the key areas of improvement within the industry and offering viable solutions for all stakeholders concerned. The author has also done a remarkable job in structuring the book in such a way that makes it thorough and comprehensive, which is a boon for all of us in the industry. I believe this book will be a useful reference for all stakeholders concerned with navigating the emerging issues and challenges of risk management that plagues this industry today” _________________________________________________________________________________ Chris Blythe – CEO, The Chartered Institute of Building “A great read with something for anyone wanting a successful construction industry. Construction is the art of getting ordinary people to do extraordinary things. Throughout the book, contributors show the best and worst behaviours that give the industry its extremes of reward and frustration. The wrong behaviours take the ordinary and produce the mediocre by repeating mistakes and not learning from them. Construction is too important as a driver of the global economy for the risks of failure to be as high as they are. This book offers an agenda for de-risking construction.” __________________________________________________________________________________ Gerhard Bester – MD of CAPIC, a South-African owned, specialist consulting services firm in the infrastructure development, construction and engineering industries. “Africa’s decision makers, both public and private, clients and contractors alike, should jump at the opportunity to acquire the benefit of hindsight from the industry in first world countries – Africa generally follows their infrastructure delivery mechanisms, contracting regimes and unfortunately, consequential flaws…Africa has some additional variables to make things more challenging, but we cannot afford to ignore the wisdom and guidance on the way forward if we are to achieve “Global Construction Success” as presented by Charles O’Neil and his co-authors in this aptly named book!” _________________________________________________________________________________ Don Ward – CEO of Constructing Excellence, U.K “So many Governments and industry stakeholders around the world are anxious to see construction sector reform for major improvement in delivery. So why doesn’t it happen faster? The insights in this book are hugely valuable to policy makers and industry leaders everywhere, with their focus on getting strong leadership and vision for projects, modernising the capability of people culture & behaviours in project teams, and aligning common processes and tools. Perhaps most crucial is the alignment of commercial arrangements throughout the supply chain.” _______________________________________________________________________________ Matthew Bell – Senior Lecturer and Co-Director of Studies, Construction Law, Melbourne Law School “Introducing this immensely useful book, Charles O’Neil writes that ‘there is no better experience than learning the hard way’. This is true. Charles and his colleagues have generously shared their experience on construction projects around the world so that the rest of us can recognise and steer away from the commercial, technical and – especially – human factors which cause so many projects to founder”. ___________________________________________________________________________ Nick Barrett – Editor of Construction Law Magazine, U.K. “This book emphasising human factors and risk management in delivering successful construction projects comes at a potentially crucial turning point for the construction industry, with a new readiness to consider major changes to business models and processes evident following the Carillion collapse in the UK. The industry needs to read it”. _________________________________________________________________________________ Mark Farmer – Author of The Construction Industry Review “Modernise or Die” 2016. "I believe we stand at an unprecedented crossroads in the construction industry's evolution driven by a structural and long-term decline in skills and capability. This is no longer another false dawn driven by periodic discontent. The risks of continuing are now all consuming and include the increasingly destructive consequences of poor risk management and embedded conflict. The burgeoning technology led opportunity we are now presented with as our potential saviour will not be maximised though without embracing fundamentally different organisational, procurement and contractual models that drive process integration & common interest. This book is a very useful reference point using key lessons learned and pointing the way forward."_________________________________________________________________________________Catherine Green, NZ Building Disputes Tribunal, BuildLaw "a notable contribution to the literature on construction project management and is a significant book for all who are working in the construction sector.(...)O’Neil’s analysis of the obstacles to senior management and board success are particularly insightful and indisputably of key importance to those who seek to succeed within the sector.(...) In this book, O’Neil and his contributors, have carefully distilled several lifetimes of experience engaged in the construction sector to provide the reader with an extraordinary collection of essays, including references to real-world examples, making the book a practical and easily digestible narrative and analysis which can only assist the reader to attain global construction success." _________________________________________________________________________________ Karen Fletcher, MODERN BUILDING SERVICES October 2019 “Charles O'Neil doesn't pull his punches when describing the problems faced by the global construction industry in his recently-published book Global Construction Success. (...) However, it is also a practical work. O'Neil and 17 contributing authors offer insights into how the industry can learn and improve - removing obstacles to success, ending abuse of supply chains, managing risk better. And while there is an examination of what can go wrong in construction projects, the publication does highlight what makes projects successful. Without giving too much away, competent leadership and professional teams play a major role, along with professional consultants and efficient subcontractors.” _________________________________________________________________________________ Dr Donald Charrett, Published in International Construction Law Review (2019) ICLR 439, © 2019 International Construction Law Review “…comprehensively addresses the many factors that influence the success or failure of a construction project. It is a very practical book – the authors all have many years of experience on major projects in the construction industry. (...) This is one of the book’s great strengths – considered views from a variety of construction practitioners with different perspectives.(...) This book has something of importance for all the stakeholders involved in the delivery of a construction project. They must cooperate to achieve a successful outcome, and along the journey they must manage a variety of risks, which requires robust processes for corporate and project management. A successful project is not achieved in the absence of teamwork and communication – two of the fundamental ‘people’ themes in this excellent book. It will undoubtedly make a significant contribution to more successful construction projects in the future - an important achievement for a better world.” _________________________________________________________________________________ Paul Morrell, PROJECT Autumn 2019 "(...) it is asserted that 99 per cent of crashed projects are attributable to human behaviour, and there are strong chapters on this area - neglected in an industry motivated by a 'projects culture'.(...) competitive advantage comes from being able to demonstrate not just the required body of knowledge, but also the instincts, attitude and skill necessary to navigate one's way through the minefield. This book will help.” Table of ContentsAuthor's Notes xxi Acknowledgements xxiii Biographies xxv Preface xxxiii Why Have I Written this Book? xxxiii Objectives xxxv My Journey from the Australian Bush to International Construction xxxvi Who Should Read this Book and Why? xxxix Conclusion xxxix 1 Introduction 1 Ian Williams 1.1 Opening Remarks 1 1.2 Section A – The State of the Industry (Chapters 2–6) 2 1.3 Section B – People and Teamwork (Chapters 7–11) 2 1.4 Section C – The Right Framework – Forms of Contract, Business Models, and Public Private Partnerships (Chapters 12–15) 3 1.5 Section D – Management of Risk (Chapters 16–23) 3 1.6 Section E – Robust Processes – Corporate and Project Management (Chapters 24–27) 4 1.7 Section F – Emerging Conclusions (Chapter 28) 4 1.8 Final Note 4 Section A – The State of the Industry 5 2 Global Overview of the Construction Industry 7 2.1 Introduction – Globalisation Impacts on Construction 7 2.2 Construction Industry Cycles 7 2.3 Industry Trends – Business Models, Contract Types, Financing, Technology 8 2.4 Regional Trends – Middle East, Asia Pacific, Africa, the Americas, UK and Europe 9 2.5 Bad News and Its Consequences 11 2.6 The Good News – Significant Improvements in the Right Direction 13 2.7 Summary and Conclusions 15 3 Construction Consultants in the Global Market Place 19 Judy Adams 3.1 Introduction 19 3.2 Political Risk 19 3.3 Regional/Cultural Differences 20 3.4 Payment or Fee Recovery 21 3.5 Localisation 21 3.6 Failure to Attract or Retain Skilled People 21 3.7 Contractual Terms and Conditions 22 3.8 Ability to Deliver Across Major Projects/Programmes 22 3.9 Cyber Security 22 3.10 Contractor Failure 23 3.11 Design Liability 23 4 Common Causes of Project Failure 25 4.1 Introduction 25 4.2 High Profile ‘Problem Projects’ Since 2000 26 4.3 The 35 Common Causes 30 4.4 Project Leadership – How Bad Can It Get? 41 4.5 Lessons Learnt from Incompetent Site Management 43 4.6 Conclusion 44 5 The Use and Abuse of Construction Supply Chains 45 Professor Rudi Klein 5.1 Introduction 45 5.2 Construction: An Outsourced Industry 46 5.3 Adverse Economic Forces Bearing Down on the Supply Chain 47 5.4 Supply Chain Dysfunctionality 47 5.5 Addressing the Issues and Solutions 48 5.6 The Future 58 6 A Discussion on Preventing Corporate Failure: Learning from the UK Construction Crisis 59 Stephen Woodward and Nigel Brindley 6.1 A Call to Action’ 59 6.2 Lifting the General Level of Corporate Management 61 6.3 Improving Risk Management 64 6.4 Joint Recommendations by the Corporate Risk Manager and the Investment Banker 65 6.5 Conclusions 67 Section B – People and Teamwork 69 7 Obstacles to Senior Management and Board Success 71 7.1 Introduction 71 7.2 Groupthink and Team Selection 72 7.3 Training 73 7.4 Choosing the Wrong Strategy and/or Projects 74 7.5 Need for ‘Macro-Level’ Focus, with Effective Corporate Oversight (‘the Wider Picture’) 75 7.6 Effective Communication and Delegation 76 7.7 Summary 77 8 Structuring Successful Projects 79 8.1 Introduction 79 8.2 So What Happens on Successful Projects? What Are the Key Factors that Create Success? 79 8.3 The Different Activities and Responsibilities, from Concept to Completion of Construction 80 8.4 Checklist for Structuring Successful Projects 85 8.5 Summary 90 9 Understanding and Managing Difficult Client/Contractor Relationships 91 David Somerset 9.1 Introduction 91 9.2 Problems Posed by Difficult Clients 91 9.3 How to Manage Difficult Clients 92 9.4 Problems Posed by Difficult Contractors 95 9.5 Steps to Manage Difficult Contractors 96 9.6 Conclusion 97 10 Social Intelligence – The Critical Ingredient to Project Success 99 Tony Llewellyn 10.1 Introduction 99 10.2 Project Intelligence 100 10.3 Social Intelligence 100 10.4 Learning and Development 102 10.5 Building Cohesive Teams 103 10.6 Introducing a Specialist into Your Team 103 10.7 Coaching the Team 104 10.8 Managing Behavioural Risk 104 11 Practical Human Resources Considerations 107 11.1 The Changing Job Requirements in the Construction Industry – Government and Corporate 107 11.2 The Argument for Broader Based Training of Tomorrow’s Industry Leaders 108 11.3 What Makes a Good Leader in the Construction Industry – for Contractors, Government Departments and PPP Players? 108 11.4 Personnel Recruitment and Positioning – A Different Perspective 109 11.5 Leadership Considerations 110 11.6 The Inherent Risks of Decision Making for Survival 112 11.7 The Human Fallout from a Failed Project 113 11.8 Summary 114 Section C – The Right Framework – Forms of Contract, Business Models, and Public Private Partnerships 115 12 The Contract as the Primary Risk Management Tool 117 Rob Horne 12.1 Common understanding (or lack thereof) 118 12.2 Clarity 118 12.3 Knowledge transfer 119 12.4 Adaptability 119 12.5 Acceptance 119 12.6 Application 119 13 The New Engineering Contract (NEC) Interface with Early Warning Systems and Collaboration 129 Richard Bayfield 14 Development Contracting – An EfficientWay to Implement Major Projects 133 Jon Lyle 14.1 Introduction 133 14.2 Major Projects Are Unique 133 14.3 Commitment and Costs 134 14.4 The Tools for Successful Development Contracting 135 14.5 Conclusion 145 15 A Critical Review of PPPs and Recommendations for Improvement 147 15.1 Introduction 147 15.2 Proponents and Opponents 150 15.3 Project Viability and Necessary Due Diligence 153 15.4 Some Current Perspectives on the PPP Process 155 15.5 Efficient Structuring and Managing of PPPs 160 15.6 PPP Claims and Disputes 164 15.7 Summary of Key Factors for Success and Minimising Risk 165 Section D – Management of Risk 167 16 A Tale of Oil Rigs, Space Shots, and Dispute Boards: Human Factors in Risk Management 169 Dr Robert Gaitskell QC 16.1 Human Factors in Risk Management 169 16.2 The Challenger Disaster 169 16.3 Dispute Boards 171 16.4 Nuclear Fusion 173 16.5 The ITER Project 174 16.6 Conclusion 175 17 Effective Risk Management Processes 177 17.1 Introduction 177 17.2 Effects of Human Behaviour in Risk Management 177 17.3 Typical Project Risks 178 17.4 Keeping Risk Management Simple 180 17.5 Procedures to Eliminate, Mitigate, and Control Risks 183 17.6 Conclusions 187 18 Risk Management and its Relation to Success in the North American Context 189 John McArthur 18.1 Introduction 189 18.2 Relationship of Success to Risk Management 191 18.3 Planning for Success and Managing Risks 194 18.4 Go/No-Go Stage 194 18.5 Summary 196 18.6 Recent Projects: A Success and a Failure 197 19 Early Warning Systems (EWSs), the Missing Link 199 Edward Moore and Tony Llewellyn 19.1 Introduction 199 19.2 Look Outside of the Technical Bubble 199 19.3 Cultural Barriers 200 19.4 Learning to Value ‘Gut Feel’ 201 19.5 Case Study 202 19.6 Summary 204 20 Construction Risk Management – Technology to Manage Risk (ConTech) 205 Rob Horne 20.1 Introduction to Technology in Construction 205 20.2 What Do We Mean by ConTech? 206 20.3 ConTech as a Tool Not a Toy 209 20.4 Major Projects – Temporary Smart Cities 211 20.5 Smart City Principles 212 20.6 ‘Smart’ Commercial Management 213 20.7 Dehumanising Risk Management 214 20.8 Joining the Dots for Exponential Growth 218 20.9 Project Control and Risk Management –The Future 223 20.10 Conclusion 225 21 Intelligent Document Processes to Capture Data and Manage Risk and Compliance 227 Graham Thomson 21.1 Introduction 227 21.2 The Dimensions of IDF 229 22 Organisational Information Requirements for Successful BIM Implementation 233 Dr Noha Saleeb 22.1 Introduction 233 22.2 Leveraging Organisational Information Requirements for Business Success 234 22.3 Developing OIRs Using BIM 236 22.4 Conclusion 243 References 243 23 Examples of Successful Projects and how they Managed Risk 245 23.1 Introduction 245 23.2 People, People, People – London 2012 Olympic and Paralympic Games 245 Ian Williams 23.2.1 Governance 247 23.3 Managing Risk – Tunnels for Heathrow’s Terminal 5 (2001–2005) 249 Ian Williams Acknowledgements 255 Bibliography 256 23.4 Cyber Design Development – Alder Hey Institute in the Park, UK 256 Stephen Warburton 23.5 The Importance of Clear Ownership and Leadership by the Senior Management of the Client and the Contractor 258 Charles O’Neil Section E – Robust Processes – Corporate and Project Management 261 24 Planning and Programming Major Projects 263 Charles O’Neil and Rob Horne 24.1 The Foundations of Success 263 24.2 Monitoring ‘Progress versus Programme’ and ‘Cost-to-Complete versus Budget’ 265 24.3 Extensions of Time, Concurrency and Associated Costs 267 24.4 Ownership of Float 270 25 Managing and Resolving Conflict 275 David Richbell 25.1 Conflict Can Be Good 275 25.1.1 Different Truths 275 25.1.2 Difficult Conversations 275 25.2 Co-operation Versus Confrontation 276 25.3 We Are All Different 276 25.4 Fairness or Justice (or Both) 278 25.5 Relationships 278 25.6 The Move Towards Collaborative Working 279 25.7 Best Deals 279 25.8 Staged Resolution 279 25.9 Conclusion 282 26 Dispute Resolution – The Benefits and Risks of Alternative Methods 283 26.1 Introduction 283 26.2 Avoiding Formal Disputes Through Early Communications and Negotiations 283 26.3 Main Considerations of the Parties When They End Up in a Formal Dispute 285 26.4 What Do Commercial Clients Want Out of a Formal Dispute Process? 285 26.5 Working with Lawyers 286 26.6 Techniques for Negotiating Settlements 287 27 Peer Reviews and Independent Auditing of Construction Projects 291 Section F – Emerging Conclusions 295 28 Conclusions and Recommendations 297 28.1 Overview 297 28.2 Where Is the Global Industry Headed? 298 28.3 Key Observations and Recommended Actions 299 28.4 Final Thoughts 303 Appendix A 305 Index 307

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a unique overview of supply chain management (SCM) concepts, illustrating how the methodology can help enhance construction industry project success This book provides a unique appraisal of supply chain management (SCM) concepts brought together with lessons from industry and analysis gathered from extensive research on how supply chains are managed in the construction industry. The research from leading international academics has been drawn together with the experience from some of the industry''s foremost SCM practitioners to provide both the experienced researcher and the industry practitioner a thorough grounding in its principles, as well as an illustration of SCM as a methodology for enhancing construction industry project success. The new edition of Successful Construction Supply Chain Management: Concepts and Case Studies incorporate chapters dealing with Building Information Modelling, sustainability, the Demand Chain'' in projects, theTable of ContentsList of Contributors xv Preface xxi Acknowledgements xxiii 1 Introduction 1Stephen Pryke 1.1 Overview: Part A 2 1.1.1 IT, Digital, and BIM 2 1.1.2 Self-Organising Networks in Supply Chains 2 1.1.3 Green Issues 3 1.1.4 Demand Chains and Supply Chains 4 1.1.5 Lean 5 1.1.6 Power Structures and Systemic Risk 5 1.1.7 Decision-Making Maturity 6 1.2 Overview: Part B 7 1.2.1 Lessons from Megaprojects 7 1.2.2 Collaboration and Integration 8 1.2.3 Lesson Learned and Findings from Tier 1 Contractors 8 1.2.4 Lean Practices in The Netherlands 9 1.2.5 Knowledge Transfer in Supply Chains 10 1.2.6 The Role of Trust in Managing Supply Chains 10 1.3 Summary 11 References 11 Part I Chapters that Principally, but not Exclusively, Deal with Concepts and the Development of Theory 13 2 The Digital Supply Chain: Mobilising Supply Chain Management Philosophy to Reconceptualise Digital Technologies and Building Information Modelling (BIM) 15Eleni Papadonikolaki 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 The Nature of Construction 17 2.2.1 Addressing Existing Complexity and Fragmentation in Construction 17 2.2.2 Advancements from Other Industries Applicable to Construction 17 2.2.3 Potential Synergies Between Supply Chain Management and Digitisation 19 2.3 Origins and Development of Supply Chain Thinking in AEC 20 2.3.1 The Emergence of Supply Chain Thinking from Operations and Logistics Research 20 2.3.2 The Adaptation of Supply Chain Management Concepts in AEC 21 2.4 Pragmatic Impact of Supply Chain Thinking in Construction 22 2.4.1 Supply Chain Thinking Schools 22 2.4.2 Supply Chain Concepts and Varying Interpretations 23 2.5 Origins and Development of Digitisation in the Built Environment 23 2.5.1 Development of Digital Capabilities in the Built Environment 23 2.5.2 From Building Product Models to Building Information Modelling (BIM) 25 2.5.3 Importance of Standards in a Digital Built Environment 25 2.5.4 Pluralism of Digital Artefacts and BIM Maturity Assessment Methods 26 2.6 Pragmatic Impact of Digitisation and BIM 28 2.6.1 BIM and the Enterprise: Bottom-Up Adoption 28 2.6.2 BIM and the Institutional Setting: Top-Down Diffusion 28 2.6.3 Mismatch Between Top-Down and Bottom-Up Strategies 29 2.7 Synthesis of Digital Technologies Construction Supply Chain 30 2.7.1 Potential and Outlook of Digital Technologies to Support Supply Chains 30 2.7.2 Co-Evolution of Supply Chain Management and Digital in AEC 31 2.8 Conclusion 32 References 34 3 At the Interface: When Social Network Analysis and Supply Chain Management Meet 43Huda Almadhoob 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 Reconceptualising Supply Chains 44 3.3 Supply Networks as Complex Adaptive Systems 45 3.4 What Is Social Network Analysis? 50 3.5 Rationale for a Network Approach 52 3.6 Key Challenges in Conducting Social Network Analysis 54 3.7 Conclusions and Directions for Future Research 55 3.8 Managerial Implications 56 References 57 4 Green Supply Chain Management in Construction: A Systematic Review 63Niamh Murtagh and Sulafa Badi 4.1 Introduction 63 4.1.1 Environmental Impact of Construction 64 4.1.2 Definition 65 4.2 Research Methodology 66 4.2.1 Stage 1: Define Eligibility Criteria 66 4.2.2 Stage 2: Define Search Terms 67 4.2.3 Stage 3: Search, Screen, and Compile List of Included Papers 67 4.2.4 Stage 4: Code and Critically Evaluate Included Studies 67 4.2.5 Stage 5: Formulate Synthesis 68 4.3 Analysis 68 4.3.1 Research Interest over Time 68 4.3.2 Source Journals 68 4.3.3 Geographic Spread 69 4.3.4 Methods 69 4.3.5 Tools and Techniques 72 4.3.6 Stakeholders 73 4.3.7 Definitions of Green Supply Chain Management 74 4.4 Discussion 75 4.4.1 Overview 75 4.4.2 Definition 75 4.4.3 Nature of Construction 76 4.4.4 Stakeholder Roles 77 4.4.5 Practical Recommendations 77 4.5 Looking to the Future 78 4.6 Conclusion 80 References 81 5 Connecting the ‘Demand Chain’ with the ‘Supply Chain’: (Re)creating Organisational Routines in Life Cycle Transitions 87Simon Addyman 5.1 Introduction 87 5.1.1 The Temporal Paradox in Temporary Organising 89 5.2 The Construction Industry – Procurement and Relational Difficulties 90 5.3 Temporary Organisations and the Project Life Cycle 92 5.4 Routines and the Capability of Projects 95 5.5 A Recursive Process Model of Transitioning 98 5.6 Discussion 101 5.7 Summary 103 References 104 6 Construction Supply Chain Management through a Lean Lens 109Lauri Koskela, Ruben Vrijhoef and Rafaella Dana Broft 6.1 Introduction 109 6.2 Theoretical and Philosophical Grounding of Lean 110 6.2.1 Theoretical and Philosophical Grounding of the Mainstream Approach to Production Management 110 6.2.2 Theoretical and Philosophical Grounding of Lean 111 6.2.2.1 Theory of Production 111 6.2.2.2 Epistemology of the Lean Concept 112 6.2.2.3 Ontology of the Lean Concept 112 6.2.3 Implications for Management and Organising 113 6.3 Theoretical Background and Characterisation of Supply Chain Management 114 6.3.1 Production Perspective 114 6.3.2 Economic Perspective 115 6.3.3 Organisational Perspective 116 6.3.4 Social Perspective 116 6.4 Analysis of Supply Chain Approaches and Conceptualisations through a Lean Versus Mainstream Lens 117 6.5 Contingency of Supply Chain Management in Construction through a Lean Lens 118 6.5.1 Construction from a Production Perspective 119 6.5.2 Construction from an Economic Perspective 119 6.5.3 Construction from an Organisational Perspective 119 6.5.4 Construction from a Social Perspective 121 6.5.5 A Crossover of Supply Chain Management and Lean in the Context of Construction 121 6.6 Discussion 121 6.7 Conclusion 122 References 122 7 Supply Chain Management and Risk Set in Changing Times: Old Wine in New Bottles? 127Andrew Edkins 7.1 Introduction and Overview 127 7.2 The Collapse of Carillion: Consequences for Consideration – Implications for Construction Supply Chains 129 7.3 Risk, Power Structures, and Supply Chains 132 7.3.1 Commercial Power and the Role of Law and Regulation 133 7.3.2 Technology-Based Power Structures: Cases of Construction Waste and BIM 135 7.4 Conclusions 139 References 140 8 Linkages, Networks, and Interactions: Exploring the Context for Risk Decision Making in Construction Supply Chains 143Alex Arthur 8.1 Introduction 143 8.2 The Evolution of the UK Construction Industry and Supply Chain Relationships 144 8.3 The Concept of Risk 147 8.3.1 Uncertainty 149 8.3.2 Probability 150 8.3.3 Risk as a Potential Future Event 150 8.3.4 The Impact of a Risk Event on an Objective or Interest 150 8.4 The Construction Risk Management System 150 8.4.1 Risk Identification Subsystem 152 8.4.2 Risk Analysis Subsystem 153 8.4.3 Risk Response Subsystem 153 8.5 Risk Generation in Construction Supply Chain Relationships 154 8.5.1 Project Risk Events Generated through the Project Delivery Processes 154 8.5.2 Project Risk Events Generated through the Network and Interactions within Construction Supply Chain Relationships 155 8.6 Risk Management Decision-Making Systems in Construction Supply Chain Relationships 156 8.7 Conclusion 159 References 161 9 Culture in Supply Chains 167Richard Fellows and Anita Liu 9.1 Introduction – Context 167 9.2 Culture 170 9.3 Dimensions of Culture 173 9.3.1 National Culture 174 9.3.2 Organisational Culture 176 9.3.3 Fitting with Other Cultures 180 9.3.4 Organisational Climate 182 9.3.5 Project Atmosphere 182 9.3.6 Behaviour Modification 183 9.4 Values and Value 183 9.5 Ethics 185 9.6 Organisational Citizenship Behaviour (OCB) and Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) 187 9.7 Teams and Teamwork 188 9.8 Sensemaking 189 9.9 Motivated Reasoning 190 9.10 (Strategic) Alliances 192 9.11 Supply Chain Participants and Behaviour 194 9.12 Conclusion 199 References 201 Part II Chapters that Principally, but not Exclusively, Deal with Case Study Material 211 10 Managing Megaproject Supply Chains: Life After Heathrow Terminal 5 213Dr Juliano Denicol 10.1 Motivation for the Research 213 10.2 Construction Supply Chain Management 214 10.2.1 Temporary vs Permanent Supply Chains (ETO vs MTS) 217 10.3 Why Are Megaprojects So Important? 221 10.4 Megaproject Supply Chain Management 223 10.5 Conclusion 228 References 231 11 Anglian Water @one Alliance: A New Approach to Supply Chain Management 237Grant Mills, Dale Evans, and Chris Candlish 11.1 Introduction 237 11.2 Supply Chain Management 238 11.3 Alliance Supply Chain Management 239 11.4 Anglian Water Alliance Case Study 240 11.4.1 Strategic Approach to Alliance Supply Chain Management 240 11.4.2 Alliance Supply Chain Work Clusters 241 11.4.3 Alliance Supply Chain Early Involvement and Collaboration 242 11.5 Evaluation of the Value of Alliance Supply Chain Management 244 11.5.1 Strategic Approach to Alliance Supply Chain Management 244 11.5.2 Alliance Supply Chain Management Provides an Effective Environment for the Early Engagement of Specialist Suppliers 244 11.5.3 Alliance Supply Chain Management Can Create a Win-Win-Win Reciprocal Relationship 245 11.5.4 Alliance Supply Chain Management Can Drive Team Innovation and Create New Service Relationships 245 11.5.5 Long-Term Approaches to Alliance Supply Chain Management Can Drive Strategic Business Benefits 246 11.5.6 Alliance Supply Chain Management that Uses Advanced Production Systems Can Deliver Tactical Benefits 246 11.6 Conclusions 246 References 247 12 Understanding Supply Chain Management from a Main Contractor’s Perspective 251Emmanuel Manu and Andrew Knight 12.1 Introduction 251 12.2 Multilayered Subcontracting in the Construction Industry 252 12.3 Supply Chain Management: Principles and Practices 254 12.4 Supply Chain Management Practices from a Contractor’s Perspective 256 12.5 Case Study of a Large UK Main Contractor 257 12.5.1 Supply Chain Management Goals 258 12.5.2 Supply Chain Management Team 259 12.5.3 Supply Chain Management Classification 260 12.5.4 Supply Chain Management Practices 261 12.5.4.1 Audit Supply Chain Firms 261 12.5.4.2 Use Collaborative ICT Systems 263 12.5.4.3 Measure Performance of Supply Chain Firms 263 12.5.4.4 Engage in Continuous Performance Improvement Activities 264 12.5.4.5 Develop Long-Term Collaborative Relationships 264 12.5.4.6 Motivate and Incentivise the Supply Chain 265 12.6 Conclusion 265 References 267 13 Lean Supply Chain Management in Construction: Implementation at the ‘Lower Tiers’ of the Construction Supply Chain 271Rafaella Dana Broft 13.1 Supply Chain Management in a Project-Based Environment 271 13.1.1 The Supply Chain Management Concept 271 13.1.2 The Project Focus in Construction 272 13.1.3 The Lower Tiers of the Construction Supply Chain 273 13.1.4 A Main Contractor’s Position and Role in the Construction Supply Chain 274 13.2 The Characteristics of Construction 275 13.2.1 Construction from a Production Perspective 275 13.2.2 Construction: True Peculiarities?! 277 13.3 Lean Supply Chain Management in Construction 279 13.3.1 An Introduction to Lean 279 13.3.2 The Role of Lean in Combination with Supply Chain Management 280 13.3.3 Lean and Supply Chain Management in Construction 281 13.4 Conclusion 283 References 283 14 Knowledge Transfer in Supply Chains 289Hedley Smyth and Meri Duryan 14.1 Introduction 289 14.1.1 The Supply Chain Issue 290 14.1.2 Learning and Knowledge Transfer 291 14.2 What Is Known – A Summary Review of the Literature 292 14.2.1 The Supply Chain Ecosystem 292 14.2.2 Supply Chain Learning and Knowledge Management 293 14.2.3 Prequalification and Bidding Processes 294 14.3 Methodology and Methods 295 14.4 Findings 296 14.5 Conclusions 301 References 302 15 Understanding Trust in Construction Supply Chain Relationships 307Jing Xu 15.1 Introduction 307 15.2 Towards an Understanding of Trust in Construction Supply Chains 308 15.2.1 Towards a Service-Dominant Logic View 308 15.2.2 Towards a Process-Based View 311 15.3 Methodology and Methods 314 15.4 Case Study 315 15.4.1 Context 316 15.4.1.1 Assessing the Shadow of the Past 316 15.4.1.2 Organisational Structure and Policy: Forming a Sense of Unfairness 316 15.4.2 Procurement and Preconstruction Stage 318 15.4.2.1 Early Involvement: Forming a Sense of Security and Familiarity 318 15.4.2.2 Two-stage Procurement: Creating a Sense of Equity 318 15.4.2.3 The Value of Trust 319 15.4.3 Execution Stage 320 15.4.3.1 Structuring the Project: Maintaining Security and Familiarity 320 15.4.3.2 Joint Activities: Forming the Interpretations of Trustworthiness 320 15.4.3.3 Using Trust Relations in Resource Coordination: Bounded Solidarity and Economic Reciprocity 321 15.4.3.4 The Value of Trust 322 15.4.4 Completion Stage 323 15.4.4.1 Stabilising the Relationship: Trust as a Rule of Legitimation 323 15.4.4.2 The Shadow of the Future: Social Reciprocity 323 15.4.4.3 The Value of Trust 323 15.5 Discussion 324 15.5.1 The Constitution of Trust 324 15.5.2 The Value of Trust 326 15.5.3 Conditions of Trust: Influences of Ecosystems and Time 326 15.6 Conclusions and Recommendations 328 References 329 16 Summary and Conclusions 335Stephen Pryke 16.1 Context –What’s the Problem? 335 16.2 A Summary of the Contributions 336 16.2.1 IT, Digital, and BIM 336 16.2.2 Self-Organising Networks in Supply Chains 336 16.2.3 Green Issues 337 16.2.4 Demand Chains and Supply Chains 337 16.2.5 Lean 337 16.2.6 Power Structures and Systemic Risk 337 16.2.7 Decision-Making Maturity 338 16.2.8 Culture 338 16.2.9 Lessons from Megaprojects 338 16.2.10 Collaboration and Integration 339 16.2.11 Lesson Learned and Findings from Tier 1 Contractors 339 16.2.12 Lean Practices in The Netherlands 340 16.2.13 Knowledge Transfer 340 16.2.14 The Role of Trust in Managing Supply Chains 341 16.3 Key Themes and Agendas for Research and Practice 341 16.3.1 Complexity and Interdependence 341 16.3.2 Work Packages 341 16.3.3 Resistance to Change 342 16.3.4 Risk 342 16.3.5 Communications and Integration of Systems and the Green Agenda 343 16.3.6 The Role of the Contractor 343 16.3.7 The Role of the Client 343 16.3.8 Lean Construction 343 16.3.9 Collaborative Behaviour and Quality of Relationships 344 16.4 Final Remarks 344 References 344 Index 347

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical and accessible guide to managing a successful project Effective Project Management is based around an activities and action check list approach to project management. It provides a guide to the basic principles and the disciplines that managers need to master in order to be successful. The author's check lists approach (based on his years of practical experience on projects) ensure that project managers are following valid processes, helping them to be innovative in their approach to developing plans and resolving problems. In addition, the author's check list pick and mix format is designed to be flexible in order to meet the individual needs of the reader. Effective Project Management also contains some information on the theories underpinning project management. Knowledge of the theory helps in the understanding of how project management works in practice. In addition to the book's check lists of what activities need to be perTable of ContentsPreface xix Acknowledgements xxi Introduction 1 Part I Projects and Their Management 5 Section A Project Characteristics and Phases 6 1 Characteristics 7 2 Phases 8 3 Project Patterns 11 4 Reasons for Projects 12 5 Project Needs 12 Section B Project Management Characteristics 14 1 Models 16 2 Characteristics 18 3 Key Management Decisions and Phases 20 4 Project Management Patterns 24 Section C Execution Planning Influences 26 1 Project Characteristics, Size, and Complexity 26 2 Strategic Decisions 27 3 The Historic Nature of an Industry 30 4 The Characteristics of the Industry/Business Sector 31 5 Phases and Schedule 41 6 Execution Planning 41 7 Generic Influences on Project Execution 42 Section D The Project Management Role 43 1 Strategic and Contractual 43 2 Organizational and Functions 43 3 Responsibilities and Orientation 46 4 Competencies and Leadership 47 5 Abilities and Skills 48 6 The Project Manager 50 Section E The Manager of Projects 52 1 Financial Situation 52 2 Scope of Work and Change Orders 54 3 Project Progress and Status 54 4 Health, Safety, and Environment 56 5 Quality Audits and Status 56 6 Risk Management 56 7 Client Relations 56 8 Formal Reviews 56 9 The Project Management Group 57 10 Evaluating a Project Manager 57 11 The Manager of Projects and the Client(s) 58 Section F The Owner and Client 59 1 Some Fundamentals 59 2 Cost and Planning 61 3 Things to Watch 61 4 Most Important of All – Safety 62 Section G Achieving Success 63 1 The Project Management 66 2 Alignment of Objectives and Client-Contractor Relations 67 3 Involvement of Users 68 4 Get and Build the Right Team with Clear Roles and Responsibilities 70 5 Clear and Complete Scope Definition 70 6 Thorough Planning of the Work 71 7 Planning Communications 72 8 The Efficiency of the Project Launch Phase 73 9 Change Control 74 10 Effective Decision Making 74 11 Tackle Things Today – Tomorrow They Will Be Bigger 75 12 Conclusions for Success 75 Part II Programme Management 77 Section A Programme Management – What’s in A Name? 78 1 Programme Management Conclusions 79 2 Summarizing Programme Management 80 3 Key Roles for a Programme Manager 81 Section B Business Change Programmes 82 1 Blueprint 82 2 Programme Organization 82 3 Change Stakeholders 83 4 Benefits Realization 83 5 Gate Reviews 84 6 Project Controls 84 7 Terminating the Programme 85 Section C Management of Portfolios 86 Part III Feasibility and Contracting 89 Section A Feasibility Studies 90 1 Feasibility Study Plan 91 2 Defining the Project 92 3 The Feasibility Report 92 4 Proposed Execution Plan 94 5 The Next Step 95 Section B Contracting Strategy Considerations 96 1 Business Strategy and Stakeholder Alignment 96 2 Regional and Local Factors 96 3 Market Intelligence 97 4 Prequalification Processes 97 5 General Contracting Issues 98 Section C Issuing an Enquiry 103 1 Enquiry Preparation Phase 103 2 Tendering Phase 106 3 Evaluation Phase 106 Section D To Tender or Not to Tender 109 1 The Tendering Decision 109 2 The Tender Decision Analysis 110 3 The Final Tendering Decision 113 Section E Tendering and Proposal Phase 115 1 Tendering Preliminaries 115 2 Developing the Tender or Proposal – In-house Work 117 3 Coordinating with Third Parties 121 4 Coordinating with the Client 121 5 Commercial 122 6 Reviewing the Tender or Proposal 124 7 Before Submitting the Tender or Proposal 125 8 After Completion of the Tender or Proposal 125 9 Proposal Team Presentation 126 10 Possible Client Questions for the Proposal Team 129 Section F Contracts 131 1 Starting Work 133 2 Awarding Contracts 134 3 Contract Document 134 4 Contract Awarded 136 5 Contractual Issues 137 6 Some Contractual Reminders 138 7 Discharge of a Contract 138 Part IV Project Execution 139 Section A Project Launch 140 1 Project Checks 142 2 Project Objectives 143 3 Scope Launch 144 4 Team Launch 144 5 Execution Launch 145 6 Launch Controls 145 7 Hold Kick-Off Meeting 146 8 Kick-Off Meeting Agenda 146 9 Kick-Off Schedule 148 Section B Establishing An Office 150 Section C Getting Organized 152 1 Setting up the Project Infrastructure 152 2 Controlling the Documents 154 3 Responsibilities 155 4 Procedures 156 5 Project Execution Plan 156 6 Formalities 157 7 Project Insurance 157 8 Some Advice 158 Section D Mobilization 159 Section E Client Relations 161 Section F Scope 163 1 Scope Documents 164 2 Changes to the Scope 164 3 Work Packaging 164 Section G Estimates and Budget 166 1 Establishing the Estimate(s) 167 2 Trend Programme 167 3 Allowances 168 4 The Budget 168 Section H Accounting 170 1 Looking after the Finances 170 2 Bonds 172 Section J Planning and Scheduling 173 1 Getting Organized 173 2 Planning 173 3 Scheduling 174 Section K Project Controls 176 1 Setting Up 177 2 Progress and Reporting 178 3 Cost Progress and Control 179 4 The Critical Path 179 Section L Variations/Changes/Claims 181 1 Trend Base Estimate 182 2 Trend Meetings 183 3 Potential Trends 184 4 Claims for Changes 184 5 Managing Claims 186 6 Resist Change 187 Section M Reporting 188 1 Reporting Cycle 188 2 Visibility 189 3 Progress Reporting 190 4 Progress Report 191 5 Cost Reporting 192 Section N Project Meetings 193 Section O Design 195 1 Getting Organized 195 2 Reviewing the Design 196 3 Some Specific Design Ideas 198 4 Construction Issues 198 Section P Procurement 200 1 Getting Organized 200 2 Evaluating Suppliers 201 3 Expediting and Inspection 202 4 Some Specific Procurement Ideas 202 5 Payment Terms 204 Section Q Installation and Construction 205 1 The Key Staff 205 2 Construction Planning 207 3 Work Packaging 210 4 Construction Site Work 210 5 Some Specific Construction Ideas 213 6 Establishing Authority 214 Section R Subcontracting 215 1 Questions to Ask Before Subcontracting 215 2 Contracting Checks 216 3 Management Issues 217 4 List of Some Subcontracts 217 Section S Commissioning and Setting To Work 219 Section T Contract Completion - Close Out 222 1 Handover of Documentation 222 2 Handover of Equipment 223 3 Clean Up 223 4 Disposal of Surplus Material 223 5 Closing Contracts 224 6 Financial Matters 225 7 Close Out 225 Section U Post Project Activities 227 1 Completing the Records 227 2 Post-project Appraisal – Internal Performance Review 227 3 Project/Client Review Meeting/Lessons Learned 228 4 Historical Report 230 5 Client Follow-up and Marketing 230 6 Internal Projects Benefits 231 Part V Specialist Topics 233 Section A Completed and Inspected Work 234 1 Completed Work 234 2 Inspecting Work 236 Section B Coordination Procedure 238 1 Basic Organizing Information 238 2 Coordination with the Company 239 Section C Cultural Issues 243 1 Some Definitions of Culture 243 2 A Seminal Grouping of Cultures 244 3 Some Cultural Issues to be Aware of 244 4 Management Style 246 Section D Documentation 247 1 Contractor’s Own Documents and Drawings 247 2 Vendor Drawings and Documents 249 Section E Estimating and Contingency 250 1 Types of Estimate 250 2 Estimate Planning Sequence 252 3 The Estimating Process 253 4 Estimate Information and Content 255 5 Contingency Estimation 259 Section F Filing and Archiving 261 1 The Filing System 261 2 Archiving 263 3 Master File Index: Recommended Minor Categories and Suggested Subjects 264 Section G Financial Appraisal 270 1 Cash versus Profit 270 2 Simple Project Appraisal Methods 272 3 Payback 273 4 Discounted Cash Flow Techniques 273 5 Internal Rate of Return – IRR 276 6 Sensitivity and Risk Analysis 277 7 Financial Appraisal Conclusion 277 Section H Incoterms® 280 1 Rules for Any Mode or Modes of Transport 280 2 Rules for Sea and Inland Waterway Transport 281 3 Transfer of Risks and Obligations 281 4 Sellers’ and Buyers’ Detailed Obligations 282 5 Additional Information 282 Section J Joint Associations 283 1 Reasons for Joint Association 283 2 Documentation and Legal Requirements 284 3 Selecting a Partner 284 4 Joint Association Risks 285 5 Steps to Evaluate Joint Associations 285 6 Key Issues for a Joint Association 287 7 Steps in Tendering 288 8 Control of the Work 289 9 Financial Control 289 10 Essentials for Success 290 11 Why Joint Associations Fail 290 Section K Performance Appraisals 292 1 Purpose and Preparation 292 2 The Interview 292 3 Post-interview Actions 293 Section L Performance Measurement and Earned Value 295 1 Design/Engineering Performance 295 2 Procurement Performance 297 3 Construction Performance 297 4 Practical Performance Details 298 5 Linking Deliverables to Programme 299 6 Recording and Comparing Data 300 7 Earned Value Terminology 302 8 Useful Health Ratios or Indices 302 Section M Risk and Risk List 303 1 Process Model 304 2 Prioritising Risk 306 3 Risk List 309 4 People and Risk 312 5 Country Risk Assessment 313 Section N ‘S‘ Curves 315 1 Interpreting the Curves 315 2 Change Orders 319 Section O Site Checks 323 1 Country Data 323 2 Site Data 323 3 Local Authorities 323 4 Suppliers and Local Contractors 323 5 Labour Availability 324 6 Non-manual Employees 324 7 Housing and Camp 324 8 Shipping and Handling 325 Section P Surety Bonds 326 1 Types of Bonds 326 2 Characteristics of Bonds 328 Section Q Selecting and Building the Team 329 1 Selecting the Team 329 2 Building the Team 332 3 New to the Team 336 Section R Team Roles 337 1 Specification of the Eight Team Roles 337 2 A Suggestion for a Project Manager 341 3 Matching the Roles to the Project Process 342 Section S Value Management/Engineering 343 1 VM/VE Process 343 2 Group Process 346 Part VI Skills Check Lists 349 Section A Communications 350 1 Correspondence 351 2 Documents 353 3 ElectronicMedia 354 4 Oral 357 5 Social 358 6 Visual 359 7 Other Communication Tools 359 8 Translators 359 9 A Difficulty 360 10 Some Reminders 361 Section B Leadership and Motivation 362 1 Consensus to Dictatorial Continuum by Tannenbaum and Schmidt 363 2 The Three S’s of Group Communications 364 3 Situational Leadership by Kenneth Blanchard and Dr. Paul Hersey 365 4 Task, Team, Individual – Action Centred Leadership by John Adair 367 5 Leadership and Management Roles 368 6 Management by Walking/Wandering Around MBWA 369 7 Responsibility 369 8 Leadership – More Than a Management Model 370 9 Thoughts for the Day 371 Section C Managing and Conducting Meetings 373 1 Planning the Meeting 373 2 The Agenda 374 3 Manage the Process and the People 375 4 Control the Discussion 377 5 Construct Decisions and Summarize 378 6 Record and Notify 379 Section D Negotiation 381 1 Preparation for Negotiation 381 2 Discuss Interests 382 3 Signal 382 4 Propose for Movement 383 5 Package 383 6 Bargain 383 7 Close the Deal 383 8 Agree the Deal 383 9 Techniques and Tricks 384 Section E Personal Skills 386 1 Planning an Interaction with Others 386 2 The Exchange 387 3 Asking Questions 388 4 Changing Style 388 5 Team Role Style 390 6 Finalizing the Interaction 391 7 Giving and Receiving Feedback 391 8 Dealing with Difficult People 392 9 Being Angry 394 10 Priorities 395 11 Time Management 395 12 Learning 396 13 Motivating Skills 397 14 Some Personal Advice 397 15 Questionnaires 398 Section F Politics in Projects 399 1 Typical Destructive Behaviour 400 2 Dubious Behaviour? 401 3 How Politics Can Affect a Project 402 4 Some Advice 403 5 Something to Think About 405 Section G Presentation Skills 406 1 Fundamentals for All Presentations 406 2 Format for a Presentation to Inform/Explain 408 3 Presentation to Influence/Convince 409 4 Presentation Expressing a Viewpoint/Opinion 410 5 Team Presentations 410 6 Your Audience 411 7 Presentation Skills Analysis 412 8 Organizing the Location 413 9 Visual and Other Aids 415 10 Dealing with Questions 416 11 Summarizing a Presentation 417 Section H Prioritising Techniques 418 1 Group Work Using Flip Charts 418 2 Graphical Plots 418 3 Binary Decision-making 420 Section J Problem-solving Process 422 1 Define the Problem 423 2 Define the Objectives and Success Criteria 423 3 Analyse the Problem 423 4 Create and Propose Solutions 424 5 Evaluate, Forecast Consequences, and Select 424 6 Recommend, Plan Action, and Implement the Solution 425 7 Evaluate the Outcome and Follow Up 426 Section K Problem-solving Techniques 427 1 Brainstorming 427 2 Check Sheets 428 3 Pareto and Other Diagrams 429 4 Cause and Effect – Ishikawa or Fish Bone Diagram 430 5 Force Field Analysis 430 Section L Report Writing 433 1 The Report Objective 433 2 The Reader 433 3 The Material for the Report 434 4 The Report Structure 435 5 The Executive Summary 435 6 Introduction to the Report 435 7 The Body of the Report 436 8 Writing the Report 436 9 Conclusions and Recommendations 438 10 Appendices 439 11 Finalizing the Report 439 Abbreviations 441 Index 447

Read more less

Book SynopsisReliability is one of the most important attributes for the products and processes of any company or organization. This important work provides a powerful framework of domain-independent reliability improvement and risk reducing methods which can greatly lower risk in any area of human activity. It reviews existing methods for risk reduction that can be classified as domain-independent and introduces the following new domain-independent reliability improvement and risk reduction methods: SeparationStochastic separationIntroducing deliberate weaknessesSegmentationSelf-reinforcementInversionReducing the rate of accumulation of damagePermutationSubstitutionLimiting the space and time exposureComparative reliability models The domain-independent methods for reliability improvement and risk reduction do not depend on the availability of past failure data, domain-specific expertise or knowledge of the failure mechanisms underlying the failure modes. Through numerous examples and case studiesTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 Domain-Independent Methods for Reliability Improvement and Risk Reduction 1 1.1 The Domain-Specific Methods for Risk Reduction 1 1.2 The Statistical, Data-Driven Approach 3 1.3 The Physics-of-Failure Approach 4 1.4 Reliability Improvement and TRIZ 6 1.5 The Domain-Independent Methods for Reliability Improvement and Risk Reduction 6 2 Basic Concepts 9 2.1 Likelihood of Failure, Consequences from Failure, Potential Loss, and Risk of Failure 9 2.2 Drawbacks of the Expected Loss as a Measure of the Potential Loss from Failure 14 2.3 Potential Loss, Conditional Loss, and Risk of Failure 15 2.4 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk 19 2.5 Resilience 21 3 Overview of Methods and Principles for Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk That Can Be Classified as Domain-Independent 23 3.1 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Preventing Failure Modes 23 3.1.1 Techniques for Identifying and Assessing Failure Modes 23 3.1.2 Effective Risk Reduction Procedure Related to Preventing Failure Modes from Occurring 27 3.1.3 Reliability Improvement and Risk Reduction by Root Cause Analysis 28 3.1.3.1 Case Study: Improving the Reliability of Automotive Suspension Springs by Root Cause Analysis 28 3.1.4 Preventing Failure Modes by Removing Latent Faults 29 3.2 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by a Fault-Tolerant System Design and Fail-Safe Design 31 3.2.1 Building in Redundancy 31 3.2.1.1 Case Study: Improving Reliability by k-out-of-n redundancy 34 3.2.2 Fault-Tolerant Design 34 3.2.3 Fail-Safe Principle and Fail-Safe Design 35 3.2.4 Reducing Risk by Eliminating Vulnerabilities 36 3.2.4.1 Eliminating Design Vulnerabilities 36 3.2.4.2 Reducing the Negative Impact of Weak Links 37 3.2.4.3 Reducing the Likelihood of Unfavourable Combinations of Risk-Critical Random Factors 38 3.2.4.4 Reducing the Vulnerability of Computational Models 39 3.3 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Protecting Against Common Cause 40 3.4 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Simplifying at a System and Component Level 42 3.5 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Reducing the Variability of Risk-Critical Parameters 44 3.5.1 Case Study: Interaction Between the Upper Tail of the Load Distribution and the Lower Tail of the Strength Distribution 46 3.6 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Making the Design Robust 48 3.6.1 Case Study: Increasing the Robustness of a Spring Assembly with Constant Clamping Force 50 3.7 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Built-in Reinforcement 51 3.7.1 Built-In Prevention Reinforcement 51 3.7.2 Built-In Protection Reinforcement 51 3.8 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Condition Monitoring 52 3.9 Reducing the Risk of Failure by Improving Maintainability 56 3.10 Reducing Risk by Eliminating Factors Promoting Human Errors 57 3.11 Reducing Risk by Reducing the Hazard Potential 58 3.12 Reducing Risk by using Protective Barriers 59 3.13 Reducing Risk by Efficient Troubleshooting Procedures and Systems 60 3.14 Risk Planning and Training 60 4 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Separation 61 4.1 The Method of Separation 61 4.2 Separation of Risk-Critical Factors 62 4.2.1 Time Separation by Scheduling 62 4.2.1.1 Case Study: Full Time Separation with Random Starts of the Events 62 4.2.2 Time and Space Separation by Using Interlocks 63 4.2.2.1 Case Study: A Time Separation by Using an Interlock 63 4.2.3 Time Separation in Distributed Systems by Using Logical Clocks 64 4.2.4 Space Separation of Information 65 4.2.5 Separation of Duties to Reduce the Risk of Compromised Safety, Errors, and Fraud 65 4.2.6 Logical Separation by Using a Shared Unique Key 66 4.2.6.1 Case Study: Logical Separation of X-ray Equipment by a Shared Unique Key 66 4.2.7 Separation by Providing Conditions for Independent Operation 67 4.3 Separation of Functions, Properties, or Behaviour 68 4.3.1 Separation of Functions 68 4.3.1.1 Separation of Functions to Optimise for Maximum Reliability 68 4.3.1.2 Separation of Functions to Reduce Load Magnitudes 70 4.3.1.3 Separation of a Single Function into Multiple Components to Reduce Vulnerability to a Single Failure 71 4.3.1.4 Separation of Functions to Compensate Deficiencies 71 4.3.1.5 Separation of Functions to Prevent Unwanted Interactions 71 4.3.1.6 Separation of Methods to Reduce the Risk Associated with Incorrect Mathematical Models 72 4.4 Separation of Properties to Counter Poor Performance Caused by Inhomogeneity 72 4.4.1 Separation of Strength Across Components and Zones According to the Intensity of the Stresses from Loading 72 4.4.2 Separation of Properties to Satisfy Conflicting Requirements 74 4.4.3 Separation in Geometry 75 4.4.3.1 Case Study: Separation in Geometry for a Cantilever Beam 75 4.5 Separation on a Parameter, Conditions, or Scale 76 4.5.1 Separation at Distinct Values of a Risk-Critical Parameter Through Deliberate Weaknesses and Stress Limiters 76 4.5.2 Separation by Using Phase Changes 77 4.5.3 Separation of Reliability Across Components and Assemblies According to Their Cost of Failure 77 4.5.3.1 Case Study: Separation of the Reliability of Components Based on the Cost of Failure 78 5 Reducing Risk by Deliberate Weaknesses 81 5.1 Reducing the Consequences from Failure Through Deliberate Weaknesses 81 5.2 Separation from Excessive Levels of Stress 82 5.2.1 Deliberate Weaknesses Disconnecting Excessive Load 82 5.2.2 Energy-Absorbing Deliberate Weaknesses 85 5.2.2.1 Case Study: Reducing the Maximum Stress from Dynamic Loading by Energy-Absorbing Elastic Components 85 5.2.3 Designing Frangible Objects or Weakly Fixed Objects 86 5.3 Separation from Excessive Levels of Damage 87 5.3.1 Deliberate Weaknesses Decoupling Damaged Regions and Limiting the Spread of Damage 87 5.3.2 Deliberate Weaknesses Providing Stress and Strain Relaxation 88 5.3.3 Deliberate Weaknesses Separating from Excessive Levels of Damage Accumulation 90 5.4 Deliberate Weaknesses Deflecting the Failure Location or Damage Propagation 91 5.4.1 Deflecting the Failure Location from Places Where the Cost of Failure is High 91 5.4.2 Deflecting the Failure Location from Places Where the Cost of Intervention for Repair is High 92 5.4.3 Deliberate Weaknesses Deflecting the Propagation of Damage 92 5.5 Deliberate Weaknesses Designed to Provide Warning 92 5.6 Deliberate Weaknesses Designed to Provide Quick Access or Activate Protection 94 5.7 Deliberate Weaknesses and Stress Limiters 94 6 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Stochastic Separation 97 6.1 Stochastic Separation of Risk-Critical Factors 97 6.1.1 Real-Life Applications that Require Stochastic Separation 97 6.1.2 Stochastic Separation of a Fixed Number of Random Events with Different Duration Times 99 6.1.2.1 Case Study: Stochastic Separation of Consumers by Proportionally Reducing Their Demand Times 102 6.1.3 Stochastic Separation of Random Events Following a Homogeneous Poisson Process 105 6.1.3.1 Case Study: Stochastic Separation of Random Demands Following a Homogeneous Poisson Process 106 6.1.4 Stochastic Separation Based on the Probability of Overlapping of Random Events for More than a Single Source Servicing the Random Demands 106 6.1.5 Computer Simulation Algorithm Determining the Probability of Overlapping for More than a Single Source Servicing the Demands 108 6.2 Expected Time Fraction of Simultaneous Presence of Critical Events 110 6.2.1 Case Study: Expected Fraction of Unsatisfied Demand at a Constant Sum of the Time Fractions of User Demands 112 6.2.2 Case Study: Servicing Random Demands from Ten Different Users, Each Characterised by a Distinct Demand Time Fraction 114 6.3 Analytical Method for Determining the Expected Fraction of Unsatisfied Demand for Repair 114 6.3.1 Case Study: Servicing Random Repairs from a System Including Components of Three Different Types, Each Characterised by a Distinct Repair Time 115 6.4 Expected Time Fraction of Simultaneous Presence of Critical Events that have been Initiated with Specified Probabilities 116 6.4.1 Case Study: Servicing Random Demands from Patients in a Hospital 117 6.4.2 Case Study: Servicing Random Demands from Four Different Types of Users, Each Issuing a Demand with Certain Probability 118 6.5 Stochastic Separation Based on the Expected Fraction of Unsatisfied Demand 119 6.5.1 Fixed Number of Random Demands on a Time Interval 119 6.5.2 Random Demands Following a Poisson Process on a Time Interval 120 6.5.2.1 Case Study: Servicing Random Failures from Circular Knitting Machines by an Optimal Number of Repairmen 122 7 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Segmentation 125 7.1 Segmentation as a Problem-Solving Strategy 125 7.2 Creating a Modular System by Segmentation 127 7.3 Preventing Damage Accumulation and Limiting Damage Propagation by Segmentation 129 7.3.1 Creating Barriers Containing Damage 129 7.3.2 Creating Weak Interfaces Dissipating or Deflecting Damage 131 7.3.3 Reducing Deformations and Stresses by Segmentation 131 7.3.4 Reducing Hazard Potential by Segmentation 131 7.3.5 Reducing the Likelihood of Errors by Segmenting Operations 132 7.3.6 Limiting the Presence of Flaws by Segmentation 132 7.4 Improving Fault Tolerance and Reducing Vulnerability to a Single Failure by Segmentation 133 7.4.1 Case Study: Improving Fault Tolerance of a Column Loaded in Compression by Segmentation 133 7.4.2 Reducing the Vulnerability to a Single Failure by Segmentation 136 7.5 Reducing Loading Stresses by Segmentation 138 7.5.1 Improving Load Distribution by Segmentation 138 7.5.2 Improving Heat Dissipation by Segmentation 139 7.5.3 Case Study: Reducing Stress by Increasing the Perimeter to Cross-Sectional Area Ratio Through Segmentation 140 7.6 Reducing the Probability of a Loss/Error by Segmentation 142 7.6.1 Reducing the Likelihood of a Loss by Segmenting Opportunity Bets 142 7.6.1.1 Case Study: Reducing the Risk of a Loss from a Risky Prospect Involving a Single Opportunity Bet 143 7.6.2 Reducing the Likelihood of a Loss by Segmenting an Investment Portfolio 144 7.6.3 Reducing the Likelihood of Erroneous Conclusion from Imperfect Tests by Segmentation 145 7.7 Decreasing the Variation of Properties by Segmentation 146 7.8 Improved Control and Condition Monitoring by Time Segmentation 148 8 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Inversion 149 8.1 The Method of Inversion 149 8.2 Improving Reliability by Inverting Functions, Relative Position, and Motion 150 8.2.1 Case Study: Eliminating Failure Modes of an Alarm Circuit by Inversion of Functions 151 8.2.2 Improving Reliability by Inverting the Relative Position of Objects 152 8.2.2.1 Case Study: Inverting the Position of an Object with Respect to its Support to Improve Reliability 153 8.3 Improving Reliability by Inverting Properties and Geometry 155 8.3.1 Case Study: Improving Reliability by Inverting Mechanical Properties Whilst Maintaining an Invariant 155 8.3.2 Case Study: Improving Reliability by Inverting Geometry Whilst Maintaining an Invariant 156 8.4 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Introducing Inverse States 158 8.4.1 Inverse States Cancelling Anticipated Undesirable Effects 158 8.4.2 Inverse States Buffering Anticipated Undesirable Effects 159 8.4.3 Inverse States Reducing the Likelihood of an Erroneous Action 160 8.5 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Inverse Thinking 161 8.5.1 Inverting the Problem Related to Reliability Improvement and Risk Reduction 161 8.5.1.1 Case Study: Reducing the Risk of High Employee Turnover 162 8.5.2 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Inverting the Focus 163 8.5.2.1 Shifting the Focus from the Components to the System 163 8.5.2.2 Starting from the Desired Ideal End Result 163 8.5.2.3 Focusing on Events that are Missing 164 8.5.3 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Moving Backwards to Contributing Factors 164 8.5.3.1 Case Study: Identifying Failure Modes of a Lubrication System by Moving Backwards to Contributing Factors 165 8.5.4 Inverse Thinking in Mathematical Models Evaluating or Reducing Risk 166 8.5.4.1 Case Study: Using the Method of Inversion for Fast Evaluation of the Production Availability of a Complex System 167 8.5.4.2 Case Study: Repeated Inversion for Evaluating the Risk of Collision of Ships 170 9 Reliability Improvement and Risk Reduction Through Self-Reinforcement 177 9.1 Self-Reinforcement Mechanisms 177 9.2 Self-Reinforcement Relying on a Proportional Compensating Factor 179 9.2.1 Transforming Forces and Pressure into a Self-Reinforcing Response 179 9.2.1.1 Capturing a Self-Reinforcing Proportional Response from Friction Forces 179 9.2.1.2 Case Study: Transforming Friction Forces into a Proportional Response in the Design of a Friction Grip 180 9.2.1.3 Transforming Pressure into a Self-Reinforcing Response 182 9.2.1.4 Transforming Weight into a Self-Reinforcing Response 182 9.2.1.5 Transforming Moments into a Self-Reinforcing Response 182 9.2.1.6 Self-Reinforcement by Self-Balancing 183 9.2.1.7 Self-Reinforcement by Self-Anchoring 184 9.2.2 Transforming Motion into a Self-Reinforcing Response 186 9.2.3 Self-Reinforcement by Self-Alignment 186 9.2.3.1 Case Study: Self-Reinforcement by Self-Alignment of a Rectangular Panel Under Wind Pressure 187 9.2.4 Self-Reinforcement Through Modified Geometry and Strains 188 9.3 Self-Reinforcement by Feedback Loops 188 9.3.1 Self-Reinforcement by Creating Negative Feedback Loops 188 9.3.2 Positive Feedback Loops 189 9.3.3 Reducing Risk by Eliminating or Inhibiting Positive Feedback Loops with Negative Impact 190 9.3.3.1 Case Study: Growth of Damage Sustained by a Positive Feedback Loop with Negative Impact 192 9.3.4 Self-Reinforcement by Creating Positive Feedback Loops with Positive Impact 194 9.3.4.1 Case Study: Positive Feedback Loop Providing Self-Reinforcement by Self-Energising 195 10 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Minimising the Rate of Damage Accumulation and by a Substitution 197 10.1 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Minimising the Rate of Damage Accumulation 197 10.1.1 Classification of Failures Caused by Accumulation of Damage 197 10.1.2 Minimising the Rate of Damage Accumulation by Optimal Replacement 198 10.1.3 Minimising the Rate of Damage Accumulation by Selecting the Optimal Variation of the Damage-Inducing Factors 203 10.1.3.1 A Case Related to a Single Damage-Inducing Factor 203 10.1.3.2 A Case Related to Multiple Damage-Inducing Factors 206 10.1.3.3 Reducing the Rate of Damage Accumulation by Derating 209 10.1.4 Reducing the Rate of Damage Accumulation by Deliberate Weaknesses 210 10.1.5 Reducing the Rate of Damage Accumulation by Reducing Exposure to Acceleration Stresses 211 10.1.5.1 Reducing Exposure to Acceleration Stresses by Reducing the Magnitude of the Acceleration Stresses 211 10.1.5.2 Reducing Exposure to Acceleration Stresses by Modifying or Replacing the Working Environment 211 10.1.6 Reducing the Rate of Damage Accumulation by Appropriate Materials Selection, Design, and Manufacturing 212 10.2 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Substitution with Assemblies Working on Different Physical Principles 213 10.2.1 Increasing Reliability by a Substitution with Magnetic Assemblies 215 10.2.2 Increasing Reliability by a Substitution with Electrical Systems 215 10.2.3 Increasing Reliability by a Substitution with Optical Assemblies 216 10.2.4 Increasing Reliability and Reducing Risk by a Substitution with Software 217 11 Improving Reliability by Comparative Models, Permutations, and by Reducing the Time/Space Exposure 219 11.1 A Comparative Method for Improving System Reliability 219 11.1.1 Comparative Method for Improving System Reliability Based on Proving an Inequality 220 11.1.2 The Method of Biased Coins for Proving System Reliability Inequalities 221 11.1.2.1 Case Study: Comparative Method for Improving System Reliability by the Method of Biased Coins 223 11.1.3 A Comparative Method Based on Computer Simulation for Production Networks 225 11.2 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Permutations of Interchangeable Components and Processes 226 11.3 Improving Reliability and Availability by Appropriate Placement of the Condition Monitoring Equipment 229 11.4 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Reducing Time/Space Exposure 231 11.4.1 Reducing the Time of Exposure 231 11.4.2 Reducing the Space of Exposure 232 11.4.2.1 Case Study: Reducing the Risk of Failure of Wires by Simultaneously Reducing the Cost 232 11.4.2.2 Case Study: Evaluating the Risk of Failure of Components with Complex Shape 233 12 Reducing Risk by Determining the Exact Upper Bound of Uncertainty 235 12.1 Uncertainty Associated with Properties from Multiple Sources 235 12.2 Quantifying Uncertainty in the Case of Known Mixing Proportions 237 12.2.1 Variance of a Property from Multiple Sources in the Case Where the Mixing Proportions are Known 239 12.2.1.1 Case Study: Estimating the Uncertainty in Setting Positioning Distance 239 12.3 A Tight Upper Bound for the Uncertainty in the Case of Unknown Mixing Proportions 242 12.3.1 Variance Upper Bound Theorem 242 12.3.2 An Algorithm for Determining the Exact Upper Bound of the Variance of Properties from Multiple Sources 243 12.3.3 Determining the Source Whose Removal Results in the Largest Decrease of the Exact Variance Upper Bound 244 12.4 Applications of the Variance Upper Bound 245 12.4.1 Using the Variance Upper Bound for Increasing the Robustness of Products and Processes 245 12.4.2 Using the Variance Upper Bound for Increasing the Robustness of Electronic Devices 246 12.4.2.1 Case Study: Calculating the Worst-Case Variation by the Variance Upper Bound Theorem 246 12.4.3 Using the Variance Upper Bound Theorem for Delivering Conservative Designs 247 12.4.3.1 Case Study: Identifying the Distributions Associated with the Worst-Case Variation During Virtual Testing 247 12.5 Using Standard Inequalities to Obtain a Tight Upper Bound for the Uncertainty in Mechanical Properties 248 References 251 Index 261

Read more less

Book SynopsisSUSTAINABLE WATER TREATMENT: ADVANCES AND INTERVENTIONS This outstanding new volume is a compendium of reference material which will cover most of the relevant and state-of-art approaches in the field of water treatment, focusing on technological advances for water treatment in four categories: advanced oxidation technologies, nanoparticles for water treatment, membrane separations, and other emerging technologies or processes. Apart from this perspective, fundamental discussions on a wide variety of pollutants have also been included, such as acidic wastewater treatment, metallurgical wastewater, textile wastewater as well as groundwater. The editors have not only covered a wide range of water treatment techniques, but also focus on their applications, offering a holistic perspective on water treatment in general. Covering all of the latest advances, innovations, and developments in practical applications for sustainable water treatment, this volume representsTable of ContentsIntroduction xix Section I: Advanced Oxidation Processes 1 1 Advanced Oxidation Processes: Fundamental, Technologies, Applications and Recent Advances 3Akshat Khandelwal and Saroj Sundar Baral 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Background and Global Trend of Advanced Oxidation Process 5 1.3 Advanced Oxidation Systems 8 1.3.1 Ozone-Based AOP 9 1.3.2 UV/H2O2 10 1.3.3 Radiation 10 1.3.4 Fenton Reaction 12 1.3.5 Photocatalytic 13 1.3.6 Electrochemical Oxidation 14 1.4 Comparison and Challenges of AOP Technologies 15 1.5 Conclusion and Perspective 19 References 20 2 A Historical Approach for Integration of Cavitation Technology with Conventional Wastewater Treatment Processes 27Bhaskar Bethi, G. B. Radhika, Shirish H. Sonawane, Shrikant Barkade and Ravindra Gaikwad 2.1 Introduction to Cavitation for Wastewater Treatment 28 2.1.1 Mechanistic Aspects of Ultrasound Cavitation 28 2.1.2 Mechanistic Aspects of Hydrodynamic Cavitation 29 2.2 Importance of Integrating Water Treatment Technology in Present Scenario 30 2.3 Integration Ultrasound Cavitation (UC) with Conventional Treatment Techniques 31 2.3.1 Sonosorption (UC+ Adsorption) 32 2.3.2 Son-Chemical Oxidation (UC + Chemical Oxidation) 38 2.3.3 UC+Filtration 39 2.4 Integration of Hydrodynamic Cavitation (HC) with Conventional Treatment Techniques 40 2.4.1 Hydrodynamic Cavitation + Adsorption 40 2.4.2 Hydrodynamic Cavitation + Biological Oxidation 42 2.4.3 Hydrodynamic Cavitation + Chemical Treatment 43 2.5 Scale-Up Issues with Ultrasound Cavitation Process 50 2.6 Conclusion and Future Perspectives: Hydrodynamic Cavitation as a Future Technology 50 Acknowledgements 51 References 51 3 Hydrodynamic Cavitation: Route to Greener Technology for Wastewater Treatment 57Anupam Mukherjee, Ravi Teja, Aditi Mullick, Subhankar Roy, Siddhartha Moulik and Anirban Roy 3.1 Introduction 58 3.2 Cavitation: General Perspective 72 3.2.1 Phase Transition 72 3.2.2 Types of Cavitation 73 3.2.3 Hydrodynamic Cavitation 74 3.2.4 Bubble Dynamics Model 80 3.2.4.1 Rayleigh-Plesset Equation 80 3.2.4.2 Bubble Contents 80 3.2.4.3 Nonequilibrium Effects 84 3.2.5 Physio-Chemical Effects 84 3.2.5.1 Thermodynamic Effects 85 3.2.5.2 Mechanical Effects 86 3.2.5.3 Chemical Effects 87 3.2.5.4 Biological Effects 88 3.3 Hydrodynamic Cavitation Reactors 88 3.3.1 Liquid Whistle Reactors 89 3.3.2 High-Speed Homogenizers 89 3.3.3 Micro-Fluidizers 90 3.3.4 High-Pressure Homogenizers 90 3.3.5 Orifice Plates Setup 91 3.3.5.1 Effect of the Ratio of Total Perimeter to Total Flow Area 92 3.3.5.2 Effect of Flow Area to the Cross-Sectional Area of the Pipe 92 3.3.6 Venture Device Setup 92 3.3.6.1 Effect of Divergence Angle 93 3.3.6.2 Effect of the Ratio of Throat Diameter/Height to Length 94 3.3.7 Vortex-Based HC Reactor 94 3.4 Effect of Operating Parameters of HC 94 3.4.1 Effect of Inlet Pressure 94 3.4.2 Effect of Temperature 95 3.4.3 Effect of Initial Concentration of Pollutant 96 3.4.4 Effect of Treatment Time 96 3.4.5 Effect of pH 97 3.5 Toxicity Assessment 97 3.6 Techno-Economic Feasibility 100 3.7 Applications 101 3.8 Conclusions and Thoughts About the Future 102 3.9 Acknowledgement 103 3.10 Disclosure 103 Nomenclature 103 References 105 4 Recent Trends in Ozonation Technology: Theory and Application 117Anupam Mukherjee, Dror Avisar and Anirban Roy 4.1 Introduction 118 4.2 Fundamentals of Mass Transfer 119 4.3 Mass Transfer of Ozone in Water 125 4.3.1 Solubility of Ozone in Water 126 4.3.1.1 Model for Determining the True Solubility Concentration 126 4.3.2 Mass Transfer Model of Ozone in Water 128 4.3.3 Henry and Volumetric Mass Transfer Coefficient Determination 133 4.3.3.1 Microscopic Ozone Balance in the Gas Phase 134 4.3.3.2 Macroscopic Ozone Balance in the Gas Phase 134 4.3.3.3 Ozone Balance at Constant Ozone Concentrations 136 4.3.4 Single Bubble Model of Mass Transfer 137 4.3.5 Decomposition of Ozone in Water 144 4.3.6 Ozone Contactors and Energy Requirement 146 4.4 Factors Affecting Hydrodynamics and Mass Transfer in Bubble Column Reactor 147 4.4.1 Fluid Dynamics and Regime Analysis 148 4.4.2 Gas Holdup 149 4.4.3 Bubble Characteristics 149 4.4.4 Mass Transfer Coefficient 150 4.5 Application 150 4.6 Conclusion and Thoughts About the Future 158 Acknowledgement 158 Nomenclature 158 References 161 Section II: Nanoparticle-Based Treatment 171 5 Nanoparticles and Nanocomposite Materials for Water Treatment: Application in Fixed Bed Column Filter 173Chhaya, Dibyanshu, Sneha Singh and Trishikhi Raychoudhury 5.1 Introduction 174 5.2 Target Contaminants: Performance of Nanoparticles and Nanocomposite Materials 178 5.2.1 Inorganic Contaminants 178 5.2.1.1 Heavy Metals 178 5.2.1.2 Nonmetallic Contaminant 195 5.2.2 Organic Contaminant 197 5.2.2.1 Organic Dyes 197 5.2.2.2 Halogenated Hydrocarbons 202 5.2.2.3 Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbon (PAH) 203 5.2.2.4 Miscellaneous Aromatic Pollutant 221 5.2.3 Emerging Contaminants 222 5.2.3.1 Pharmaceuticals and Personal Care Products 222 5.2.3.2 Miscellaneous Compounds 225 5.3 Application of Nanoparticles and Nanocomposite Materials in Fixed Bed Column Filter for Water Treatment 226 5.3.1 Fate and Transport Process of Contaminants in the Fixed Bed Column Filter 226 5.3.2 Application of Nanoparticles and Nanocomposite Materials in Fixed Bed Column Filter 228 References 231 6 Nanomaterials for Wastewater Treatment: Potential and Barriers in Industrialization 245Snehasis Bhakta 6.1 Introduction 245 6.2 Nanomaterials in Wastewater Treatment 248 6.2.1 Nanotechnological Processes for Wastewater Treatment 249 6.2.1.1 Nanofiltration 249 6.2.1.2 Adsorption 249 6.2.1.3 Photocatalysis 249 6.2.1.4 Disinfection 250 6.2.2 Different Nanomaterials for Wastewater Treatment 250 6.2.2.1 Zerovalent Metal Nanoparticles 250 6.2.2.2 Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 251 6.2.2.3 Other Nanoparticles 252 6.3 Smart Nanomaterials: Molecularly Imprinted Polymers (MIP) 253 6.3.1 Molecularly Imprinted Polymers (MIP) 253 6.3.2 Application of MIP-Based Nanomaterials in Wastewater Treatment 254 6.3.2.1 Recognition of Pollutants 254 6.3.2.2 Removal of Pollutants 255 6.3.2.3 Catalytic Degradation of Organic Molecules 256 6.3.3 Barriers in Industrialization 257 6.4 Cheap Alternative Nanomaterials 257 6.4.1 Nanoclay for Wastewater Treatment 258 6.4.1.1 Water Filtration by Nanoclays 258 6.4.1.2 Water Treatment by Hybrid Gel 258 6.4.1.3 Nanosponges 259 6.4.2 Nanocellulose for Wastewater Treatment 259 6.4.2.1 Adsorption of Heavy Metals by Nanocellulose 260 6.4.2.2 Adsorption of Dyes by Nanocellulose 260 6.4.2.3 Barriers in Industrialization 260 6.5 Toxicity Associated with Nanotechnology in Wastewater Treatment 261 6.6 Barriers in Industrialization 262 6.7 Future Aspect and Conclusions 263 References 264 Section III: Membrane-Based Treatment 271 7 Microbial Fuel Cell Technology for Wastewater Treatment 273Nilesh Vijay Rane, Alka Kumari, Chandrakant Holkar, Dipak V. Pinjari and Aniruddha B. Pandit 7.1 Introduction 274 7.2 Microbial Fuel Cell 276 7.2.1 Working Principle 276 7.2.2 Role of MFC Components 279 7.2.3 Performance Indicator of MFC 280 7.2.4 Design Parameters 282 7.2.5 Types of Microbial Fuel Cell 283 7.3 Recent Development in MFC Component 286 7.3.1 Recent Development in Cathode Used in MFC 286 7.3.2 Recent Development in Anode Used in MFC 291 7.3.3 Recent Developments in Membranes Used in MFC 295 7.4 MFC for Wastewater Treatment 298 7.4.1 Advantages of MFC Over Conventional Treatment 299 7.4.2 Challenges in the Wastewater Treatment Using MFC 300 7.5 Different Ways for Increasing the Throughput of MFC 301 7.5.1 Big Reactor Size 301 7.5.2 Stacking 302 7.5.3 Cathode 303 7.5.4 Anode 303 7.5.5 Separating Material 304 7.5.6 Harnessing Output Energy 304 7.5.7 Increasing Long-Term Stability 305 7.5.8 Coupling of MFC with Other Techniques 305 7.6 Different Case Studies Indicating Commercial Use of MFC 306 7.7 Other Applications of MFC 310 7.8 Conclusions and Recommendations (Future Work) 311 References 313 8 Ceramic Membranes in Water Treatment: Potential and Challenges for Technology Development 325Debarati Mukherjee and Sourja Ghosh 8.1 Introduction 326 8.1.1 Background and Current State-of-the-Art 326 8.1.2 Ceramic Membranes: An Approach to Trade-Off the Bridge Between Theoretical Research and Industrial Applications 327 8.1.3 Industrial Wastewater Treatment 329 8.1.4 Domestic Wastewater Treatment 341 8.2 Treatment of Contaminated Groundwater and Drinking Water 348 8.2.1 Arsenic Contaminated Water 348 8.2.2 Treatment of Fluoride Contaminated Water 350 8.2.3 Treatment of Nitrate Contaminated Water 351 8.2.4 Treatment of Water Spiked with Emerging Contaminants 352 8.2.5 Treatment of Water Contaminated with Pathogens 354 8.3 Classification of Filtration Based on Configuration 357 8.3.1 Direct Membrane Filtration 357 8.3.2 Hybrid Approaches 360 8.4 Pilot-Scale Studies 368 8.5 Challenges of Ceramic Membranes 369 8.6 Conclusion and Future Scope of Ceramic Membranes 370 References 371 9 Membrane Distillation for Acidic Wastewater Treatment 383Sarita Kalla, Rakesh Baghel, Sushant Upadhyaya and Kailash Singh 9.1 Introduction 383 9.2 Membrane Distillation and Its Configurations 384 9.3 Sources of Acidic Effluent 385 9.4 Applications of MD for Acidic Wastewater Treatment 387 9.5 Hybrid MD Process 388 9.6 Implications 395 References 395 10 Demonstration of Long-Term Assessment on Performance of VMD for Textile Wastewater Treatment 401Rakesh Baghel, Sarita Kalla, Sushant Upadhyaya and S. P. Chaurasia 10.1 Introduction 401 10.2 Transport Mechanism 403 10.3 Impact of Process Variables on Permeate Flux 405 10.4 Long-Term Performance Analysis of VMD 408 10.5 Scale Formation in Long-Term Assessment 411 Conclusion 412 Nomenclature 412 Greek Symbols 413 References 413 Section IV: Emerging Technologies & Processes 415 11 Application of Zero Valent Iron to Removal Chromium and Other Heavy Metals in Metallurgical Wastewater 417Khac-Uan Do, Thi-Lien Le and Thuy-Lan Nguyen 11.1 Introduction 418 11.1.1 Wastewater Sources from Metallurgical Factories 418 11.1.2 Characteristics of Wastewater in Metallurgical Factories 419 11.1.3 Conventional Technologies for Treating Wastewater in Metallurgical Factories 420 11.1.4 Zero Valent Iron for Removing Heavy Metals 422 11.1.5 Objectives of the Study 422 11.2 Materials and Methods 423 11.2.1 Metallurgical Wastewater 423 11.2.2 Preparation of Zero Valent Iron 424 11.2.3 Batch Experiments 424 11.2.4 Analysis Methods 425 11.3 Results and Discussion 428 11.3.1 Effects of pH on Hexavalent Chromium Removal 428 11.3.2 Effects of Feo on Hexavalent Chromium Removal 430 11.3.3 Effects of Contact Time on Hexavalent Chromium Removal 431 11.3.4 Effects of pH on Heavy Metals Removal 432 11.3.5 Effects of PAC on Heavy Metals Removal 433 11.3.6 Effects of PAM on Heavy Metals Removal 434 11.4 Conclusion 435 Acknowledgements 436 References 436 12 Removal of Arsenic and Fluoride from Water Using Novel Technologies 441Ishita Sarkar, Sankha Chakrabortty, Jayato Nayak and Parimal Pal 12.1 Background Study of Arsenic 442 12.1.1 Source and Existence of Arsenic 442 12.1.2 Effects of Arsenic 443 12.1.3 Regulation and Permissible Limit of Arsenic in Drinking Water 444 12.2 Background Study of Fluoride 445 12.2.1 Source and Existence of Fluoride 445 12.2.2 Effects of Fluoride 445 12.2.3 Regulation and Permissible Limit of Fluoride in Drinking Water 446 12.3 Technologies Used for Arsenic Removal from Contaminated Groundwater 447 12.3.1 Oxidation Method 447 12.3.2 Coagulation-Precipitation Method 450 12.3.3 Ion-Exchange Method 450 12.3.4 Adsorption Method 451 12.4 Technologies for Fluoride Removal from Contaminated Groundwater 456 12.4.1 Coagulation-Precipitation Method 456 12.4.2 Nalgonda Technique 456 12.4.3 Adsorption Method 458 12.4.4 Ion-Exchange Method 458 12.5 Membrane Technology Used for Arsenic and Fluoride Mitigations 460 12.5.1 Introduction of Membrane Technology 460 12.5.2 Arsenic Removal by Membrane Filtration 462 12.5.2.1 Arsenic Removal by Microfiltration System 462 12.5.2.2 Arsenic Removal by Ultrafiltration System 464 12.5.2.3 Arsenic Removal by Nanofiltration System 466 12.5.2.4 Arsenic Removal by Other Membrane-Based Process 472 12.5.3 Fluoride Removal by Different Membrane Filtration System 475 References 480 13 A Zero Liquid Discharge Strategy with MSF Coupled with Crystallizer 487Jasneet Kaur Pala, Siddhartha Moulik, Asim K. Ghosh, Reddi Kamesh and Anirban Roy 13.1 Introduction 488 13.2 Minimum Energy Required for Desalination Process 490 13.2.1 Minimum Work Requirement 492 13.2.2 Recovery Ratio 494 13.3 Methodology and Simulation 494 13.3.1 MSF Process Description 494 13.3.2 Crystallizer Process Description 495 13.3.3 Modeling and Simulation 496 13.3.4 Input Parameters 501 13.4 Results and Discussion 504 13.4.1 Comparison of Energy Demand Between Simulated Model and Theoretical Model 504 13.4.2 Impact of Temperature and Flowrate on Thermal Energy 507 13.4.3 Impact on Thermal Energy During MLD and ZLD 507 13.4.4 Crystallization of Salts 511 13.5 Conclusion 511 13.6 Acknowledgment 512 References 512 14 A Critical Review on Prospects and Challenges in “Conceptualization to Technology Transfer” for Nutrient Recovery from Municipal Wastewater 517Shubham Lanjewar, Birupakshya Mishra, Anupam Mukherjee, Aditi Mullick, Siddhartha Moulik and Anirban Roy 14.1 Introduction 518 14.2 Chemical Processes for Resources Recovery 520 14.2.1 Chemical Precipitation 521 14.2.1.1 Magnesium and Calcium – Phosphorous Precipitation 521 14.2.1.2 Aluminum – Phosphorous Precipitation 522 14.2.1.3 Ferric – Phosphorous Precipitation 523 14.2.2 Adsorption and Ion-Exchange 524 14.3 Biological Processes for Resources Recovery 528 14.3.1 Anammox Process for Nutrients Recovery 529 14.3.2 Algal Methods for Sewage Treatment and Nutrient Recovery 530 14.3.2.1 Nutrients Recovery from Micro-Algae Growth 530 14.3.2.2 Nutrients Recovery from Wetland Plants Growth 533 14.4 Membrane-Based Hybrid Technologies for Nutrients, Energy, and Water Recovery 534 14.4.1 Membrane Based Nutrients Recovery 534 14.4.2 Bio Electrochemical Systems (BES) for Resources Recovery 537 14.4.3 Nutrients Recovery via Osmotic Membrane Bioreactor 544 14.4.4 Economics and Feasibility of Processes 545 14.5 Conclusion 551 Acknowledgements 551 Disclosure 551 References 551 15 Sustainable Desalination: Future Scope in Indian Subcontinent 567Rudra Rath, Asim K. Ghosh and Anirban Roy 15.1 Introduction 567 15.2 Water Supply and Demand in India 568 15.3 Current Status of Desalination in India 571 15.4 Commercially Available Technologies 572 15.4.1 Reverse Osmosis (RO) 572 15.4.2 Electrodialysis (ED) 573 15.4.3 Membrane Capacitive Deionization (MCDI) 574 15.4.4 Thermal Desalination 574 15.5 Possible Technological Intervention 576 15.5.1 Solar Desalination 576 15.5.1.1 Solar Stills 577 15.5.1.2 Photovoltaic (PV) Powered Desalination in India 579 15.5.2 Wave Power Desalination 580 15.5.3 Geothermal Desalination 580 15.5.4 Low-Temperature Thermal Desalination (LTTD) 580 15.5.5 Membrane Distillation (MD) 581 15.5.6 Forward Osmosis (FO) 582 15.6 Challenges and Implementation Strategies for Sustainable Use of Desalination Technologies 583 References 584 16 Desalination: Thermodynamic Modeling and Energetics 591Shubham Lanjewar, Ridhish Kumar, Kunal Roy, Rudra Rath, Anupam Mukherjee and Anirban Roy 16.1 Introduction 592 16.2 Thermodynamics Modeling of Desalination 593 16.2.1 Electrolyte Solutions 594 16.2.2 Generalized Minimum Work of Separation 596 16.2.2.1 Mass Basis 597 16.2.2.2 Mole Basis 598 16.3 Modeling of Major Thermal Desalination Techniques 599 16.3.1 A General Multi-Effect Distillation (MED) Process Configuration for Desalination 601 16.3.1.1 Steady State Process Model of a MED System 601 16.3.1.2 Performance Parameters Analysis 606 16.3.2 A General Process Configuration of Multi-Stage Flash (MSF) Desalination 607 16.3.2.1 Steady State Process Model of an MSF System 608 16.3.3 A General Process Configuration of Mechanical Vapor Compression (MVC) Desalination 612 16.3.3.1 Steady State Process Model of an MVC System 613 16.4 Advantage of RO Above Other Mentioned Technologies 615 16.4.1 Advantages of RO Process 616 16.4.2 Energy Requirement in Desalination by an Evaporation Technique 617 16.4.3 Energy Requirements for Desalination by Reversible RO Process 617 16.4.4 Energy Analysis of Different Desalination Techniques 619 16.4.5 Economic Analysis of Different Desalination Techniques 620 16.5 Exergy Analysis of Reverse Osmosis 623 16.5.1 General Exergy Analysis in Desalination and Its Necessity 625 16.5.1.1 Exergy Efficiency and Its Improvement Potential Analysis 628 16.5.2 A Case Study on Reverse Osmosis Based Desalination Unit Reporting Exergy Performance 630 16.6 Conclusion 631 Nomenclature 632 References 636 Index 643

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith climate change, erosion, and human encroachment on coastal environments growing all over the world, it is increasingly important to protect populations and environments close to the sea from storms, tsunamis, and other events that can be not just costly to property but deadly. This book is one step in bringing the science of protection from these events forward, the most in-depth study of its kind ever published. The analytic and numerical modeling problems of nonlinear wave activities in shallow water are analyzed in this work. Using the author''s unique method described herein, the equations of shallow water are solved, and asymmetries that cannot be described by the Stokes theory are solved. Based on analytical expressions, the impacts of dispersion effects to wave profiles transformation are taken into account. The 3D models of the distribution and refraction of nonlinear surface gravity wave at the various coast formations are introduced, as well. The work coTable of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix 1 Equations of Hydrodynamics 1 1.1 Features of the Problems in the Formulation of Mathematical Physics 1 1.2 Classification of Linear Differential Equations with Partial Derivatives of the Second Order 3 1.3 Nonlinear Equations of Fluid Dynamics 5 1.4 Methods for Solving Nonlinear Equations 9 1.5 The Basic Laws of Hydrodynamics of an Ideal Fluid 11 1.6 Linear Equations of Hydrodynamic Waves 16 Conclusions 20 2 Modeling of Wave Phenomena on the Shallow Water Surface 23 2.1 Waves on the Sea Surface 23 2.2 Review of Research on Surface Gravity Waves 26 2.3 Investigation of Surface Gravity Waves 39 2.4 Spatial modeling of Wave Phenomena on Shallow Water Surface 50 2.5 Actual Observations of Wave Phenomena on the Surface of Shallow Water 57 2.6 Ship Waves. “Reactive” Ducks of the Alexander Garden 58 Conclusions 64 3 Modeling of Nonlinear Surface Gravity Waves in Shallow Water 65 3.1 Overview of Studies on Nonlinear Surface Gravity Waves in Shallow Water 65 3.2 Nonlinear Models of Surface Gravity Waves in Shallow Water 74 3.3 Solution of the Nonlinear Shallow Water Equation by the Method of Successive Approximations 81 3.4 Modeling the Propagation of Nonlinear Surface Gravity Waves in Shallow Water 86 3.5 Modeling the Refraction of Nonlinear Surface Gravity Waves 99 3.6 Modeling of Propagation and Refraction of Nonlinear Surface Gravity Waves Under Shallow Water Conditions with Account of Dispersion 109 Conclusions 117 4 Numerical Simulation of Nonlinear Surface Gravity Waves in Shallow Water 119 4.1 Review of Studies on Computational Modeling of Surface Waves 119 4.2 Statement of the Problem 132 4.3 The Research of a Discrete Model 138 4.4 Results of Numerical Modeling based on Shallow Water Equations 139 4.5 Discussion and Comparison of Results 148 Conclusions 152 5 Two-Dimensional Numerical Simulation of the Run-Up of Nonlinear Surface Gravity Waves 155 5.1 Statement of the Problem 155 5.2 Construction of a Discrete Finite-Volume Model 160 5.3 Discrete Model Research 169 5.4 Results of Two-Dimensional Numerical Modeling and Their Analysis 171 5.5 Discussion and Comparison of Results 185 Conclusions 188 6 Three-Dimensional Numerical Modeling of the Runup of Nonlinear Surface Gravity Waves 191 6.1 Statement of the Problem. Boundary and Initial Conditions 191 6.2 Construction of a Discrete Model 195 6.3 The Construction of a Discrete Finite-Volume Model 206 6.4 Discrete Model Research 229 6.5 Results of Three-Dimensional Numerical Modeling and Their Analysis 230 6.6 Discussion and Comparison of Results 241 Conclusions 242 Conclusion 245 References 24

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis groundbreaking book covers the recent advances in sustainable technologies and developments, and describes how green chemistry and engineering practices are being applied and integrated in various industrial sectors. Over the past decade, the population explosion, rise in global warming, depletion of fossil fuel resources and environmental pollution have been the major driving force for promoting and implementing the principles of green chemistry and sustainable engineering in all sectors ranging from chemical to environmental sciences. It plays a growing role in the chemical processing industries. Green chemistry and engineering are relatively new areas focused on minimizing generations of pollution by utilizing alternative feedstocks, developing, selecting, and using less environmentally harmful solvents, finding new synthesis pathways, improving selectivity in reactions, generating less waste, avoiding the use of highly toxic compounds, and much more. In

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a clear and comprehensive guide to the 2017 FIDIC contractswritten by a member of the FIDIC Updates Task Group FIDIC contracts are the most widely used engineering standard form contracts internationally but until 2017 the three main forms (the Red, Yellow and Silver Books) had not been amended or updated for nearly two decades, since the first editions were published in 1999. Written by a specialist lawyer who was member of the FIDIC Updates Task Group responsible for writing the new contracts, this book examines in detail the many substantial changes they have introduced. After providing an overview the contracts are examined clause by clause with the aim of showing how each compares and contrasts with the others and how the second editions compare and contrast with the first. The first chapter describes how the Red, Yellow and Silver Books evolved from earlier contract forms and the distinctive characteristics of each, before providing an overview of the updates, includingTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv About the Author xvii 1 Overview of the 2017 Contracts 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The Rainbow Suite: The Main Features of the 1999 Red, Yellow and Silver Books 2 1.2.1 The 1999 Red Book 2 1.2.2 The 1999 Yellow Book 4 1.2.3 The 1999 Silver Book 5 1.3 Contractor Risk in the Silver Book: Two Examples 7 1.3.1 Unforeseeable Difficulties 7 1.3.2 Errors in Employer’s Requirements 7 1.4 New Potential Risks for Contractor and Employer in the 2017 Books 8 1.4.1 Contractor Risks 8 1.4.2 Employer Risks 10 1.5 FIDIC’s Guidance for the Preparation of Particular Conditions 13 1.5.1 The Contract Data 13 1.5.2 The Special Provisions 13 1.5.3 Golden Principles 14 1.5.4 Tender Documents 14 1.5.5 Drafting Options 14 1.5.6 Building Information Modelling 15 1.6 Forms 15 2 Key General Provisions 17 2.1 Definitions 17 2.2 Notices and Other Communications 17 2.3 Law and Language 18 2.3.1 Governing Law 18 2.3.2 Language of the Contract/Communications 19 2.4 Priority of Documents 19 2.5 Errors in the Employer’s Requirements/Delayed Drawings and Instructions 20 2.5.1 Errors in Employer’s Requirements: Yellow Book Clause 1.9 20 2.5.2 Delayed Drawings and Instructions 21 2.6 Use of Documents 21 2.7 Compliance with Laws 22 2.8 Limitation of Liability 23 2.8.1 Indirect or Consequential Loss or Damage 23 2.8.2 Cap on Contractor’s Total Liability 25 2.9 Contract Termination: Clause 1.16 Red and Yellow Books/1.15 Silver Book 26 3 The Employer, the Engineer and Contract Administration 27 3.1 The Employer 27 3.1.1 Right of Access to Site 27 3.1.2 Assistance 28 3.1.3 Employer’s Personnel and Other Contractors 28 3.1.4 Employer’s Financial Arrangements 28 3.1.5 Site Data and Items of Reference 29 3.1.6 Employer-supplied Materials and Employer’s Equipment 29 3.2 The Engineer/Employer’s Administration 29 3.2.1 Contract Administration in the Three Books: Engineer’s/Employer’s Representative’s Role and Authority 30 3.2.2 Instructions 32 3.2.3 Instructions: The 2017 Provisions 33 3.2.4 Where the Instruction Does Not State that it is a Variation 33 3.2.5 Clause 3.5/3.4 Sub-paragraph (a) 34 3.2.6 Clause 3.5/3.4 Sub-paragraph (b) 35 3.3 Agreement or Determination 35 3.3.1 Consultation 35 3.3.2 Engineer’s Determination 36 3.3.3 Time Limits 36 3.3.4 Effect of Agreement or Determination 37 3.3.5 Dissatisfaction with Engineer’s Determination 38 3.4 Meetings 39 4 The Contractor and Fitness for Purpose 41 4.1 Contractor’s General Obligations 41 4.1.1 Yellow and Silver Books 41 4.1.2 Red Book 41 4.1.3 ‘Fitness for Purpose’ 42 4.1.4 Other General Obligations 45 4.2 Contractor to Provide Performance Security 45 4.3 Contractor’s Representative 47 4.4 Subcontractors 47 4.5 Nominated Subcontractors 48 4.6 Contractor’s Documents: The 2017 Red Book 49 4.7 Cooperation 50 4.8 Quality Management and Compliance Verification Systems 50 4.8.1 Quality Management System 51 4.8.2 Compliance Verification 51 4.9 Use of Site Data 52 4.10 Unforeseeable Difficulties/Physical Conditions 53 4.10.1 Unforeseeable Physical Conditions: Procedure 54 4.11 Other Contractor’s Obligations 55 5 Design 57 5.1 Contractor’s General Design Obligations 57 5.1.1 Silver Book: Errors in Employer’s Requirements 57 5.1.2 Silver Book: Designs by Employer 58 5.1.3 Silver Book: Design Personnel 58 5.1.4 Yellow Book: Errors in Employer’s Requirements 59 5.1.5 Yellow Book: Designs by Employer 61 5.1.6 Yellow Book: Design Personnel 61 5.2 Contractor’s Documents: 2017 Yellow and Silver Books 62 5.3 Other Design-related Provisions 63 6 Plant, Materials and Workmanship/Staff and Labour 65 6.1 Staff and Labour 65 6.2 Plant, Materials and Workmanship 65 6.2.1 Execution, Samples and Inspection 67 6.2.2 Testing by the Contractor 67 6.2.3 Defects and Rejection 68 6.2.4 Remedial Work 69 6.2.5 Ownership of Plant and Materials/Royalties 69 7 Commencement, Delays and Extensions of Time, and Employer’s Suspension of the Works 71 7.1 Commencement 71 7.2 Time for Completion 72 7.3 The Programme 72 7.3.1 Contents of the Initial and any Revised Programme 73 7.3.2 Other Provisions: Clause 8.3 76 7.4 Advance Warning 76 7.5 Extensions of Time 77 7.5.1 Yellow and Red Books 77 7.5.2 Silver Book 78 7.5.3 Completion 79 7.6 The Specified Causes of Delay to Completion 80 7.6.1 Variations 80 7.6.2 A Cause of Delay Giving an Entitlement to an Extension Under Another Clause 82 7.6.3 Exceptionally Adverse Climatic Conditions: Red and Yellow Books 82 7.6.4 Unforeseeable Shortages 82 7.6.5 Delays, Impediments or Preventions Caused by or Attributable to the Employer 83 7.7 Concurrent Causes 83 7.8 Delay Damages 85 7.8.1 Clause 8.8: First Paragraph 85 7.8.2 Clause 8.8: Second and Third Paragraphs 89 7.8.3 Other Delay-related Provisions 89 7.9 Employer’s Suspension of theWorks 90 7.9.1 Right to Instruct Suspension 90 7.9.2 Effects of Suspension 90 7.9.3 Payment for Plant and Materials After Suspension: Clause 8.11 90 7.9.4 Prolonged Suspension: Clause 8.12 91 7.9.5 Instruction to ResumeWork: Clause 8.13 91 8 Testing on and After Completion and Employer’s Taking Over 93 8.1 Testing on Completion 94 8.1.1 Contractor’s Obligations 94 8.1.2 Delayed Tests 95 8.1.3 Retesting 95 8.1.4 Failure to Pass Tests on Completion 95 8.2 Employer’s Taking Over 97 8.2.1 The 1999 Contracts 97 8.2.2 The 2017 Yellow Book 97 8.2.3 The 2017 Red and Silver Books 98 8.2.4 Procedure Under Clause 10.1 99 8.2.5 Wording of the Deeming Provision 100 8.2.6 Taking Over of Parts: Clause 10.2 101 8.2.7 Other Clause 10 Provisions 101 8.3 Tests After Completion 102 8.3.1 The Yellow Book 102 8.3.2 The Silver Book 104 9 Defects After Taking Over, Acceptance of the Works and Unfulfilled Obligations 107 9.1 Contractor’s Basic Obligation 107 9.2 Who is Responsible for the Cost? 108 9.3 Extending the DNP 108 9.4 Other Obligations 109 9.5 Performance Certificate 110 9.6 Unfulfilled Obligations 110 10 Measurement, the Price and Payment 113 10.1 Measurement and Valuation: Clause 12 of the 2017 Red Book 113 10.1.1 Measurement Procedures 113 10.1.2 Method of Measurement 114 10.1.3 Valuation 114 10.1.4 Omissions 115 10.2 The Contract Price 115 10.2.1 Yellow Book 115 10.2.2 Red Book 116 10.2.3 Silver Book 116 10.3 Advance Payment 117 10.4 Plant and Materials Intended for the Works 117 10.5 The Payment Process 118 10.5.1 Interim Payments 119 10.5.2 Statement at Completion 122 10.5.3 Final Statement 123 10.5.4 Discharge 124 10.5.5 Issue of Final Payment Certificate/Final Payment 124 10.5.6 Payment 126 10.5.7 Delayed Payment 127 10.6 Cessation of Employer’s Liability 127 11 Variations and Adjustments to the Contract Price 129 11.1 Variations 129 11.1.1 Meaning of ‘Variation’ 129 11.1.2 The Right to Vary: Omitting Works to Be Carried out by Others 130 11.1.3 Contractor’s Objections to a Variation 131 11.1.4 Engineer/Employer’s Response 133 11.2 Value Engineering 134 11.2.1 The 1999 Editions 134 11.2.2 The 2017 Books 134 11.3 Variation Procedure 135 11.3.1 Variation by Instruction: Clause 13.3.1 135 11.3.2 Variation by Request for Proposal: Clause 13.3.2 138 11.3.3 New Applications of the Variation Procedure 139 11.4 Other Adjustments to the Contract Price 140 11.4.1 Adjustments for Changes in Laws 140 11.4.2 Adjustments for Changes in Cost 141 12 Termination and Suspension 143 12.1 Employer Termination: For Contractor Default 144 12.1.1 The Grounds of Termination: Clause 15.2, 1999 Editions 145 12.1.2 The Termination Procedure Under Clause 15.2, 1999 Editions 147 12.1.3 Valuation and Payment After a Clause 15.2 Termination 147 12.1.4 The Grounds of Termination: Clause 15.2.1, 2017 Editions 149 12.1.5 Termination: Clause 15.2.2, 2017 Editions 151 12.1.6 Termination Procedure Under Clauses 15.2.3 and 15.2.4, 2017 Editions 151 12.1.7 Valuation and Payment After a Clause 15.2 Termination 151 12.2 Employer’s Termination: For Convenience 152 12.2.1 Clause 15.5, 2017 Editions 153 12.2.2 Clauses 15.6 and 15.17, 2017 Editions 154 12.3 Contractor’s Right to Suspend 154 12.4 Contractor’s Termination 155 12.4.1 The Grounds of Termination: Clause 16.2, 1999 Editions 156 12.4.2 Termination Under Clause 16.2, 1999 Editions 158 12.4.3 Effects of Termination and Payment 158 12.4.4 The Grounds of Termination Under Clause 16.2.1, 2017 Editions 159 12.4.5 Termination Under Clause 16.2, 2017 Editions 160 12.4.6 Contractor’s Obligations After Termination 161 12.4.7 Payment After Contractor’s Termination 161 13 Care of the Works, Indemnities and Insurance 163 13.1 Care of the Works 163 13.1.1 Clause 17.1: Responsibility for Care of the Works 163 13.1.2 Clause 17.2: Liability for Care of the Works 164 13.1.3 The Clause 17.2 Events 165 13.1.4 Consequences of a Clause 17.2 Event 167 13.1.5 Combined Causes 168 13.2 Indemnities 168 13.2.1 Indemnities by Contractor: 2017 Yellow and Silver Books 168 13.2.2 Indemnities by Contractor: 2017 Red Book 170 13.2.3 Indemnities by Employer 170 13.2.4 Shared Indemnities 171 13.3 Intellectual and Industrial Property Rights 171 13.4 Insurance 172 13.4.1 The 2017 Books 172 13.4.2 The Works: Clause 19.2.1 172 13.4.3 Goods: Clause 19.2.2 173 13.4.4 Liability for Breach of Professional Duty: Clause 19.2.3 173 13.4.5 Injury to Persons and Damage to Property: Clause 19.2.4 173 13.4.6 Injury to Employees: Clause 19.2.5 174 13.4.7 Other Insurances Required by the Applicable Law and by Local Practice: Clause 19.2.6 174 14 Exceptional Events 175 14.1 Examples of Exceptional Events 175 14.2 Notice Requirements 176 14.3 Duty to Minimise Delay 176 14.4 Consequences of an Exceptional Event 177 14.5 Optional Termination 178 14.6 Release from Performance Under the Applicable Law 178 15 Employers’ and Contractors’ Claims 181 15.1 The Categories of Claim: Clause 20.1 181 15.2 Claims for Money and/or Time 182 15.2.1 The Notice of Claim: Clause 20.2.1 183 15.2.2 The Clause 20.2.1 Time Bar 183 15.2.3 Initial Response to the Claim: Clause 20.2.2 184 15.2.4 Contemporaneous Records: Clause 20.2.3 185 15.2.5 The Fully Detailed Claim: Clause 20.2.4 185 15.2.6 The Clause 20.2.4 Time Bar 186 15.2.7 Agreement or Determination of the Claim: Clause 20.2.5 187 15.2.8 Comparison with 1999 Forms 188 15.2.9 Agreeing or Determining Time Bar Issues 189 15.2.10 Other Time Bars Affecting the Claim 190 15.2.11 The Time Bars: Summary 190 15.2.12 Further Details 191 15.2.13 Claims of Continuing Effect: Clause 20.2.6 192 15.3 General Requirements: Clause 20.2.7 192 16 Dispute Resolution 195 16.1 TheThree-tier Process in the 1999 Contracts 196 16.2 The 2017 Contracts 196 16.2.1 Disputes 197 16.2.2 Procedure for Obtaining the DAAB’s Decision 197 16.2.3 Referring the Dispute: Clause 21.4.1 198 16.2.4 Parties’ Obligations After Dispute Referred: Clause 21.4.2 198 16.2.5 The DAAB’s Decision: Clause 21.4.3 198 16.2.6 Dissatisfaction with the DAAB’s Decision: Clause 21.4.4 199 16.3 Appointment of the DAAB 201 16.3.1 Sole Member or Three 202 16.3.2 The DAAB Agreement and DAAB Procedural Rules 203 16.4 Failure to Appoint DAAB Members 204 16.5 Avoidance of Disputes 204 16.6 Amicable Settlement 205 16.7 Arbitration 206 16.7.1 Party Commencing Arbitration 206 16.7.2 Time for Commencing an Arbitration 207 16.7.3 Choice of Arbitration 207 16.7.4 ICC Arbitration 208 16.7.5 The Tribunal’s Powers 209 16.7.6 Payment of Sums Awarded 210 16.7.7 Costs 210 16.8 Failure to Comply with the DAAB’s Decision 210 Index 213

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscover the extraordinary progress that welding metallurgy has experienced over the last two decades Welding Metallurgy, 3rd Edition is the only complete compendium of recent, and not-so-recent, developments in the science and practice of welding metallurgy. Written by Dr. Sindo Kou, this edition covers solid-state welding as well as fusion welding, which now also includes resistance spot welding. It restructures and expands sections on Fusion Zones and Heat-Affected Zones. The former now includes entirely new chapters on microsegregation, macrosegregation, ductility-dip cracking, and alloys resistant to creep, wear and corrosion, as well as a new section on ternary-alloy solidification. The latter now includes metallurgy of solid-state welding. Partially Melted Zones are expanded to include liquation and cracking in friction stir welding and resistance spot welding. New chapters on topics of high current interest are added, including additive manufaTable of ContentsPreface to Third Edition xxi Part I Introduction 1 1 Welding Processes 3 1.1 Overview 3 1.1.1 Fusion Welding Processes 3 1.1.1.1 Power Density of Heat Source 4 1.1.1.2 Welding Processes and Materials 5 1.1.1.3 Types of Joints and Welding Positions 7 1.1.2 Solid-State Welding Processes 8 1.2 Gas Welding 8 1.2.1 The Process 8 1.2.2 Three Types of Flames 9 1.2.2.1 Neutral Flame 9 1.2.2.2 Reducing Flame 9 1.2.2.3 Oxidizing Flame 9 1.2.3 Advantages and Disadvantages 10 1.3 Arc Welding 10 1.3.1 Shielded Metal Arc Welding 10 1.3.1.1 Functions of Electrode Covering 10 1.3.1.2 Advantages and Disadvantages 11 1.3.2 Gas–Tungsten Arc Welding 11 1.3.2.1 The Process 11 1.3.2.2 Polarity 12 1.3.2.3 Electrodes 13 1.3.2.4 Shielding Gases 13 1.3.2.5 Advantages and Disadvantages 13 1.3.3 Plasma Arc Welding 14 1.3.3.1 The Process 14 1.3.3.2 Arc Initiation 14 1.3.3.3 Keyholing 15 1.3.3.4 Advantages and Disadvantages 15 1.3.4 Gas–Metal Arc Welding 16 1.3.4.1 The Process 16 1.3.4.2 Shielding Gases 16 1.3.4.3 Modes of Metal Transfer 17 1.3.4.4 Advantages and Disadvantages 18 1.3.5 Flux-Cored Arc Welding 18 1.3.5.1 The Process 18 1.3.6 Submerged Arc Welding 19 1.3.6.1 The Process 19 1.3.6.2 Advantages and Disadvantages 20 1.3.7 Electroslag Welding 20 1.3.7.1 The Process 20 1.3.7.2 Advantages and Disadvantages 21 1.4 High-Energy-Beam Welding 21 1.4.1 Electron Beam Welding 21 1.4.1.1 The Process 21 1.4.1.2 Advantages and Disadvantages 23 1.4.2 Laser Beam Welding 24 1.4.2.1 The Process 24 1.4.2.2 Reflectivity 24 1.4.2.3 Shielding Gas 25 1.4.2.4 Laser-Assisted Arc Welding 25 1.4.2.5 Advantages and Disadvantages 26 1.5 Resistance Spot Welding 26 1.6 Solid-State Welding 27 1.6.1 Friction Stir Welding 27 1.6.2 Friction Welding 29 1.6.3 Explosion and Magnetic-Pulse Welding 31 1.6.4 Diffusion Welding 31 Examples 32 References 33 Further Reading 34 Problems 35 2 Heat Flow in Welding 37 2.1 Heat Source 37 2.1.1 Heat Source Efficiency 37 2.1.1.1 Definition 37 2.1.1.2 Measurements 38 2.1.1.3 Heat Source Efficiencies in Various Welding Processes 41 2.1.2 Melting Efficiency 42 2.1.3 Power Density Distribution of Heat Source 43 2.1.3.1 Effect of Electrode Tip Angle 43 2.1.3.2 Measurements 43 2.2 Heat Flow During Welding 45 2.2.1 Response of Material to Welding Heat Source 45 2.2.2 Rosenthal’s Equations 45 2.2.2.1 Rosenthal’s Two-Dimensional Equation 46 2.2.2.2 Rosenthal’s Three-Dimensional Equation 47 2.2.2.3 Step-by-Step Application of Rosenthal’s Equations 48 2.2.3 Adams’ Equations 49 2.3 Effect of Welding Conditions 49 2.4 Computer Simulation 52 2.5 Weld Thermal Simulator 53 2.5.1 The Equipment 53 2.5.2 Applications 54 2.5.3 Limitations 54 Examples 54 References 57 Further Reading 59 Problems 59 3 Fluid Flow in Welding 61 3.1 Fluid Flow in Arcs 61 3.1.1 Sharp Electrode 61 3.1.2 Flat-End Electrode 63 3.2 Effect of Metal Vapor on Arcs 63 3.2.1 Gas−Tungsten Arc Welding 63 3.2.2 Gas−Metal Arc Welding 65 3.3 Arc Power- and Current-Density Distributions 68 3.4 Fluid Flow in Weld Pools 69 3.4.1 Driving Forces for Fluid Flow 69 3.4.2 Heiple’s Theory for Weld Pool Convection 71 3.4.3 Physical Simulation of Fluid Flow and Weld Penetration 72 3.4.4 Computer Simulation of Fluid Flow and Weld Penetration 75 3.5 Flow Oscillation and Ripple Formation 77 3.6 Active Flux GTAW 80 3.7 Resistance Spot Welding 81 Examples 84 References 85 Further Reading 88 Problems 88 4 Mass and Filler–Metal Transfer 91 4.1 Convective Mass Transfer in Weld Pools 91 4.2 Evaporation of Volatile Solutes 94 4.3 Filler-Metal Drop Explosion and Spatter 96 4.4 Spatter in GMAW of Magnesium 100 4.5 Diffusion Bonding 100 Examples 103 References 104 Problems 105 5 Chemical Reactions in Welding 107 5.1 Overview 107 5.1.1 Effect of Nitrogen, Oxygen, and Hydrogen 107 5.1.2 Protection Against Air 107 5.1.3 Evaluation of Weld Metal Properties 108 5.2 Gas–Metal Reactions 111 5.2.1 Thermodynamics of Reactions 111 5.2.2 Hydrogen 113 5.2.2.1 Magnesium 113 5.2.2.2 Aluminum 113 5.2.2.3 Titanium 116 5.2.2.4 Copper 116 5.2.2.5 Steels 116 5.2.3 Nitrogen 118 5.2.3.1 Steel 118 5.2.3.2 Titanium 121 5.2.4 Oxygen 121 5.2.4.1 Magnesium 121 5.2.4.2 Aluminum 121 5.2.4.3 Titanium 121 5.2.4.4 Steel 122 5.3 Slag–Metal Reactions 125 5.3.1 Thermochemical Reactions 125 5.3.1.1 Decomposition of Flux 125 5.3.1.2 Removal of S and P from Liquid Steel 126 5.3.2 Effect of Flux on Weld Metal Oxygen 127 5.3.3 Types of Fluxes, Basicity Index, and Weld Metal Properties 127 5.3.4 Basicity Index 128 5.3.5 Electrochemical Reactions 130 Examples 135 References 136 Further Reading 140 Problems 140 6 Residual Stresses, Distortion, and Fatigue 141 6.1 Residual Stresses 141 6.1.1 Development of Residual Stresses 141 6.1.1.1 Stresses Induced By Welding 141 6.1.1.2 Welding 141 6.1.2 Analysis of Residual Stresses 143 6.2 Distortion 145 6.2.1 Cause 145 6.2.2 Remedies 146 6.3 Fatigue 147 6.3.1 Mechanism 147 6.3.2 Fractography 147 6.3.3 S–N Curves 150 6.3.4 Effect of Joint Geometry 150 6.3.5 Effect of Stress Raisers 151 6.3.6 Effect of Corrosion 152 6.3.7 Remedies 152 6.3.7.1 Shot Peening 152 6.3.7.2 Reducing Stress Raisers 153 6.3.7.3 Laser Shock Peening 154 6.3.7.4 Use of Low–Transformation–Temperature Fillers 154 Examples 154 References 155 Further Reading 156 Problems 156 Part II The Fusion Zone 157 7 Introduction to Solidification 159 7.1 Solute Redistribution During Solidification 159 7.1.1 Directional Solidification 159 7.1.2 Equilibrium Segregation Coefficient k 159 7.1.3 Four Cases of Solute Redistribution 161 7.2 Constitutional Supercooling 166 7.3 Solidification Modes 168 7.4 Microsegregation Caused by Solute Redistribution 171 7.5 Secondary Dendrite Arm Spacing 174 7.6 Effect of Dendrite Tip Undercooling 177 7.7 Effect of Growth Rate 178 7.8 Solidification of Ternary Alloys 178 7.8.1 Liquidus Projection 178 7.8.2 Solidification Path 179 7.8.3 Ternary Magnesium Alloys 180 7.8.4 Ternary Fe-Cr-Ni Alloys 182 7.8.4.1 Fe-Cr-Ni Phase Diagram 182 7.8.4.2 Solidification Paths 185 7.8.4.3 Microstructure 186 Examples 189 References 191 Further Reading 193 Problems 193 8 Solidification Modes 195 8.1 Solidification Modes 195 8.1.1 Temperature Gradient and Growth Rate 195 8.1.2 Variations in Growth Mode Across Weld 197 8.2 Dendrite Spacing and Cell Spacing 200 8.3 Effect of Welding Parameters 201 8.3.1 Solidification Mode 201 8.3.2 Dendrite and Cell Spacing 202 8.4 Refining Microstructure Within Grains 203 8.4.1 Arc Oscillation 203 8.4.2 Arc Pulsation 205 Examples 205 References 206 Further Reading 207 Problems 207 9 Nucleation and Growth of Grains 209 9.1 Epitaxial Growth at the Fusion Line 209 9.2 Nonepitaxial Growth at the Fusion Line 212 9.2.1 Mismatching Crystal Structures 212 9.2.2 Nondendritic Equiaxed Grains 213 9.3 Growth of Columnar Grains 214 9.4 Effect of Welding Parameters on Columnar Grains 215 9.5 Control of Columnar Grains 218 9.6 Nucleation Mechanisms of Equiaxed Grains 219 9.6.1 Microstructure Around Pool Boundary 219 9.6.2 Dendrite Fragmentation 220 9.6.3 Grain Detachment 222 9.6.4 Heterogeneous Nucleation 222 9.6.5 Effect of Welding Parameters on Heterogeneous Nucleation 225 9.6.6 Surface Nucleation 228 9.7 Grain Refining 228 9.7.1 Inoculation 228 9.7.2 Weld Pool Stirring 229 9.7.2.1 Magnetic Weld Pool Stirring 229 9.7.2.2 Ultrasonic Weld Pool Stirring 229 9.7.3 Arc Pulsation 232 9.7.4 Arc Oscillation 232 9.8 Identifying Grain-Refining Mechanisms 233 9.8.1 Overlap Welding Procedure 233 9.8.2 Identifying the Grain-Refining Mechanism 235 9.8.3 Effect of Arc Oscillation on Dendrite Fragmentation 236 9.8.4 Effect of Arc Oscillation on Constitutional Supercooling 236 9.8.5 Effect of Composition on Grain Refining by Arc Oscillation 238 9.9 Grain-Boundary Migration 238 Examples 239 References 240 Further Reading 245 Problems 246 10 Microsegregation 247 10.1 Microsegregation in Welds 247 10.2 Effect of Travel Speed on Microsegregation 249 10.3 Effect of Primary Solidification Phase on Microsegregation 252 10.4 Effect of Maximum Solid Solubility on Microsegregation 253 Examples 259 References 261 Further Reading 262 Problems 262 11 Macrosegregation 263 11.1 Macrosegregation in the Fusion Zone 263 11.2 Quick Freezing of One Liquid Metal in Another 265 11.3 Macrosegregation in Dissimilar-Filler Welding 265 11.3.1 Bulk Weld-Metal Composition 265 11.3.2 Mechanism I 267 11.3.3 Mechanism II 270 11.4 Macrosegregation in Dissimilar-Metal Welding 279 11.4.1 Mechanism I 279 11.4.2 Mechanism II 283 11.5 Reduction of Macrosegregation 286 11.6 Macrosegregation in Multiple-Pass Welds 287 References 290 Further Reading 291 Problems 291 12 Some Alloy-Specific Microstructures and Properties 293 12.1 Austenitic Stainless Steels 293 12.1.1 Microstructure Evolution in Stainless Steels 293 12.1.2 Mechanisms of Ferrite Formation 294 12.1.3 Prediction of Ferrite Content 296 12.1.4 Effect of Cooling Rate 297 12.1.4.1 Changes in Solidification Mode 297 12.1.4.2 Dendrite Tip Undercooling 301 12.2 Low-Carbon, Low-Alloy Steels 301 12.2.1 Microstructure Development 301 12.2.2 Factors Affecting Microstructure 302 12.2.3 Weld Metal Toughness 306 12.3 Ultralow Carbon Bainitic Steels 306 12.4 Creep-Resistant Steels 308 12.5 Hardfacing of Steels 311 References 319 Further Reading 321 Problems 321 13 Solidification Cracking 323 13.1 Characteristics of Solidification Cracking 323 13.2 Theories of Solidification Cracking 323 13.2.1 Criterion for Cracking Proposed by Kou 327 13.2.2 Index for Crack Susceptibility Proposed by Kou 328 13.2.3 Previous Theories 330 13.3 Binary Alloys and Analytical Equations 331 13.4 Solidification Cracking Tests 334 13.4.1 Varestraint Test 334 13.4.2 Controlled Tensile Weldability Test 336 13.4.3 Transverse-Motion Weldability Test 337 13.4.4 Circular-Patch Test 341 13.4.5 Houldcroft Test 342 13.4.6 Cast-Pin Test 343 13.4.7 Ring-Casting Test 344 13.4.8 Other Tests 344 13.5 Solidification Cracking of Stainless Steels 345 13.5.1 Primary Solidification Phase 345 13.5.2 Mechanism of Crack Resistance 346 13.6 Factors Affecting Solidification Cracking 350 13.6.1 Primary Solidification Phase 350 13.6.2 Grain Size 350 13.6.3 Solidification Temperature Range 351 13.6.4 Back Diffusion 354 13.6.5 Dihedral Angle 355 13.6.6 Grain-Boundary Angle 359 13.6.7 Degree of Restraint 360 13.7 Reducing Solidification Cracking 360 13.7.1 Control of Weld Metal Composition 360 13.7.2 Control of Weld Microstructure 363 13.7.3 Control of Welding Conditions 365 13.7.4 Control of Weld Shape 366 Examples 367 References 370 Further Reading 376 Problems 376 14 Ductility-Dip Cracking 379 14.1 Characteristics of Ductility-Dip Cracking 379 14.2 Theories of Ductility-Dip Cracking 381 14.3 Test Methods 382 14.4 Ductility-Dip Cracking of Ni-Base Alloys 384 14.4.1 Grain-Boundary Sliding 384 14.4.2 Grain-Boundary Misorientation 386 14.4.3 Grain-Boundary Tortuosity and Precipitates 386 14.4.4 Grain Size 388 14.4.5 Factors Affecting Ductility-Dip Cracking 390 14.5 Ductility-Dip Cracking of Stainless Steels 390 Examples 392 References 394 Further Reading 396 Problems 396 Part III The Partially Melted Zone 399 15 Liquation in the Partially Melted Zone 401 15.1 Formation of the Partially Melted Zone 401 15.2 Liquation Mechanisms 403 15.2.1 Mechanism I: Alloy with Co > CSM 404 15.2.2 Mechanism II: Alloy with Co < CSM and no AxBy or Eutectic 405 15.2.3 Mechanism III: Alloy with Co < CSM and AxBy or Eutectic 405 15.2.4 Additional Mechanisms of Liquation 409 15.3 Directional Solidification of Liquated Material 411 15.4 Grain-Boundary Segregation 411 15.5 Loss of Strength and Ductility 413 15.6 Hydrogen Cracking 414 15.7 Effect of Heat Input 414 15.8 Effect of Arc Oscillation 415 Examples 416 References 417 Problems 418 16 Liquation Cracking 419 16.1 Liquation Cracking in Arc Welding 419 16.1.1 Crack Susceptibility Tests 421 16.1.1.1 Varestraint Testing 421 16.1.1.2 Circular-Patch Testing 422 16.1.1.3 Hot Ductility Testing 423 16.1.2 Mechanism of Liquation Cracking 423 16.1.3 Predicting Effect of Filler Metal on Crack Susceptibility 424 16.1.4 Factors Affecting Liquation Cracking 430 16.1.4.1 Filler Metal 430 16.1.4.2 Heat Source 430 16.1.4.3 Degree of Restraint 431 16.1.4.4 Base Metal 431 16.2 Liquation Cracking in Resistance Spot Welding 434 16.3 Liquation Cracking in Friction Stir Welding 434 16.4 Liquation Cracking in Dissimilar-Metal FSW 439 Examples 445 References 446 Problems 449 Part IV The Heat-Affected Zone 451 17 Introduction to Solid-State Transformations 453 17.1 Work-Hardened Materials 453 17.2 Heat-Treatable Al Alloys 455 17.3 Heat-Treatable Ni-Base Alloys 458 17.4 Steels 461 17.4.1 Fe-C Phase Diagram and CCT Diagrams 461 17.4.2 Carbon Steels 463 17.4.3 Dual-Phase Steels 470 17.5 Stainless Steels 471 17.5.1 Types of Stainless Steels 471 17.5.2 Sensitization of Unstabilized Grades 473 17.5.3 Sensitization of Stabilized Grades 473 17.5.4 σ-Phase Embrittlement 475 Examples 475 References 475 Problems 477 18 Heat-Affected-Zone Degradation of Mechanical Properties 479 18.1 Grain Coarsening 479 18.2 Recrystallization and Grain Growth 480 18.3 Overaging in Al Alloys 483 18.3.1 Al-Cu-Mg (2000-Series) Alloys 483 18.3.1.1 Microstructure and Strength 483 18.3.1.2 Effect of Welding Parameters or Process 488 18.3.2 Al-Mg-Si (6000-Series) Alloys 489 18.3.2.1 Microstructure and Strength 489 18.3.2.2 Effect of Welding Processes and Parameters 491 18.3.3 Al-Zn-Mg (7000-Series) Alloys 492 18.4 Dissolution of Precipitates in Ni-Base Alloys 494 18.5 Martensite Tempering in Dual-Phase Steels 498 Examples 500 References 500 Further Reading 502 Problems 502 19 Heat-Affected-Zone Cracking 505 19.1 Hydrogen Cracking in Steels 505 19.1.1 Cause 505 19.1.2 Appearance 506 19.1.3 Susceptibility Tests 507 19.1.4 Remedies 508 19.1.4.1 Preheating 508 19.1.4.2 Postweld Heating 509 19.1.4.3 Bead Tempering 509 19.1.4.4 Use of Low-H Processes and Consumables 509 19.1.4.5 Use of Lower-Strength Filler Metals 509 19.1.4.6 Use of Austenitic-Stainless-Steel Filler Metals 510 19.2 Stress-Relief Cracking in Steels 510 19.3 Lamellar Tearing in Steels 514 19.4 Type-IV Cracking in Grade 91 Steel 517 19.5 Strain-Age Cracking in Ni-Base Alloys 519 Examples 524 References 524 Further Reading 527 Problems 528 20 Heat-Affected-Zone Corrosion 529 20.1 Weld Decay of Stainless Steels 529 20.2 Weld Decay of Ni-Base Alloys 533 20.3 Knife-Line Attack of Stainless Steels 534 20.4 Sensitization of Ferritic Stainless-Steel Welds 536 20.5 Stress Corrosion Cracking of Austenitic Stainless Steels 537 20.6 Corrosion Fatigue of Al Welds 538 Examples 538 References 539 Further Reading 540 Problems 540 Part V Special Topics 541 21 Additive Manufacturing 543 21.1 Heat and Fluid Flow 543 21.2 Residual Stress and Distortion 545 21.3 Lack of Fusion and Gas Porosity 547 21.4 Grain Structure 550 21.5 Solidification Cracking 550 21.6 Liquation Cracking 553 21.7 Graded Transition Joints 558 21.8 Further Discussions 560 Examples 560 References 561 Further Reading 563 Problems 564 22 Dissimilar-Metal Joining 565 22.1 Introduction 565 22.2 Arc and Laser Joining 565 22.2.1 Al-to-Steel Arc Brazing 566 22.2.1.1 Effect of Lap Joint Gap 569 22.2.1.2 Effect of Heat Input 575 22.2.1.3 Effect of Ultrasonic Vibration 577 22.2.1.4 Effect of Preheating 578 22.2.1.5 Effect of Postweld Heat Treatment 578 22.2.1.6 Butt Joint 579 22.2.2 Al-to-Steel Laser Brazing 579 22.2.3 Al-to-Steel Laser Welding 580 22.2.4 Mg-to-Steel Brazing 582 22.2.5 Al-to-Mg Welding 583 22.3 Resistance Spot Welding 583 22.3.1 Al-to-Steel RSW 583 22.3.2 Mg-to-Steel RSW 586 22.3.3 Al-to-Mg RSW 588 22.4 Friction Stir Welding 589 22.4.1 Al-to-Cu FSSW 589 22.4.2 FSSW of Al to Galvanized Steel 592 22.4.3 Effect of Coating on Al-to-Steel FSSW 597 22.5 Other Solid-State Welding Processes 603 22.5.1 Friction Welding 603 22.5.2 Explosion Welding 606 22.5.3 Magnetic Pulse Welding 607 Examples 608 References 609 Further Reading 612 Problems 612 23 Welding of Magnesium Alloys 613 23.1 Spatter 613 23.1.1 Spatter in Mg GMAW 613 23.1.2 Mechanism of Spatter 614 23.1.3 Elimination of Spatter 614 23.1.4 Irregular Weld Shape and Its Elimination 617 23.2 Porosity 618 23.2.1 Porosity in Mg GMAW 618 23.2.2 Mechanisms of Porosity Formation and Elimination 620 23.2.3 Comparing Porosity in Al and Mg Welds 621 23.3 Internal Oxide Films 622 23.3.1 Mechanism 622 23.3.2 Remedies 624 23.4 High Crowns 625 23.4.1 Mechanism of High-Crown Formation 625 23.4.2 Reducing Crown Height 627 23.5 Grain Refining 628 23.5.1 Ultrasonic Weld Pool Stirring 628 23.5.2 Arc Pulsation 629 23.5.3 Arc Oscillation 629 23.6 Solidification Cracking 629 23.7 Liquation Cracking 629 23.7.1 A Simple Test for Crack Susceptibility 631 23.7.2 Effect of Filler Metals 634 23.7.3 Effect of Grain Size 636 23.8 Heat-Affected Zone Weakening 636 Examples 638 References 640 Further Reading 641 Problems 641 24 Welding of High-Entropy Alloys and Metal-Matrix Nanocomposites 643 24.1 High-Entropy Alloys 643 24.1.1 Solidification Microstructure 643 24.1.2 Weldability 644 24.2 Metal-Matrix Nanocomposites 646 24.2.1 Nanoparticles Increasing Weld Size 646 24.2.2 Nanoparticles Refining Microstructure 648 24.2.3 Nanoparticles Reducing Cracking During Solidification 650 24.2.4 Nanoparticles Allowing Friction Stir Welding 651 Examples 653 References 654 Further Reading 655 Problems 655 Appendix A: Analytical Equations for Susceptibility to Solidification Cracking 657 Index 659

Read more less

Book SynopsisHANDBOOK OF CATCHMENT MANAGEMENT In 2010, the first edition of the Handbook of Catchment Management provided a benchmark on how our understanding and actions in water management within a catchment context had evolved in recent decades. Over ten years on, the catchment management concept isentering a new phase of development aligned to contemporary and future challenges. These include climate change uncertainty, further understanding in ecological functioning under change, the drive for a low-carbon, energy efficient and circular society, multiple uses of water, the emergence of new pollutants of concern, new approaches to valuation, finance and pricing mechanisms, stewardship and community engagement, the integration of water across the Sustainable Development Goals (SDG) and the link between water, energy and food. These developments are framed within an increasingly data rich world where new analytics, sensor technology and processing power are informing increasinglyTable of ContentsList of Contributors xvii Preface xxi Acknowledgements xxiv 1 Introduction to Catchment Management in 2020 3Robert C. Ferrier and Alan Jenkins 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Historical Synopsis 3 1.3 Recent Developments and Emerging Issues 6 1.3.1 Value of Water 6 1.3.2 Evaluation of the Global Resource 9 1.3.3 Water Scarcity and Drought 11 1.3.4 Emerging Technologies 14 1.3.5 Energy Transition 15 1.3.6 Water Quality 15 1.4 Policy Development 17 1.5 Working with Nature, Natural Capital, and Ecosystem Services 18 1.6 Summary 19 References 20 2 Water Diplomacy 25Rozemarijn ter Horst 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Short Historical Synopsis 26 2.2.1 What Is Water Diplomacy? 27 2.2.2 Water conflict and cooperation 28 2.3 Current Solutions 28 2.3.1 Who Practises Water Diplomacy? 28 2.3.2 How Is Water Diplomacy Done? 31 2.4 New Insights 37 2.5 Future Knowledge Requirements 38 References 39 3 Water Financing and Pricing Mechanisms 47Alan D. A. Sutherland and Colin McNaughton 3.1 Introduction 47 3.2 Short Historical Synopsis 49 3.3 Current Solutions 52 3.3.1 Regulation by Contract (Franchise Regulation) 53 3.3.2 Rate of Return Regulation 53 3.3.3 Incentive-Based Regulation 54 3.3.4 The Regulatory Governance Framework 58 3.4 New Insights 60 3.5 Future Knowledge Requirements 64 References 65 4 Defining ‘Smart Water’ 67David Lloyd Owen 4.1 Introduction 67 4.2 Historical Synopsis 69 4.3 Current Solutions 72 4.4 New Insights – The Digital Disruption 73 4.4.1 Adopting New Technologies 73 4.4.2 Decarbonising Water and Wastewater as a Resource 75 4.4.3 Water and Sewerage Metering 76 4.4.4 Demand Management, Tariffs, and Smarter White Goods 77 4.4.5 Sensors 78 4.4.6 ‘Digital’ Water 79 4.4.7 Rural–Urban Interface (New Storage and Green Infiltration) 82 4.5 Future Knowledge Requirements 84 4.6 Discussion and Conclusions 86 References 87 5 Water, Food, and Energy Nexus 93Alex Smajgl 5.1 Introduction 93 5.2 Historical Synopsis 94 5.2.1 Nexus Conceptualisations 94 5.2.2 Nexus-Focused Research 96 5.2.3 Nexus-Type Implementations and Case Studies 97 5.2.4 Nexus Interactions and Trade-off Examples 98 5.2.4.1 Hydropower – Fish 98 5.2.4.2 Irrigation – Food Crops – Energy Crops 99 5.2.4.3 Energy Pricing – Irrigated Agriculture – Availability of Surface and Groundwater 99 5.2.4.4 Desalinisation – Energy Costs – Water Supply 100 5.3 Current Solutions 100 5.3.1 Sustainability and Nexus Outcomes 100 5.3.2 Different Types of Water 102 5.3.3 Intervention Points to ‘Manage the Nexus’ 103 5.3.4 Research Solutions for Improved Trade-off Assessments 104 5.3.5 Innovative Engagement Processes to Steer Cross-Sector Dialogue 108 5.4 New Insights 110 5.5 Future Knowledge Requirements 112 References 114 6 Groundwater Management 125Stephen Foster and Alan MacDonald 6.1 Introduction 125 6.1.1 Importance of Groundwater Storage 125 6.1.2 Dynamics of Groundwater Flow Systems 126 6.1.3 Evaluation of Groundwater Recharge 128 6.1.4 Processes of Groundwater Quality Degradation 129 6.1.5 Aquifer Pollution Vulnerability and Quality Protection 132 6.2 Groundwater Management – Needs and Approaches 133 6.2.1 Impacts of Groundwater Resource Development 133 6.2.2 Surface-Water Impacts of Ineffective Management 135 6.2.3 Key Components of Groundwater Resources Management 135 6.2.3.1 Demand vs. Supply Side Interventions 135 6.2.3.2 Identifying Links with the Rest of the Water Cycle 136 6.2.3.3 Climate Change 137 6.2.3.4 Irrigation 137 6.2.4 Approaches to Groundwater Quality Protection 138 6.2.4.1 Potential Polluter Pays for Protection 138 6.2.4.2 Groundwater-Friendly Rural Land Use 139 6.2.5 Need for Adaptive and Precautionary Management 140 6.3 New Insights 140 6.3.1 Evolving Paradigm of Sound Governance 140 6.3.2 Integrated Policy to Strengthen Governance 142 6.3.2.1 Vertical Integration Within the Water Sector 142 6.3.2.2 Horizontal Integration Beyond the Water Sector 143 6.3.3 Conjunctive Use of Groundwater and Surface Water 143 6.3.4 Groundwater Management Planning 145 Acknowledgements 148 References 149 7 Diffuse Pollution Management 153Andrew Vinten 7.1 Introduction 153 7.1.1 Attributes of Diffuse Pollution 154 7.2 Historical synopsis: Challenges for diffuse pollution management 155 7.2.1 Recognition of Diffuse Pollution as an Issue 155 7.2.2 Identification of Sources of Diffuse Pollution 159 7.2.3 Development of Programmes of Measures to Combat Diffuse Pollution 161 7.3 Current solutions 162 7.3.1 Evidence of Effectiveness of Measures 162 7.3.2 Appropriateness of Measures in Specific Contexts 166 7.3.3 The Role of Governance and Other Factors in Effecting Behaviour Change 167 7.4 A Way Forward? 169 References 174 8 Emerging Contaminants and Pollutants of Concern 183Pei Wang and Yonglong Lu 8.1 Introduction 183 8.2 Short Historical Synopsis 186 8.2.1 Pollution Pathways 186 8.2.2 Life Cycle Analysis 188 8.2.3 Flows in Waste Management 189 8.2.4 Storage in the Environment 189 8.2.5 Alternatives or Mitigation Technologies for PFOA/PFO 190 8.3 Current Solutions 190 8.4 New Insights 191 8.4.1 Multi‐contaminants: Improved Risk Ranking 191 8.4.2 Heavy Metals 191 8.4.3 Endocrine Disrupting Chemicals 193 8.4.4 Pharmaceuticals and Personal Care Products 194 8.4.5 Persistent Organic Pollutants 194 8.4.6 What Is the Balance of the Cost from Production, Monitoring to Remediation of Emerging Pollutants? 196 8.4.7 What Is the Balance of the Attitude Among Different Stakeholders Including Government, Industry, Academia, and Public? 197 8.4.8 Government 197 8.4.9 Industry 198 8.4.10 Academia 199 8.4.11 Public 199 8.5 Future Knowledge Requirements 199 8.5.1 Regulations on the Production‐Demand Chain to Help Develop Low‐Toxicity Substitutes 199 8.5.2 Highly Efficient Methods to Remove the Pollutants in Various Wastes 200 8.5.3 Develop Specific Criteria and Standards for More Effective Risk Assessment and Environmental Management 200 8.5.4 Ecosystem‐Based Management for Prevention from Environmental Impacts of Emerging Pollutants 201 References 201 9 Flood Management 205Mark Fletcher 9.1 Introduction 205 9.1.1 The Water Cycle and Flooding 205 9.2 Historical Synopsis and Current Understanding 208 9.2.1 Flood Warning 208 9.2.2 UK Overview 208 9.2.3 Legislative Framework 209 9.2.4 Resilience to Flooding 209 9.2.5 Flood Categorisation 210 9.3 Current Solutions 213 9.3.1 Coping with Extreme Flooding 213 9.3.2 How to Cope (in Advance of a Major Flood Event) 213 9.3.3 Flood Asset Management 214 9.4 New Insights 214 9.4.1 Case Studies: (A) Leeds Flood Alleviation Scheme, Leeds, UK 214 9.4.1.1 Scheme Development 214 9.4.1.2 Digital Construction and Collaboration 215 9.4.1.3 Replacing the Weirs 215 9.4.1.4 Linear Defences in the City Centre 216 9.4.1.5 Eliminating Another Barrier 216 9.4.1.6 Integrated Urban Drainage Model 216 9.4.1.7 The Cutting Edge 216 9.4.2 Case Studies: (B) Skipton Flood Alleviation Scheme, Skipton, UK 221 9.4.2.1 The Short- and Long-Term Benefits from a Sustainable Development Perspective 224 9.4.2.2 Economic Benefits 224 9.4.2.3 Environmental Benefits 225 9.4.2.4 Social Benefits 225 9.4.2.5 Cutting Edge Aspects 225 9.4.2.6 Transferability – A Model for Work Elsewhere 226 9.4.2.7 Planning Impact on the Scheme 227 9.4.2.8 The Role of SMART Design in Flood Management 228 9.4.2.9 SMART Control 229 9.4.2.10 Automatic PLC Control 230 9.4.2.11 3D Modelling 230 9.4.3 Case Studies: (C) Connswater Community Greenway, Belfast, UK 233 9.4.4 Case Studies: (D) Freckleton Floodbank Breach, River Ribble, Lancashire, UK 233 9.4.4.1 Introduction 233 9.4.4.2 Possible Reasons for the Failure of the Embankment 237 9.4.4.3 Good Working Practice 239 9.5 Future Challenges 241 9.5.1 Climate Change – A Global Perspective 241 9.5.2 Population and Urbanisation 242 9.5.3 Digital 242 9.5.4 Nature Based Solutions (NBS) 242 References 243 10 Ecological Restoration 245Laurence Carvalho, Iain D. M. Gunn, Bryan M. Spears, and Anne J. Dobel 10.1 Introduction 245 10.2 Short Historical Synopsis 246 10.2.1 Restoration Success (or Lack of It) 246 10.2.2 Timescales in Ecological Recovery 249 10.3 Target-Setting, Monitoring, and Assessment 250 10.4 Current Restoration Approaches 250 10.4.1 Rivers 251 10.4.2 Environmental Flows 252 10.4.3 Lakes 254 10.4.3.1 Biomanipulation 255 10.4.3.2 Artificial Mixing and Aeration 256 10.4.3.3 Chemical Treatment 256 10.4.3.4 Sediment Removal 257 10.4.3.5 Short-Term Mitigation of Harmful Algal Blooms – Poorly Evidenced Lake Restoration Methods 257 10.4.4 Ponds 258 10.5 New Insights, Innovation, and Knowledge Gaps 259 10.5.1 Circular Economies – Resource Recovery 259 10.5.2 Nature-Based Solutions and Payment for Ecosystem Services 260 10.5.3 Building Climate Change Resilience 260 10.5.4 Developing a Systemic Approach and Re-wilding 262 References 263 11 Water, Sanitation, and Health: Progress and Obstacles to Achieving the SDGs 271Emmanuel M. Akpabio and John S. Rowan 11.1 Introduction 271 11.2 Theoretical and Historical Basis of Water, Sanitation, and Health Nexus 273 11.3 Understanding Current WaSH Management Practices in Sub-Saharan Africa: A Case of Nigeria and Malawi 278 11.4 Understanding the Challenges Associated with Achieving Improved WaSH Services Delivery for Sub-Saharan Africa 296 11.5 Key Insights, Lessons, and Future Knowledge 299 11.5.1 A Lack of Nexus Approach 300 11.5.2 Governance Challenge and Poor Institutional Capacities 301 11.5.3 Cultural and Religious Values 301 11.5.4 Excessive Influence of External Actors and Agencies 303 11.5.5 Prioritising and Strengthening Catchment-Based Management Approach to WaSH Services Delivery 303 11.5.6 Climate Change Impact and Access to Water, Sanitation, and Hygiene 304 Acknowledgements 305 References 305 12 The Legal and Institutional Framework for Basin Management Across Governance Levels 309Susanne Schmeier 12.1 Introduction 309 12.2 The Conceptual Framework – Legal and Institutional Dimensions of River Basin Management 311 12.2.1 From Local to Transboundary – A Level Perspective on River Basin Management 311 12.2.2 The River Basin Management Cycle 314 12.2.3 Combining the Level and the Cyclical Approach 315 12.3 From Concept to Practice – The (Mal-)Functioning of Legal and Institutional Frameworks 316 12.3.1 River Basin Management in Europe – High Complexity 316 12.3.1.1 The Rhine River Basin – A High Density of Legal and Institutional Instruments 316 12.3.1.2 The Danube River Basin – Complex Management Mechanisms for a Complex Basin 321 12.3.2 River Basin Management Across Levels in the Mekong River Basin – A Patchy Framework 323 12.3.3 River Basin Management in Southern Africa – Increasing Integration in the Orange River Basin 327 12.4 Conclusions 331 References 332 13 Scotland the ‘Hydro Nation’: Linking Policy, Science, Industry, Regulation in Scotland and Internationally 339Barry Greig and Jon Rathjen 13.1 Introduction 339 13.2 Scotland’s Water Environment 339 13.3 Industry Vision 341 13.4 Scotland: The Hydro Nation 341 13.5 Value 343 13.6 Hydro Nation: Strategy and Structure 343 13.7 Hydro Nation Strategy: National Theme 346 13.8 Water Supply and Demand Management 347 13.9 Private Supplies and Rural Provision 347 13.10 Regulation and Governance 348 13.11 Hydro Nation Strategy: International Theme 349 13.12 Scotland and Malawi 350 13.13 Hydro Nation Strategy: Knowledge Theme 352 13.14 Hydro Nation Strategy: Innovation Theme 352 13.15 Hydro Nation Impact 353 13.16 Emerging Policy Issues for Scotland 355 References 357 14 Yorkshire Integrated Catchment Solutions Programme (iCASP): A New Model for Research-Based Catchment Management 359Janet C. Richardson, Marie Ferré, Benjamin L. Rabb, Jennifer C. Armstrong, Julia Martin-Ortega, David M. Hodgson, Thomas D. M Willis, Richard Grayson, Poppy Leeder, and Joseph Holden 14.1 Introduction 359 14.2 Study Area: River Ouse Drainage Basin, Yorkshire 360 14.2.1 Catchment Challenges 361 14.3 The iCASP Model 364 14.3.1 Partnership Working 364 14.3.2 Principles of Working 369 14.3.3 Project Development Process 369 14.3.3.1 Outputs 373 14.3.4 Impact Tracking 374 14.3.5 The Network 376 14.4 New Insights and Highlights 376 14.5 Conclusions 380 Acknowledgements 380 References 380 15 Integrated Management in Singapore 385Cecilia Tortajada and Rachel Yan Ting Koh 15.1 Introduction 385 15.2 Institutional and Legal Frameworks 386 15.3 Overall Policy and Planning 388 15.4 The Search for Alternative Sources of Water 389 15.5 NEWater: From Concept to Implementation 393 15.6 NEWater: Water Source Looking to the Future 396 15.7 Final Thoughts: Public Engagement, Education, and Outreach Strategies to Promote Acceptance 400 References 401 16 Flood and Drought Emergency Management 409Miaomiao Ma and Song Han 16.1 Severe Flooding on the Huai River in 2007 409 16.1.1 Introduction 409 16.1.2 Background Hydrological Situation 409 16.1.3 Challenges 412 16.1.4 Current Approach to Meeting the Challenges 413 16.1.5 Lessons Learned 414 16.1.5.1 Leave the Flood More Space 414 16.1.5.2 Optimise Flood Control Regulations 415 16.1.5.3 Moderating Flood Risks 415 16.1.6 Future Work 415 16.2 Severe Drought in South-west Region of China in 2010 416 16.2.1 Introduction and Background 416 16.2.2 Challenges 418 16.2.3 Current Approach to Meeting the Challenges 420 16.2.4 Recovery After the Drought Event 423 16.2.5 Lessons Learned 424 16.2.6 Future Work 426 References 426 17 The River Chief System in China 429Tan Xianqiang 17.1 Introduction 429 17.1.1 Components of the RCS 430 17.2 Short Historical Synopsis 432 17.3 Current Solutions 433 17.3.1 RCS on the Chishui River as a Demonstration 433 17.3.2 New Insights 434 17.4 Future Knowledge Requirements 438 Acknowledgement 439 18 Water Resources Management in the Colorado River Basin 441Alan Butler, Terrance Fulp, James Prairie, and Amy Witherall 18.1 Introduction and Background 441 18.1.1 Geography and Hydrology 442 18.1.2 Legal and Policy Framework 444 18.2 Current Challenge – Imbalance of Water Supply and Demand 450 18.3 Recent Approaches to Meeting Challenges 452 18.3.1 The Collaborative, Incremental Approach 452 18.3.2 Interim Surplus Guidelines and California ‘4.4 Plan’ 453 18.3.3 2007 Interim Guidelines 455 18.3.4 Minutes 319 and 323 455 18.3.5 Drought Contingency Plans in the United States and Mexico 457 18.3.6 Reclamation’s Role 458 18.4 Future Thoughts and Considerations 459 References 460 19 Development in the Northern Rivers of Australia 465Ian Watson, Andrew Ash, Cuan Petheram, Marcus Barber, and Chris Stokes 19.1 Introduction 465 19.2 Context for Northern Development 468 19.3 Biophysical Characteristics and Constraints 475 19.3.1 Physiography, Climate, and Hydrology 476 19.3.1.1 Surface Water – Groundwater Connectivity 478 19.3.2 Environment and Ecology 480 19.3.3 Potential Impacts and Their Management 481 19.4 Catchment Governance and Management 483 19.4.1 Roles and Responsibilities of Government in Managing Catchments 483 19.4.2 Commonwealth Government 483 19.4.3 State and Territory Government 484 19.4.4 Statutory Bodies with a Role in Catchment Management 485 19.4.5 Community Organisations, Emerging Voices 485 19.4.6 The Role of Indigenous People in Catchment Management 485 19.4.7 Development Agendas and the Protection of the Natural and Cultural Values of Northern Australian Rivers 486 19.5 Development Opportunities 487 19.5.1 Background 487 19.5.2 Land and Water Resources 487 19.5.2.1 Soils and Land Suitability 487 19.5.2.2 Surface and Groundwater 488 19.5.3 Primary Production Opportunities 488 19.6 Conclusions 489 Acknowledgements 490 References 490 20 Catchment Management of Lake Simcoe, Canada 499Jill C. Crossman 20.1 Introduction to the Lake Simcoe Case Study: A History of Problems 499 20.2 History of Pollution 501 20.2.1 Point Sources 502 20.2.2 Diffuse Sources 502 20.2.3 Direct Sources to the Lake 505 20.3 History of Management of Lake Simcoe 506 20.3.1 Implementation of Catchment Management Principles 507 20.4 Management Achievements 510 20.4.1 Reductions in Phosphorus Loadings 510 20.4.2 Point Source Reductions – Sewage Treatment 511 20.4.3 Diffuse Source Reductions 512 20.4.4 Septic Systems 512 20.4.5 Urban Run-off 513 20.4.6 Fertilisers 515 20.4.7 Livestock 516 20.4.8 Soil Erosion 516 20.4.9 Wetland Drainage (Polders) 517 20.4.10 Improvements in Lake Water Quality 518 20.4.11 Management Impacts on Fish Stocks 520 20.5 Future Implications 522 20.5.1 Land Use and Population Change 522 20.5.2 Climate Change 524 20.6 Conclusion 526 References 527 21 Management of Water Resources on the Han River, Korea 533Hwirin Kim 21.1 Introduction 533 21.2 Short Historical Synopsis 535 21.2.1 Dams, Weirs, Reservoirs, and Related Institutions in the Han River Basin 535 21.2.2 The Dam and Weir Conjunctive Operation Council 538 21.3 Current Issues 539 21.3.1 Flooding in 2006 539 21.3.2 Drought in 2016–2018 542 21.3.3 Dam Water Use for River Water Quality Improvement-2018 543 21.4 Future Challenges 546 22 Dispute Resolution in the Cauvery Basin, India 549Neha Khandekar and Veena Srinivasan 22.1 Introduction 549 22.1.1 Background 549 22.1.2 The Cauvery Water Conflict 552 22.2 History of the Dispute 553 22.2.1 Colonial Times 553 22.2.2 Post‐independence Origins of Inter‐State Dispute (1974–1990) 555 22.2.3 Tribunal Process (1990–2007) 555 22.2.4 Different States Have Different Positions About Principles 556 22.2.4.1 Karnataka’s Position 556 22.2.4.2 Tamil Nadu’s Position 557 22.2.5 2007 Agreement 558 22.2.5.1 Principles of Allocation 558 22.2.5.2 Surface Water Allocation 558 22.2.5.3 Groundwater Allocation 558 22.2.5.4 Environmental Flow 560 22.2.5.5 Release Schedule 560 22.2.6 Post‐tribunal Conflicts (2007–2018) 561 22.2.7 The 2018 Verdict 561 22.3 Analysis of the Cauvery Dispute 562 22.3.1 Problems with Scientific Basis of Tribunal Allocation 563 22.3.1.1 Premise of Allocation Is Flawed 563 22.3.1.2 No Guidance on Shortage Sharing in Drought Years 564 22.3.1.3 No Clarity on Wastewater Ownership 564 22.3.2 Data Gaps 564 22.3.2.1 Sparse Data on Water Availability 564 22.3.2.2 Inconsistent and Inadequate Data on Agricultural Water Use 565 22.3.2.3 Data on ‘Green Water’ and Evapotranspiration Is Unavailable 565 22.3.2.4 Data on Urban Water Use Is Fragmented 566 22.3.2.5 Inadequate Public Information on Water Infrastructure Plans 566 22.3.2.6 Missing Data on Water Infrastructure Operations 566 22.3.2.7 Reservoir Sedimentation Is Not Accounted for 566 22.3.2.8 Water Quality Data Are Inadequate 567 22.4 Science–Policy Gaps 567 22.4.1 Changing Nature of Demand and Supply 568 22.5 Political Challenges 569 22.5.1 Identity Politics 569 22.5.2 Poor Public Communication 569 22.6 Dispute Resolution Approaches 569 22.6.1 Cauvery Management Board 570 22.6.2 Direct Dialogue 571 22.7 Summary and Way Forward 571 Acknowledgements 573 References 573 23 The Future for Catchment Management 579Alan Jenkins and Robert C. Ferrier 23.1 Climate Change 579 23.2 Biodiversity 580 23.3 Land Use 581 23.4 Coasts 582 23.5 Ecosystem Goods and Services 582 23.6 People and Management 583 23.7 Science 584 23.8 Challenges for the Next Decade 585 References 585 Index 589

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe bible of stress concentration factorsupdated to reflect today''s advances in stress analysis This book establishes and maintains a system of data classification for all the applications of stress and strain analysis, and expedites their synthesis into CAD applications. Filled with all of the latest developments in stress and strain analysis, this Fourth Edition presents stress concentration factors both graphically and with formulas, and the illustrated index allows readers to identify structures and shapes of interest based on the geometry and loading of the location of a stress concentration factor. Peterson''s Stress Concentration Factors, Fourth Edition includes a thorough introduction of the theory and methods for static and fatigue design, quantification of stress and strain, research on stress concentration factors for weld joints and composite materials, and a new introduction to the systematic stress analysis approach using Finite ElemTable of ContentsIndex to the Stress Concentration Factors xv Preface for the Fourth Edition xxxi Preface for the Third Edition xxxiii Preface for the Second Edition xxxv 1 Fundamentals of Stress Analysis 1 1.1 Stress Analysis in Product Design 2 1.2 Solid Objects Under Loads 4 1.3 Types of Materials 6 1.4 Materials Properties and Testing 7 1.4.1 Tensile and Compression Tests 8 1.4.2 Hardness Tests 8 1.4.3 Shear Tests 13 1.4.4 Fatigue Tests 14 1.4.5 Impact Tests 16 1.5 Static and Fatigue Failures 17 1.6 Uncertainties, Safety Factors, and Probabilities 19 1.7 Stress Analysis of Mechanical Structures 21 1.7.1 Procedure of Stress Analysis 21 1.7.2 Geometric Discontinuities of Solids 21 1.7.3 Load Types 23 1.7.4 Stress and Representation 24 1.7.4.1 Simple Stress 26 1.7.4.2 General Stresses 26 1.7.4.3 Principal Stresses and Directions 27 1.8 Failure Criteria of Materials 30 1.8.1 Maximum Shear Stress (MSS) Theory 30 1.8.2 Distortion Energy (DE) Theory 32 1.8.3 Maximum Normal Stress (MNS) Theory 34 1.8.4 Ductile and Brittle Coulomb-Mohr (CM) Theory 36 1.8.5 Modified-Mohr (MM) Theory 37 1.8.6 Guides for Selection of Failure Criteria 37 1.9 Stress Concentration 39 1.9.1 Selection of Nominal Stresses as Reference 42 1.9.2 Accuracy of Stress Concentration Factors 45 1.9.3 Decay of Stress away from the Peak Stress 46 1.10 Stress Concentration as a Two-Dimensional Problem 46 1.11 Stress Concentration as a Three-Dimensional Problem 47 1.12 Plane and Axisymmetric Problems 49 1.13 Local and Nonlocal Stress Concentration 52 1.14 Multiple Stress Concentration 57 1.15 Principle of Superposition for Combined Loads 61 1.16 Notch Sensitivity 64 1.17 Design Relations for Static Stress 69 1.17.1 Ductile Materials 69 1.17.2 Brittle Materials 71 1.18 Design Relations for Alternating Stress 72 1.18.1 Ductile Materials 72 1.18.2 Brittle Materials 73 1.19 Design Relations for Combined Alternating and Static Stresses 74 1.19.1 Ductile Materials 74 1.19.2 Brittle Materials 77 1.20 Limited Number of Cycles of Alternating Stress 78 1.21 Stress Concentration Factors and Stress Intensity Factors 79 1.22 Selection of Safety Factors 83 References 85 2 Notches and Grooves 89 2.1 Notation 89 2.2 Stress Concentration Factors 90 2.3 Notches in Tension 92 2.3.1 Opposite Deep Hyperbolic Notches in an Infinite Thin Element; Shallow Elliptical, Semicircular, U-Shaped, or Keyhole-Shaped Notches in Semi-Infinite Thin Elements; Equivalent Elliptical Notch 92 2.3.2 Opposite Single Semicircular Notches in a Finite-Width Thin Element 94 2.3.3 Opposite Single U-Shaped Notches in a Finite-Width Thin Element 94 2.3.4 Finite-Width Correction Factors for Opposite Narrow Single Elliptical Notches in a Finite-Width Thin Element 95 2.3.5 Opposite Single V-Shaped Notches in a Finite-Width Thin Element 95 2.3.6 Single Notch on One Side of a Thin Element 96 2.3.7 Notches with Flat Bottoms 96 2.3.8 Multiple Notches in a Thin Element 96 2.3.9 Analytical Solutions for Stress Concentration Factors for Notched Bars 98 2.4 Depressions in Tension 98 2.4.1 Hemispherical Depression (Pit) in the Surface of a Semi-Infinite Body 98 2.4.2 Hyperboloid Depression (Pit) in the Surface of a Finite-Thickness Element 98 2.4.3 Opposite Shallow Spherical Depressions (Dimples) in a Thin Element 99 2.5 Grooves in Tension 100 2.5.1 Deep Hyperbolic Groove in an Infinite Member (Circular Net Section) 100 2.5.2 U-Shaped Circumferential Groove in a Bar of Circular Cross Section 100 2.5.3 Flat-Bottom Grooves 100 2.5.4 Closed-Form Solutions for Grooves in Bars of Circular Cross Section 100 2.6 Bending of Thin Beams with Notches 101 2.6.1 Opposite Deep Hyperbolic Notches in an Infinite Thin Element 101 2.6.2 Opposite Semicircular Notches in a Flat Beam 101 2.6.3 Opposite U-Shaped Notches in a Flat Beam 101 2.6.4 V-Shaped Notches in a Flat Beam Element 102 2.6.5 Notch on One Side of a Thin Beam 102 2.6.6 Single or Multiple Notches with Semicircular or Semielliptical Notch Bottoms 102 2.6.7 Notches with Flat Bottoms 103 2.6.8 Closed-Form Solutions for Stress Concentration Factors for Notched Beams 103 2.7 Bending of Plates with Notches 103 2.7.1 Various Edge Notches in an Infinite Plate in Transverse Bending 103 2.7.2 Notches in a Finite-Width Plate in Transverse Bending 104 2.8 Bending of Solids with Grooves 104 2.8.1 Deep Hyperbolic Groove in an Infinite Member 104 2.8.2 U-Shaped Circumferential Groove in a Bar of Circular Cross Section 104 2.8.3 Flat-Bottom Grooves in Bars of Circular Cross Section 105 2.8.4 Closed-Form Solutions for Grooves in Bars of Circular Cross Section 105 2.9 Direct Shear and Torsion 106 2.9.1 Deep Hyperbolic Notches in an Infinite Thin Element in Direct Shear 106 2.9.2 Deep Hyperbolic Groove in an Infinite Member 106 2.9.3 U-Shaped Circumferential Groove in a Bar of Circular Cross Section Subject to Torsion 106 2.9.4 V-Shaped Circumferential Groove in a Bar of Circular Cross Section Under Torsion 108 2.9.5 Shaft in Torsion with Grooves with Flat Bottoms 108 2.9.6 Closed-Form Formulas for Grooves in Bars of Circular Cross Section Under Torsion 109 2.10 Test Specimen Design for Maximum Kt for a Given r/D or r/H 109 References 109 Charts 113 3 Shoulder Fillets 167 3.1 Notation 167 3.2 Stress Concentration Factors 169 3.3 Tension (Axial Loading) 170 3.3.1 Opposite Shoulder Fillets in a Flat Bar 170 3.3.2 Effect of Length of Element 170 3.3.3 Effect of Shoulder Geometry in a Flat Member 170 3.3.4 Effect of a Trapezoidal Protuberance on the Edge of a Flat Bar 171 3.3.5 Fillet of Noncircular Contour in a Flat Stepped Bar 172 3.3.6 Stepped Bar of Circular Cross Section with a Circumferential Shoulder Fillet 175 3.3.7 Tubes 176 3.3.8 Stepped Pressure Vessel Wall with Shoulder Fillets 176 3.4 Bending 177 3.4.1 Opposite Shoulder Fillets in a Flat Bar 177 3.4.2 Effect of Shoulder Geometry in a Flat Thin Member 177 3.4.3 Elliptical Shoulder Fillet in a Flat Member 177 3.4.4 Stepped Bar of Circular Cross Section with a Circumferential Shoulder Fillet 177 3.5 Torsion 178 3.5.1 Stepped Bar of Circular Cross Section with a Circumferential Shoulder Fillet 178 3.5.2 Stepped Bar of Circular Cross Section with a Circumferential Shoulder Fillet and a Central Axial Hole 178 3.5.3 Compound Fillet 179 3.6 Methods of Reducing Stress Concentration at a Shoulder 180 References 182 Charts 184 4 Holes 209 4.1 Notation 209 4.2 Stress Concentration Factors 211 4.3 Circular Holes with In-Plane Stresses 214 4.3.1 Single Circular Hole in an Infinite Thin Element in Uniaxial Tension 214 4.3.2 Single Circular Hole in a Semi-Infinite Element in Uniaxial Tension 217 4.3.3 Single Circular Hole in a Finite-Width Element in Uniaxial Tension 218 4.3.4 Effect of Length of Element 218 4.3.5 Single Circular Hole in an Infinite Thin Element under Biaxial In-Plane Stresses 219 4.3.6 Single Circular Hole in a Cylindrical Shell with Tension or Internal Pressure 220 4.3.7 Circular or Elliptical Hole in a Spherical Shell with Internal Pressure 223 4.3.8 Reinforced Hole Near the Edge of a Semi-Infinite Element in Uniaxial Tension 223 4.3.9 Symmetrically Reinforced Hole in a Finite-Width Element in Uniaxial Tension 226 4.3.10 Nonsymmetrically Reinforced Hole in a Finite-Width Element in Uniaxial Tension 227 4.3.11 Symmetrically Reinforced Circular Hole in a Biaxially Stressed Wide, Thin Element 227 4.3.12 Circular Hole with Internal Pressure 235 4.3.13 Two Circular Holes of Equal Diameter in a Thin Element in Uniaxial Tension or Biaxial In-Plane Stresses 236 4.3.14 Two Circular Holes of Unequal Diameter in a Thin Element in Uniaxial Tension or Biaxial In-Plane Stresses 241 4.3.15 Single Row of Equally Distributed Circular Holes in an Element in Tension 243 4.3.16 Double Row of Circular Holes in a Thin Element in Uniaxial Tension 243 4.3.17 Symmetrical Pattern of Circular Holes in a Thin Element in Uniaxial Tension or Biaxial In-Plane Stresses 244 4.3.18 Radially Stressed Circular Element with a Ring of Circular Holes, with or without a Central Circular Hole 245 4.3.19 Thin Element with Circular Holes with Internal Pressure 246 4.4 Elliptical Holes in Tension 247 4.4.1 Single Elliptical Hole in Infinite- and Finite-Width Thin Elements in Uniaxial Tension 250 4.4.2 Width Correction Factor for a Cracklike Central Slit in a Tension Panel 252 4.4.3 Single Elliptical Hole in an Infinite, Thin Element Biaxially Stressed 253 4.4.4 Infinite Row of Elliptical Holes in Infinite- and Finite-Width Thin Elements in Uniaxial Tension 263 4.4.5 Elliptical Hole with Internal Pressure 263 4.4.6 Elliptical Holes with Bead Reinforcement in an Infinite Thin Element under Uniaxial and Biaxial Stresses 263 4.5 Various Configurations with In-Plane Stresses 263 4.5.1 Thin Element with an Ovaloid; Two Holes Connected by a Slit under Tension; Equivalent Ellipse 263 4.5.2 Circular Hole with Opposite Semicircular Lobes in a Thin Element in Tension 265 4.5.3 Infinite Thin Element with a Rectangular Hole with Rounded Corners Subject to Uniaxial or Biaxial Stress 266 4.5.4 Finite-Width Tension Thin Element with Round-Cornered Square Hole 267 4.5.5 Square Holes with Rounded Corners and Bead Reinforcement in an Infinite Panel under Uniaxial and Biaxial Stresses 267 4.5.6 Round-Cornered Equilateral Triangular Hole in an Infinite Thin Element Under Various States of Tension 267 4.5.7 Uniaxially Stressed Tube or Bar of Circular Cross Section with a Transverse Circular Hole 267 4.5.8 Round Pin Joint in Tension 268 4.5.9 Inclined Round Hole in an Infinite Panel Subjected to Various States of Tension 269 4.5.10 Pressure Vessel Nozzle (Reinforced Cylindrical Opening) 270 4.5.11 Spherical or Ellipsoidal Cavities 271 4.5.12 Spherical or Ellipsoidal Inclusions 272 4.6 Holes in Thick Elements 274 4.6.1 Countersunk Holes 276 4.6.2 Cylindrical Tunnel 277 4.6.3 Intersecting Cylindrical Holes 278 4.6.4 Rotating Disk with a Hole 279 4.6.5 Ring or Hollow Roller 281 4.6.6 Pressurized Cylinder 281 4.6.7 Pressurized Hollow Thick Cylinder with a Circular Hole in the Cylinder Wall 282 4.6.8 Pressurized Hollow Thick Square Block with a Circular Hole in the Wall 283 4.6.9 Other Configurations 283 4.7 Orthotropic Thin Members 284 4.7.1 Orthotropic Panel with an Elliptical Hole 284 4.7.2 Orthotropic Panel with a Circular Hole 286 4.7.3 Orthotropic Panel with a Crack 286 4.7.4 Isotropic Panel with an Elliptical Hole 286 4.7.5 Isotropic Panel with a Circular Hole 286 4.7.6 More Accurate Theory for a/b < 4 287 4.8 Bending 288 4.8.1 Bending of a Beam with a Central Hole 288 4.8.2 Bending of a Beam with a Circular Hole Displaced from the Center Line 289 4.8.3 Curved Beams with Circular Holes 289 4.8.4 Bending of a Beam with an Elliptical Hole; Slot with Semicircular Ends (Ovaloid); or Round-Cornered Square Hole 290 4.8.5 Bending of an Infinite- and a Finite-Width Plate with a Single Circular Hole 290 4.8.6 Bending of an Infinite Plate with a Row of Circular Holes 291 4.8.7 Bending of an Infinite Plate with a Single Elliptical Hole 291 4.8.8 Bending of an Infinite Plate with a Row of Elliptical Holes 291 4.8.9 Tube or Bar of Circular Cross Section with a Transverse Hole 291 4.9 Shear and Torsion 292 4.9.1 Shear Stressing of an Infinite Thin Element with Circular or Elliptical Hole, Unreinforced and Reinforced 292 4.9.2 Shear Stressing of an Infinite Thin Element with a Round-Cornered Rectangular Hole, Unreinforced and Reinforced 293 4.9.3 Two Circular Holes of Unequal Diameter in a Thin Element in Pure Shear 293 4.9.4 Shear Stressing of an Infinite Thin Element with Two Circular Holes or a Row of Circular Holes 294 4.9.5 Shear Stressing of an Infinite Thin Element with an Infinite Pattern of Circular Holes 294 4.9.6 Twisted Infinite Plate with a Circular Hole 294 4.9.7 Torsion of a Cylindrical Shell with a Circular Hole 294 4.9.8 Torsion of a Tube or Bar of Circular Cross Section with a Transverse Circular Hole 294 References 296 Charts 307 5 Miscellaneous Design Elements 439 5.1 Notation 439 5.2 Shaft with Keyseat 441 5.2.1 Bending 442 5.2.2 Torsion 442 5.2.3 Torque Transmitted Through a Key 443 5.2.4 Combined Bending and Torsion 443 5.2.5 Effect of Proximity of Keyseat to Shaft Shoulder Fillet 443 5.2.6 Fatigue Failures 444 5.3 Splined Shaft in Torsion 445 5.4 Gear Teeth 445 5.5 Press- or Shrink-Fitted Members 447 5.6 Bolt and Nut 450 5.7 Bolt Head, Turbine-Blade, or Compressor-Blade Fastening (T-Head) 452 5.8 Lug Joint 454 5.8.1 Lugs with h∕d < 0.5 455 5.8.2 Lugs with h∕d > 0.5 456 5.9 Curved Bar 457 5.10 Helical Spring 458 5.10.1 Round or Square Wire Compression or Tension Spring 458 5.10.2 Rectangular Wire Compression or Tension Spring 460 5.10.3 Helical Torsion Spring 461 5.11 Crankshaft 461 5.12 Crane Hook 462 5.13 U-Shaped Member 462 5.14 Angle and Box Sections 463 5.15 Cylindrical Pressure Vessel with Torispherical Ends 463 5.16 Welds 464 5.17 Parts with Inhomogeneous Materials or Composites 471 5.18 Parts with Defects 471 5.19 Parts with Threads 474 5.20 Frame Stiffeners 475 5.21 Discontinuities with Additional Considerations 476 5.22 Pharmaceutical Tablets with Holes 477 5.23 Parts with Residual Stresses 478 5.24 Surface Roughness 479 5.25 New Approaches for Parametric Studies 480 References 481 Charts 489 6 Finite Element Analysis (FEA) for Stress Analysis 517 6.1 Structural Analysis Problems 518 6.2 Types of Engineering Analysis Methods 519 6.3 Structural Analysis Theory 520 6.3.1 Trusses and Frame Structures 523 6.3.1.1 Trusses 523 6.3.1.2 Boundary Conditions (BCs) and Loads 526 6.3.1.3 Frame Structure 527 6.3.2 Plane Stress and Strain Problems 530 6.3.2.1 Plane Stresses 530 6.3.2.2 Plane Strain Problems 535 6.3.3 Modal Analysis 535 6.3.3.1 Two-Dimensional Truss Member in LCS 537 6.3.3.2 Two-Dimensional Beam Member in LCS 538 6.3.3.3 Modeling of Two-Dimensional Frame Element 540 6.3.4 Fatigue Analysis 542 6.3.4.1 Strain-Life Method 543 6.3.4.2 Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics Method 544 6.3.4.3 Stress-Life Method 545 6.3.4.4 Selection of Fatigue Analysis Methods 546 6.4 Finite Element Anlaysis (FEA) for Structural Analysis 547 6.4.1 CAD/CAE Interface 551 6.4.2 Materials Library 552 6.4.3 Meshing Tool 554 6.4.4 Analysis Types 558 6.4.5 Tools for Boundary Conditions 559 6.4.6 Solvers to FEA Models 559 6.4.7 Postprocessing 562 6.5 Planning V&V in FEA Modeling 562 6.5.1 Sources of Errors 563 6.5.1.1 Error Quantification 563 6.5.1.2 System Inputs 564 6.5.1.3 Errors of Idealization 565 6.5.1.4 Errors of Mathematic Models 566 6.5.1.5 Errors of Model or Analysis Type 567 6.5.2 Verification 567 6.5.2.1 Code Verification 568 6.5.2.2 Calculation Verification 571 6.5.2.3 Meshing Verification 572 6.5.2.4 Convergence Study 575 6.5.2.5 Benchmarking 576 6.6 Finite Element Analysis for Verification of Structural Analysis 577 6.7 FEA for Stress Analysis of Assembly Models 580 6.8 Parametric Study for Stress Analysis 582 6.9 FEA on Study of Stress Concentration Factors 586 References 586 Index 589

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe #1 construction law guide for construction professionals Updated and expanded to reflect the most recent changes in construction law, this practical guide teaches readersthe difficult theories, principles, and established rules that regulate the construction business. It addresses the practical steps required to avoid and mitigate riskswhether the project is performed domestically or internationally, or whether it uses a traditional design-bid-build delivery system or one of the many alternative project delivery systems. Smith, Currie & Hancock''s Common Sense Construction Law: A Practical Guide for the Construction Professional provides a comprehensive introduction to the important legal topics and questions affecting the construction industry today. This latest edition features: all-new coverage of Electronically Stored Information (ESI) and Integrated Project Delivery (IPD); extended information on the civil False Claims Act; and fully updatTable of ContentsPreface xxv Author Biographies xxvii 1 The Legal Context of Construction 1 I. Introduction 1 II. Contract Law 1 III. Evolution of Construction Law 3 IV. Torts 4 V. Statutory and Regulatory Laws Affecting the Business of Construction 7 2 Interpreting the Contract 11 I. The Importance of Contract Interpretation 11 II. What is a Contract? 11 III. The Goal of Contract Interpretation 12 IV. Defining Contract Terms 12 V. Interpreting the Contract’s Language 13 VI. The Facts and Circumstances Surrounding Contract Formation 15 VII. Resolving Ambiguities 18 VIII. Implied Contractual Obligations 19 IX. Contractual Obligations Arising by Operation of Law 23 3 Alternative Contracting Methods 26 I. Traditional Approach to Construction: Advantages and Disadvantages 26 II. Integrated Project Delivery 27 III. Multiprime Contracting and Fast-Tracking 31 IV. Construction Management 32 V. Design-Build Contracting 35 VI. Design-Build Aspects of Traditional Construction 43 VII. Contractor Liability Issues 47 VIII. Engineer-Procure-Construct 48 IX. Building Information Modeling 51 4 Public-Private Partnerships 56 I. The P3 Alternative 57 II. P3 Project Participants 64 III. P3 Financing Strategies 68 IV. P3 Risk Allocation 73 V. Conclusion 77 5 International Construction Contracts 79 I. Unique Issues 79 II. Project Delivery Methods and Contract Forms 81 III. Dispute Resolution 92 6 Working in a Different State 96 I. Qualifying to Do Business 96 II. State Registration Requirements: Bonds to Secure Payment of Taxes 97 III. State Licensing and Qualifications 98 IV. Public-Sector Construction 99 V. State Statutes and Policies Affecting Contractual Relationships and Terms 101 VI. Preservation of Lien/Bond Rights 107 VII. Project Risk Assessment—“Foreign States” 109 VIII. Information Sources 110 Appendix 6.1 Checklist: Projects in “Foreign Jurisdictions” 112 7 Competing for the Contract 115 I. Introduction: The Rationale for Competition 115 II. Key Concepts in Traditional Public Competitive Bids—Responsiveness and Responsibility 116 III. The “Lowest and Best” Bidder 122 IV. Negotiated “Best Value” Selection Process 124 V. Electronic Bids 126 VI. Reverse Auctions 128 VII. General Considerations When Competing on Private Contracts 129 VIII. Effect of Past Performance Evaluations on Award Process 130 IX. Contractor Bid Mistakes 136 X. Bid Protests on State or Local Government Contracts 140 XI. Bid Bonds 142 XII. “Bid Shopping”: What is the Prime Contractor’s Obligation to the Subcontractor Submitting the Lowest Price? 144 XIII. Holding Subcontractors and Vendors to Their Bids 146 XIV. Statute of Frauds Issues 149 XV. Damages 150 8 The Uniform Commercial Code and the Construction Industry 152 I. Applicability to Construction Projects—Purchasing Equipment and Materials 152 II. Determining When Article 2 Applies 153 III. Modifying U.C.C. Obligations 153 IV. Contract Formation Under the U.C.C. 154 V. Risk of Loss 156 VI. Inspection, Acceptance, Rejection, and Revocation of Acceptance 157 VII. Warranties Under the U.C.C. 160 VIII. Statute of Limitations and Commencement of the Warranty Period 162 IX. Performance Issues 164 9 The Design Professional’s Authority and Responsibility 169 I. Overview 169 II. Standard of Care, Professional Responsibility, and Liability 169 III. The Design Professional’s Authority 176 IV. The Design Professional’s Administrative Functions 179 V. The Design Professional’s Other Duties 189 VI. The Design Professional’s Liability to the Contractor and Third Parties 190 VII. Statutes of Repose 196 VIII. Effects of Contractual Limitations on Design Professional Liability 198 IX. Assumption of Design Liability by the Contractor 201 X. Shared Responsibility and Risk 203 XI. The Design Professional’s Copyright for Design Documents 205 10 Subcontract Administration and Dispute Avoidance 209 I. Dispute Avoidance Begins at the Bidding Stage 209 II. The Subcontract Agreement 214 III. Should Subcontractors Be Bonded? 233 IV. Dispute Avoidance by Diligent Project Administration 234 11 Contract Changes 245 I. What is a Changes Clause? 245 II. Recovery Under the Changes Clause 251 III. Constructive Changes 259 IV. Cardinal Changes 264 V. The Impact of Numerous Changes on Unchanged Work 266 VI. Impossibility/Impracticability 266 12 Differing Site Conditions 269 I. “Differing Site Condition” Defined 269 II. Responsibility for Differing Site Conditions 269 III. Standard Industry Differing Site Conditions Clauses 270 IV. Comparison of Differing Site Condition Provisions 277 V. Operation of the Differing Site Conditions Clause 279 VI. Stumbling Blocks to Recovery 288 VII. Relief in the Absence of a Contract Provision 294 Appendices—Site Investigation Checklists 299 Appendix 12.1 Project Checklist: Qualifying the Site 300 Exhibit A: Site Investigation Record 301 Appendix 12.2 Pre-Bid Environmental Considerations 303 13 Schedules, Delays, and Acceleration 305 I. Allocating the Risk of Performance Time in the Contract 306 II. Use of Schedules in Project Management 311 III. Analysis of Project Delay 314 IV. Typical Causes of Compensable Delay 316 V. Concurrent Delay 322 VI. Excusable but Noncompensable Delays 323 VII. Acceleration 325 VIII. Contractual Limitations to Recovery for Delays 327 IX. Owner Claims for Delay 330 X. Delay Claims and the Use of CPM Schedules 331 XI. Documentation to Support Delay Claims 332 14 Inspection, Acceptance, Warranties, and Commissioning 337 I. Inspection 338 II. Acceptance 348 III. Contractual Warranties 355 IV. Project Commissioning and Post-Acceptance Facility Operations 359 15 Management Techniques to Limit Risks and Avoid Disputes 364 I. Construction: A Risk-Prone Business 364 II. Qualifying the Project and the Participants 365 III. Defining Rights, Responsibilities, and Risks: Parties and Their Contracts 371 IV. Contract Framework 372 V. Avoiding and Preparing for Disputes Through Proper Management and Documentation 376 VI. Prudent and Responsible Estimating 376 VII. Establish Standard Operating Procedures 377 VIII. Establish Lines of Communication 378 IX. Project Documentation 378 X. Electronic Communications on Construction Projects 383 XI. Cost Accounting Records 387 XII. Monitoring the Work through Scheduling 388 XIII. Preserving Electronically Stored Information 389 XIV. Conclusion 390 Appendix 15.1 ConsensusDocs 221—Contractor’s Statement of Qualifications for a Specific Project 391 Appendix 15.2 Logs and Forms 406 Appendix 15.2A Format for Notice Checklist 407 Appendix 15.2B Sample Partial Notice Checklists 409 Appendix 15.2C Forms 413 Appendix 15.2D Request for Information 418 Appendix 15.2E Telephone Conversation Memorandum 419 Appendix 15.2F Sample Daily Report 420 Appendix 15.2G Notice of Backcharge 421 Appendix 15.2H Field Order Status Chart 422 Appendix 15.2I Log: Incoming Correspondence 423 Appendix 15.2J Log: Outgoing Correspondence 424 16 Payment Bonds 425 I. Payment Bonds Required by Statute 426 II. Payment Bonds on Private Projects 431 III. Who is Protected by Payment Bonds 432 IV. Work Qualifying for Payment Bond Coverage 437 V. Recovery Under Payment Bonds for Extra Work, Delay Damages, or Lost Profits and Other Costs 439 VI. Distinguishing between Payment Bond Claims and Performance Bond Claims 441 VII. Procedural Requirements for Payment Bonds 442 VIII. Effect of Payment Bonds on Lien Rights 446 IX. The Surety’s Defenses to Payment Bond Liability 446 17 Performance Bonds and Terminations 451 I. Surety Performance Bonds 451II. Termination 465 18 Proving Costs and Damages 480 I. Basic Damage Principles 480 II. Methods of Pricing Claims 485 III. Contractor Damages 488 IV. Owner Damages 502 19 An Overview of Environmental and Safety Concerns on the Construction Site 509 I. Sources of Environmental Regulation and Liability 509 II. Minimizing Environmental Risks Prior to Contracting 518 III. Management Techniques for Environmental Risks during Contract Performance 523 IV. Mold: Developing a Program to Limit Liability 525 V. Environmentally Friendly Construction: Green Buildings 526 VI. Construction Safety 530 20 Construction Insurance 540 I. Importance of Insurance Planning 540 II. Introduction to the Language of Insurance Policies 541 III. Types of Insurance 543 IV. Contract Requirements for Insurance 548 V. Prompt Action to Protect Potential Coverage 551 VI. Insurer’s Response to Claims 552 VII. Routine Coverage Issues 553 VIII. Concurrent Causes 559 IX. Construction Insurance and Mold Claims 560 21 Labor and Employment Issues Affecting the Construction Industry 566 I. Immigration Issues 566 II. Employee Safety and Health 571 III. Wage and Hour Requirements 572 IV. Employee Benefits: ERISA 581 V. Employment Discrimination 583 VI. Family and Medical Leave Act 588 VII. Union Labor 590 VIII. Employee-Background Investigations 590 IX. Workers’ Compensation—Exclusive Remedy Assertions 593 22 Bankruptcy in the Construction Setting 595 I. Introduction 595 II. The Players 595 III. Key Terms 596 IV. Bankruptcy Code 598 V. Status of the Debtor’s Contracts 606 VI. Status of Materials and Equipment 610 VII. Status of Contract Funds 613 VIII. Other Sources of Funds 617 23 Resolving Construction Disputes 623 I. Early Claim Recognition and Preparation 624 II. Early Involvement of Experts and Attorneys 625 III. Demonstrative Evidence 626 IV. Contemporaneous Records 627 V. Components of a Well-Prepared Claim Document 627 VI. Calculating and Proving Damages 629 VII. Pursuing Negotiation and Settlement 630 VIII. Arbitration 633 IX. Litigation 643 24 Federal Government Construction Contracting—An Overview 651 I. Introduction: The Key Differences 651 II. Contractor Selection 656 III. Social-Economic Policies 663 IV. Resolution of Contract Disputes 684 V. Standards of Conduct for Contractors 694 Appendix 24.1 Internet Resources for Federal Government Construction Contracts 704 Index 705

Read more less

Book SynopsisZINC SURFACES THE LEADING RESOURCE FOR ARCHITECTS, DESIGNERS, AND ARTISTS WORKING WITH ZINC Zinc Surfaces: A Guide to Alloys, Finishes, Fabrication and Maintenance in Architecture and Art combines the latest guidance and information about zinc surfaces into a single and comprehensive resource for architects and artists everywhere.The fifth book in the author's authoritative Architectural Metals Series, Zinc Surfaces offers a highly visual, full-color guide to ensure architects and design professionals have the information they need to properly maintain and fabricate zinc surfaces. Numerous case studies illuminate and highlight the theoretical principles contained within.Full of concrete strategies and practical advice, Zinc Surfaces provides readers with complete information on topics including: The use of zinc in architecture The history of zinc's use in design How to choose the right alloy for your purposes Table of ContentsPreface xiii Chapter 1 Introduction to Zinc 1 Element 30 Zn – Spelter 1 The Zinc Atom 9 History 11 Zinc Mineral Forms 17 Zinc in Art 18 Zinc as an Architectural Metal 24 Health and Hygiene 28 The Enigmatic Metal 31 Chapter 2 Zinc Alloys 33 Introduction 33 Alloying Descriptions 34 Ingot Alloys 36 Zinc Alloys – Rolled Forms 39 Zinc Alloys Used in Architecture 41 Wrought Zinc Alloys 44 Architectural Rolled Zinc 47 Forged and Extruded Zinc Alloys 53 Cast Zinc Alloys 55 Slush Casting 56 Zinc Die Casting 58 Gravity Cast Alloys 59 Kirksite 62 Chapter 3 Finishes 63 Introduction 63 Appearance among Metals 65 Mill Finishes 68 Natural Zinc Color 68 Mechanical Finishes 71 Mechanically Rolled Textures 72 Preweathered Zinc Surface 73 Clear Coating with Pigmentation 77 Blackened Zinc 77 Custom Patina Finish 79 Dark Variegated Patinas on Zinc 80 Zinc Oxide Patinas 87 Zinc Iridescent Patina 93 Galvanized Zinc Surfaces 93 Galvanized Steel Structural Shapes 99 Darkening Galvanized Steel 100 Zinc Phosphate Coatings on Galvanized Steel 101 Zinc Fabric 102 Other Methods of Applying Zinc to Steel 103 Zinc Anodizing 104 Chapter 4 Expectations 105 Introduction 105 Natural Finish on Thin Sheet Material 107 Natural Finish on Thick Plate Material 109 Natural Finish on Cast Surface 110 Preweathered Finish 113 Preweathered with Added Pigmentation 119 Expectations – Preweathered Surface 120 Blackened Zinc 121 Color Matching 122 Custom Patinas 124 Flatness and Visual Distortion 131 Creep 135 Galvanized Surface 138 Darkened Galvanized Steel 142 Chapter 5 Available Forms 145 Introduction 145 Wrought Forms of Zinc 148 Plate 152 Sheet and Coil 153 Zinc Foil 158 Extrusion 158 Tube and Pipe 159 Wire 160 Rod 160 Wire Mesh 160 Expanded Metal 160 Perforated Zinc 162 Textured Zinc Sheet 163 Zinc Ornamentation 165 Cast 166 Slush Cast 167 Die Cast 167 Sand Cast 169 Zinc Powder 171 Chapter 6 Fabrication 173 Working with Zinc 173 Storage and Handling 174 Cutting Zinc 177 Shearing and Blanking 177 Saw Cutting 177 Laser 178 Plasma 179 Waterjet 179 Punching / Perforating / Bumping 180 Forming and Bending 184 Grain Direction and Anisotropy 185 Temperature Effect on Forming 187 Brake Forming 187 V-Cutting 191 Roll Forming 191 Superplastic Forming 192 Forging 193 Extrusion 194 Machining 194 Soldering 195 Welding 197 Fusion Stud Welding 199 Resistant Welding of Zinc 201 Expansion / Contraction 202 Bolting and Fastening 204 Thermal Spray 206 Hot-Dipped Galvanizing 206 Casting 208 Die Casting 210 Slush Casting 211 Permanent Mold Casting 212 Sand Casting 212 Plaster Mold Casting 212 Spin Casting 212 Chapter 7 Corrosion 215 Introduction 215 Zinc as a Protective Coating 216 Galvanized Steel 218 Zinc Alloy Coatings on Steel 219 Zinc Powder in Paint Coatings 220 Sherardizing 221 Thermal Spray 221 Zinc Anodes 222 Battery 222 When Zinc Does Not Protect Steel 224 Zinc Corrosion 225 Interior Exposures 227 Exterior Exposures 228 Sheltered Exterior Surfaces 230 Uniform Corrosion 235 Underside Corrosion 236 Wet Storage Stain 237 Galvanic Corrosion 239 Determining Factors for Galvanic Corrosion 242 Difference in Electro-Potential 243 Geometric Relationship 243 Distance 244 Electrolyte Effects 244 Temperature Effects 245 Pitting Corrosion 246 Intergranular Corrosion 248 Stress Corrosion Cracking 248 Zinc Artifacts and Statues 249 Deicing Salts 251 Chlorides 252 Fertilizer 253 Saponification 254 Corrosive Substances in Proximity 254 Chapter 8 Maintaining the Zinc Surface 257 Introduction 257 Zinc Surfaces 258 Why a Maintenance Procedure 260 Develop a Maintenance Strategy 260 Restoring the Preweathered Appearance 264 Effects of Different Environments 266 Physical Cleanliness 267 Chemical Cleanliness 278 Mechanical Cleanliness 292 Galvanized Steel Surfaces 296 Appendix A Brand Names 301 Appendix B Select Specifications for Zinc 303 References 305 Index 307

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscover how to measure, control, model, and plan peopleflow within modern buildings with this one-stop resource from a leading professional People Flow in Buildingsdeliversa comprehensive and insightfuldescription of peopleflow,analysiswithsoftware-basedtools. The book offers readers an up-to-date overview of mathematical optimization methodsused incontrol systemsandtransportationplanningmethods used to managevertical and horizontal transportation. The text offers a starting point for selecting the optimal transportation equipment for new buildings andthosebeing modernized. It provides insight into making passenger journeys pleasant and smooth, while providing readers with an examination of how modern trends in building usage, like increasingly tall buildings and COVID-19, effect peopleflow planning in buildings. People Flow in Buildingsclearly defines the terms and symbols it includes andthen moves on to deal with the measurement, control, modelling, and planning of peopleflow withinTable of ContentsSymbols and Abbreviations Preface Scope of the book PART I 1. Building design population 1.1 Office building population 1.2 Number of inhabitants in residential buildings 1.3 Number of hotel guests 1.4 People arriving from parking areas 1.5 Population in hospitals 1.6 Other types of populated buildings 2. People counting methods 2.1. Counting technology inside and outside buildings 2.2. Passenger traffic components 2.3. Manual people-counting 2.4. Use of optical vision 2.5. Visitor-counting with photocell signals and infra-red beams 2.6. People-counting with access control system 2.7. Passenger-counting by load-weighing device 2.8. Elevator monitoring systems 2.9. External traffic measurement devices 2.10. Smart sensing and mobile computing 3. Passenger arrival process in buildings 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Poisson arrival process 3.2.1 Probability density function 3.2.2 Example of passenger arrivals through security cages 3.3 Passenger arrivals in batches 3.3.1 Batch arrivals in elevator lobbies 3.3.2 Batch arrivals in escalators 3.3.3 Observed batch size distributions in several building types 3.3.4 Batch size variation in elevator lobbies during the day 3.3.5 Modelling of batch size distribution 4. Daily vertical passenger traffic profiles 4.1 Introduction 4.1 Vertical building traffic components 4.1 Two-way traffic profiles 4.1 Effect of inter-floor traffic 4.1 Occupancy in buildings 4.2 Passenger trips with elevators 4.3 People flow in office buildings 4.3.1 Traffic in offices 4.3.2 Observed daily two-way traffic profiles 4.3.3 Daily traffic profiles with interfloor traffic 4.4 People flow in hotels 4.4.1 Traffic in hotels 4.4.2 Daily traffic profiles in hotels 4.5 People flow in residential buildings 4.5.1 Traffic in residential buildings 4.5.2 Traffic profiles in residential buildings 4.6 People flow profiles in hospitals 4.6.1 Hospital traffic 4.6.2 Daily traffic in hospitals 4.7 People flow in commercial and public buildings 4.7.1 Traffic in commercial and public buildings 4.7.2 Daily people flow in escalators 4.7.3 Daily people flow in elevators in shopping centers 4.7.4 Duration of a visit in a shopping centre 4.7.5 People flow by GPS in public buildings 4.8 People flow on cruise ships 4.8.1 Traffic in cruisers 4.8.2 Daily traffic profiles for typical days 5. Monitored elevator traffic data 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Service quality parameters 5.3 Measured passenger service level 5.3.1 Measured passenger traffic with external device 5.3.2 Call time distribution 5.3.3 Waiting time distribution with destination control 5.3.4 Monthly service times 5.4 Measured elevator performance 5.4.1 Number of starts during a month 5.4.2 Correlation between cycle time and round trip time Part II: People flow solutions 6. Historical overview 7. Push button control systems 7.1 Signal operation 7.2 Single-button collective control 7.3 Down collective control 7.4 Interconnected full collective control principle 8. Collective group control system 8.1 Software-based collective control system 8.2 Bunching 8.3 Next car up 8.4 Dynamic sub-zoning 8.5 Channeling 8.6 Queue selective control system 9. Intelligent group control systems 9.1 Performance requirements 9.2 Control system architectures 10. Artificial Intelligence in elevator dispatching 10.1 Introduction 10.2 AI architectures 10.3 Traffic forecasting 10.4 Fuzzy logic 10.5 Genetic algorithm 10.6 Neural networks 10.7 Optimization objective functions 10.8 Elevator lobby with collective control system 10.9 Hospital service modes 11. Destination control system 11.1 Adaptive call allocation algorithm 11.2 Destination control system 11.3 Hybrid destination control system 11.4 “Harmonized” elevator dispatching 11.5 Elevator lobby with destination control system 12. Multi-car control systems 12.1 Introduction 12.2 Paternoster 12.3 Odyssey 12.4 Double-deck elevators 12.4.1 Functional principle of double-deck elevators 12.4.2 Double-deck collective control 12.4.3 Double-deck destination control 12.4.4 Harmonized dispatching for double-deck elevators 12.5 TWIN 12.6 MULTI 12.7 Other possible multi-car elevator control systems 13. Access control systems 2.11. Application areas 2.12. Access control by an external provider 2.13. Access control embedded in an elevator control 14. Architectural considerations of elevators 14.1 Layouts with conventional control 14.2 Layouts with destination control system 14.3 Dimensions of passenger elevators 14.1 Vertical elevator dimensions 14.2 Lobby arrangement with double-deck elevators 15. Architectural considerations of other people flow solutions 15.1 Escalator arrangements 15.2 Horizontal escalator dimensions 15.3 Vertical escalator dimensions 15.4 Dimensions of moving walkways 15.5 Staircase dimensions 15.6 Building door types Part III: People flow calculation methods 16. Introduction 17. Elevator traffic calculation methods 17.1 Elevator performance parameters 17.2 Elevator handling capacity equation 17.3 Elevator kinematics 17.3.1 Elevator rated speed 17.3.2 Flight time calculation 17.4 Up-peak roundtrip time equations 17.4.1 Uniform passenger arrivals 17.4.2 Poisson arrival process 17.4.3 Uniform arrival process for r-floor elevator jumps 17.4.4 Poisson arrival process for r-floor elevator jumps 17.4.5 Uniform arrival process for elevator jumps between floor pairs 17.4.6 Poisson arrival process for elevator jumps between floor pairs 17.4.7 A generalized roundtrip time formula 17.5 Round trip time related equations 17.5.1 Shuttle elevators 17.5.2 Express zones 17.5.3 Dynamic zoning in up-peak 17.5.4 Unsymmetric elevator groups 17.5.5 Multiple entrance floors 17.5.6 Two-way traffic 17.6 Multicar traffic analysis 17.6.1 Paternoster performance 17.6.2 Double-deck performance 17.6.3 Number of MULTI cabins and shafts 18. Passenger service level 18.1 Queuing theoretical approach 18.1.1 Waiting times 18.1.2 Transit times 18.1.3 Journey time 18.2 Queuing at hot spots 18.3 Egress time with elevators 19. Pedestrian traffic 19.1 People flow density 19.1.1 Level of Service 19.1.2 Human body size 19.1.3 Passenger characteristics 19.1.4 Passenger space demand in elevators 19.2 Escalator handling capacity 19.3 Handling capacity of moving walkways 19.4 People flow in walkways 19.5 People flow in staircases 19.6 People flow in corridors and doorways 19.7 Handling capacities of turnstiles and ticket counters 19.8 Number of destination operation panels Part IV: People flow simulation methods 20. Introduction 21. Traffic simulation methods 21.1 Monte Carlo simulation 21.2 Passenger traffic generation 21.3 Traffic simulation of an elevator group 21.4 Building traffic simulation 21.5 People flow simulation 21.5.1 Simulation software architecture 21.5.2 Passenger routing model 22. Simulation procedure 22.1 Simulated handling capacity 22.2 Initial transient 22.3 Stepwise or ramp arrival profiles 22.4 Traffic patterns 22.4.1 Introduction 22.4.2 Office traffic templates 22.4.3 Hotel traffic templates 22.4.4 Traffic templates of residential buildings 23. Validation of elevator traffic simulation software 23.1 Introduction 23.2 Verification of simulator models 23.3 Validation of the elevator traffic simulator 24. Simulated elevator performance and passenger service level 24.1 Introduction 24.1 Up-peak boosting 24.1.1 Traffic boosting with destination control 24.1.2 Boosting with double-deck system 24.1.3 Effect of elevator group size 24.2 Traffic simulations with diverse control systems 24.2.1 Simulation setup for an example building 24.2.2 Conventional control with single-car elevator system 24.2.3 Destination control with single-car elevator system 24.2.4 Conventional control double-deck system 24.2.5 Destination control double-deck system 24.3 Comparison handling capacities 24.4 Service time distributions with conventional system Part V: People flow planning and evacuation 25. Introduction 26. ISO 8100-32 26.1 Background 26.2 Design process 26.3 ISO calculation method 26.1 ISO simulation method 26.2 Selection of rated load based on mass 26.3 Selection of rated load based on area and mass 27. Design criteria 27.1 ISO 8100-32 design criteria 27.2 BCO design criteria for offices 27.3 Other design criteria 28. Elevatoring low and mid-rise buildings 28.1 Offices 28.2 Hotels 28.3 Residential buildings 28.4 Hospitals 28.5 Parking areas 29. People transportation in commercial and public buildings 29.1 Mass transits 29.2 Public transportation buildings 29.3 Commercial buildings 29.4 Observation decks 30. Elevatoring tall buildigs 30.1 Background 30.2 Zoning of supertall buildings 30.3 Example zonings of a supertall building 30.4 Arrangements with zoning from the ground 30.4.1 Elevator arrangement selection with ISO simulation method 30.4.2 Elevator group lobby layouts 30.4.3 Main entrance core areas 30.5 Sky lobby arrangement 30.5.1 Double-deck shuttle elevators 30.5.2 Multi-car shuttle elevators 30.5.3 Elevator selection with ISO simulation method 30.5.4 Elevator group loofbby layouts 30.5.5 Main entrance core areas for sky lobby arrangements 31. Core space of different arrangements 32. Building evacuation 32.1 Introduction 32.2 Egress time calculation in building design 32.2.1 Background 32.2.2 Egress by stairs 32.2.3 Egress by elevators 32.3 Generic emergency evacuation types 32.3.1 Non-fire emergency evacuation 32.3.2 Fire evacuation modes 32.3.3 Scenatio configuration from BMS 32.4 Elevator evacuation-related standards and guidelines 32.4.1 Evacuation elevator requirements 32.4.2 Firefighters lifts - EN 81-72:2015 32.4.3 Evacuation of disabled persons using lifts - CEN/TS 81-76:2011 32.4.4 Occupant Evacuation Operation - ASME A17.1:2013 32.4.5 Elevators used to assist in building evacuation - ISO/TS 18870:2014 32.5 Evacuation strategies of megatall buildings 32.5.1 Introduction 32.5.2 Jeddah Tower 32.5.3 Shanghai Tower 32.5.4 Royal Clock Tower, Makkah 32.5.5 One World Trade Center, New York 33. How high can we go? Epilogue Bibliography Glossary

Read more less

Book SynopsisEARTH'S FURY Natural disasters are any catastrophic loss of life and/or property caused by a natural event or situation. This definition could include biologic issues such as contagion, injurious bacterial colonization, invasion of dangerous plants and infestations of insects and other vermin. However, the popular understanding of what constitutes a natural disaster still focuses on disasters involving the physical properties of the earth and its atmosphere: earthquakes, volcanoes, tsunamis, avalanches, tropical storms, tornadoes, floods and wildfires. Earth's Fury: The Science of Natural Disasters attempts to combine the best features of a scientific textbook and an encyclopedia. It retains the organization of a textbook and adopts the highly illustrative graphics of some of the newer and more effective textbooks. The book's unique approach is evident in its plethora of case studies: short, self-contained and well-illustrated stories of specific natural disTable of ContentsPreface Chapter 1: Introduction to Natural Disasters Chapter 2: Moving Continents Chapter 3: How Does Rock Melt? Chapter 4: Types of Volcanoes Chapter 5: Volcanic Hazards Chapter 6: Causes of Earthquakes Chapter 7: Earthquakes 101 Chapter 8: Earthquake Hazards Chapter 9: Killer Tsunamis Chapter 10: Predicting Earthquakes and Reducing Hazards Chapter 11: Avalanches and Landslides Chapter 12: Weather and Storms Chapter 13: Ocean Circulation and Coastal Systems Chapter 14: Hurricanes, Cyclones, and Typhoons Chapter 15: Tornadoes and Supercells: Terrors of the Plains Chapter 16: Devastating Floods and Their Aftermath Chapter 17: Droughts and Desertification Chapter 18: Impacts: Collisions from Space Chapter 19: Climate Change Dynamics

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn essential guide to the structure, dynamics, and management of construction megaprojects Advanced Construction Project Management is a comprehensive resource that covers the myriad aspects of implementing a megaproject from a contractor's perspective. With many years' experience of managing construction megaprojects, the author provides an in-depth exploration of the structure, dynamics and management of these demanding projects. In addition, the book gives all stakeholders a clear understanding of the complexity of megaprojects and offers contractors the insight and essential tools needed for achieving results. As the trend to plan and implement ever-larger projects looks likely to continue into the future, the need for a guide to understand the challenges of managing a megaproject couldn't be greater. Comprehensive in scope, the book explores the theoretical background, economics, complexity, phases, strategic planning, engineering, coordination, and common Table of Contents1 Introduction 1 1.1 Let me Start with a Story 3 1.2 Status of Megaprojects 6 1.3 Purpose 8 1.4 Methodological Approach 9 1.5 Readership 11 1.5.1 Managers and Engineers Working for Construction Companies 12 1.5.2 Owners of Megaprojects 12 1.5.3 Designers of Megaprojects 12 1.5.4 Project Managers and Quantity Surveyors Working for the Owner 12 1.5.5 Managers and Engineers of Large Civil Engineering Projects 13 1.5.6 Lecturers and Students 13 1.5.7 Academe 13 1.6 Structure of the Text 13 2 Theoretical Background 17 2.1 Definitions 17 2.2 Cognitive Maps 18 2.3 Descriptive Management Research 19 2.4 Guiding Theories 20 2.4.1 Luhmannian Systems Theory 20 2.4.2 Contingency Theory 21 2.4.3 New Institutional Economics 22 3 Advanced Construction Project Management 25 3.1 Construction 26 3.2 Management 28 4 Characteristics of Megaprojects 33 4.1 Project Typology 34 4.1.1 Conceptualizing Criteria 35 4.1.2 Choice of Dimensions 36 4.1.3 Typical Cases 37 4.1.4 Typology 37 4.2 Complexity of Megaprojects 41 4.2.1 Defining Complexity 42 4.2.2 Construct Dimensions of Complexity 43 4.2.3 Factors of the Construct Dimensions 44 4.2.4 Complexity Development 46 5 International Construction Management 49 5.1 International Construction Joint Ventures 49 5.2 Global Contractors 51 5.3 Goals for International Construction Joint Ventures 53 5.4 Success Factors for Megaprojects 56 5.5 Key Personnel 59 5.6 Expatriate Life 61 6 Megaproject Phases and Activity Groups 63 6.1 Project Idea and Project Development 65 6.2 Design Phases 66 6.3 Market Contacts, Bidding Period, and Contract Negotiations 67 6.3.1 Market Contacts 67 6.3.2 Bidding Period 69 6.3.3 Contract Negotiations 70 6.4 Construction and Maintenance 71 6.4.1 Planning and Procurement 73 6.4.1.1 Task Complexity 73 6.4.1.2 Social Complexity 74 6.4.1.3 Cultural Complexity 75 6.4.1.4 Cognitive Complexity 76 6.4.1.5 Operative Complexity 76 6.4.2 Testing the Construction Technology 76 6.4.2.1 Task Complexity 77 6.4.2.2 Social Complexity 78 6.4.2.3 Cultural Complexity 78 6.4.2.4 Cognitive Complexity 78 6.4.2.5 Operative Complexity 78 6.4.3 Mastering the Construction Technology 79 6.4.3.1 Task Complexity 79 6.4.3.2 Social Complexity 80 6.4.3.3 Cultural Complexity 80 6.4.3.4 Cognitive Complexity 80 6.4.3.5 Operative Complexity 80 6.4.4 Stabilization of all Construction Processes 81 6.4.4.1 Task Complexity 81 6.4.4.2 Social and Cultural Complexity 81 6.4.4.3 Cognitive and Operative Complexity 82 6.4.5 Routine Processes 82 6.4.5.1 Task Complexity 83 6.4.5.2 Social and Cultural Complexity 83 6.4.5.3 Cognitive and Operative Complexity 83 6.4.6 Demobilization of the Project 83 6.4.6.1 Task Complexity 84 6.4.6.2 Social and Cultural Complexities 84 6.4.6.3 Cognitive Complexity 84 6.4.6.4 Operative Complexity 84 6.4.7 Management Roles During Construction 84 6.4.8 The Course of Complexity throughout the Activity Groups 86 6.4.8.1 Task Complexity 88 6.4.8.2 Social Complexity 88 6.4.8.3 Cultural Complexity 88 6.4.8.4 Cognitive Complexity 88 6.4.8.5 Operative Complexity 88 7 Descriptive Megaproject Management Model 89 7.1 Management Functions 90 7.1.1 Complex Engineering Tasks 91 7.1.1.1 Design/Design Management 91 7.1.1.2 Project Management 91 7.1.1.3 Production Planning 91 7.1.1.4 Site Installation 92 7.1.1.5 Construction Management 92 7.1.2 Management Functions 92 7.1.2.1 Planning and Controlling 92 7.1.2.2 Organizing and Staffing 93 7.1.2.3 Directing 93 7.1.3 Meta-functions 93 7.1.3.1 Decision-Making 93 7.1.3.2 Communication 93 7.1.3.3 Coordination 94 7.1.3.4 Learning 94 7.1.4 Basic Functions 94 7.1.4.1 Project Knowledge 94 7.1.4.2 Trust 94 7.1.4.3 Sensemaking 94 7.1.4.4 Commitment 95 7.1.5 Cultural Dimensions 95 7.1.5.1 Power Distance 95 7.1.5.2 Uncertainty Avoidance 95 7.1.5.3 Individualism 96 7.1.5.4 Masculinity 96 7.1.5.5 Long-term Orientation 96 7.1.5.6 Indulgence 96 7.2 Management Functions and Complexity 96 7.2.1 Management Functions and Task Complexity 96 7.2.2 Management Functions and Social Complexity 98 7.2.3 Cultural Dimensions and Cultural Complexity 98 7.2.4 Management Functions and Cognitive Complexity 99 7.2.5 Management Functions and Operative Complexity 101 7.3 Combining Management and Complexity 102 8 Engineering Management 105 8.1 Design and Design Management 105 8.1.1 Design Management 105 8.1.2 Design 109 8.2 Project Management 111 8.2.1 Integration Management 112 8.2.2 Scope Management 113 8.2.3 Time Management 113 8.2.4 Cost Management 114 8.2.5 Quality Management 115 8.2.6 Human Resource Management 116 8.2.7 Communication Management 117 8.2.8 Risk Management 118 8.2.9 Procurement Management 120 8.2.10 Stakeholder Management 121 8.2.11 Health, Safety, and Environmental Management 123 8.2.12 Contract Management 123 8.3 Production Planning 125 8.4 Site Installation 129 8.5 Construction 135 9 Management Functions 139 9.1 Planning 141 9.1.1 Analysis 143 9.1.2 Developing New Plans 143 9.1.3 Analytical Framework for Planning 144 9.1.4 Planning System for Megaprojects 145 9.1.4.1 Corporate Governance Plan 146 9.1.4.2 Legal Affairs Plans 146 9.1.4.3 Project and Quality Management Plans 146 9.1.4.4 Codification Management Plan 147 9.1.4.5 Document Management Plan 147 9.1.4.6 Schedule and Cost Management Plans 148 9.1.4.7 Change Management Plan 148 9.1.4.8 Risk Management Plan 148 9.1.4.9 Communication and Reporting Management Plans 148 9.1.4.10 Stakeholder Management Plan 149 9.1.4.11 Configuration Management Plan 149 9.1.4.12 HSE Management Plan 149 9.1.4.13 Design Management and Overall Design Requirements Plan 149 9.1.4.14 Technical Interface and EIA Management Plans 149 9.1.4.15 Testing Procedures, Commissioning, and Operations/Inspection Plans 149 9.1.4.16 Construction, Logistics, and Traffic Management Plans 150 9.1.4.17 Commercial, Procurement, Contract, Financing, Controlling, and Tax/Insurance Management Plans 150 9.1.4.18 Administration Management Plans 150 9.2 Controlling 150 9.3 Organizing 155 9.3.1 Organizational Structure 157 9.3.2 Process Organization 161 9.3.3 Organizational Rules 162 9.4 Directing 163 9.5 Staffing 167 10 Meta-Functions 171 10.1 Decision-Making 171 10.2 Communication 177 10.2.1 Megaproject Communication 178 10.2.2 Communication Models 178 10.2.2.1 Dialog-Based Model by Watzlawick 179 10.2.2.2 Encoder/Decoder Model by Shannon and Weaver 179 10.2.2.3 Four-Aspect Model by Schulz von Thun 182 10.2.3 Communication Methods 182 10.2.4 Communication Organization 185 10.3 Coordination 188 10.3.1 Coordination Methods 189 10.3.2 Fragmented Supply Chain 191 10.4 Learning 193 11 Basic Functions 199 11.1 Project Knowledge 199 11.2 Trust 202 11.3 Sensemaking 206 11.4 Commitment 209 12 Cultural Management 215 13 Innovation in Construction Megaprojects 223 13.1 Aspects of Innovation 225 13.1.1 Methodology and Case Study Choice 227 13.1.2 Innovations and Trajectories 230 13.1.2.1 Product Innovations 231 13.1.2.2 Construction Technology Innovations 234 13.1.2.3 Innovations Within the Technical Organization 235 13.1.2.4 InnovationsWithin the Management Organization 236 13.1.2.5 Innovations Within the Legal Organization 237 13.1.3 Conclusions and Implications 237 13.1.3.1 Megaprojects are Innovative 237 13.1.3.2 Strings of Incremental Innovations 238 13.1.3.3 Innovation in Megaprojects is Systemic 238 13.1.3.4 Innovation is not Necessarily Beneficial to All Parties 238 13.1.3.5 Contractors Can Manage Single-Project Innovations in Megaprojects into Good Currency 238 13.1.3.6 Innovation Champions Act on All Hierarchical Levels 238 13.2 The Innovation Process 239 13.2.1 Introduction 239 13.2.2 Approaches to Generate Innovation and Definition 240 13.2.3 Innovation Process Models and Barriers to Innovation 241 13.2.4 Data Summary 242 13.2.5 The General Model of the Innovation Process 244 13.2.5.1 Project Planning 244 13.2.5.2 Nine Partially Overlapping Process Groups 245 13.2.6 Product and Process Innovations for the BangNa Expressway 248 13.2.7 Process Innovations for the Great Belt Tunnel 249 13.2.8 Conclusions 251 13.3 Progress Functions 252 13.3.1 Theory and Terminology 253 13.3.2 Literature Review 255 13.3.3 Research 257 13.3.4 Data Analysis and Discussion 262 13.3.5 Discussion and Conclusion 264 14 All in All, What Does It Mean? 267 References 269 Index 279

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book familiarizes personnel serving as Emergency Managers, Safety Officers, Assistant Safety Officers, and in other safety-relevant Incident Command System (ICS) roles with physical and psychosocial hazards and stressors that may impact the health and safety of workers and responders in an All-Hazards Response, and ways to minimize exposure. This book provides knowledge on regulations and worker safety practices to the Safety Officer with an emergency responder background, and provides the tools for the Safety Officer with an industrial hygiene or safety professional background that help them be successful in this role. In order to work together effectively, it is important that anyone responding to an emergency be familiar with all standards and protocols.Table of ContentsForeword xiii Acronyms xvii 1 Safety in Emergencies and Disasters 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 9/11 Response 2 1.3 Deepwater Horizon 4 1.4 Emergency Responders 9 1.5 Toxicology: How Do We Know What Causes Cancer or Other Health Effects? 14 1.6 Principles of Injury and Illness Prevention 21 1.7 Safety Management in Incident Response 26 1.8 Safety Officer Qualifications 30 1.9 Summary 34 References 35 2 Applicability of Safety Regulations in Emergency Response 39 2.1 The Occupational Safety and Health Act 39 2.2 State Plan States and Territories 41 2.3 Tribes 44 2.4 Safety Requirements in Fire Departments 45 2.5 Safety Requirements in Law Enforcement 47 2.6 Additional Federal Safety Regulations 49 2.7 Safety Expectations in the National Preparedness Goal and Supporting Frameworks 49 2.8 OSHA, ESF #8, and the Worker Safety and Health Support Annex 51 2.9 Safety in State Emergency Management Plans 56 2.10 Liability in Incident Response 60 2.11 Multiemployer Worksites 60 2.12 Summary 62 References 63 3 Types of Emergencies and Disasters, and Related Hazards 65 3.1 The All-Hazards Approach 65 3.2 Hazardous Materials Release or Spill 65 3.3 Severe Weather 75 3.3.1 Extreme Heat 75 3.3.2 Extreme Cold 76 3.3.3 Winter Storms 77 3.3.4 Thunderstorms 78 3.3.5 Hailstorms 78 3.4 Tropical Storms, Hurricanes, and Windstorms 79 3.5 Tornados 83 3.6 Floods 84 3.7 Landslides 88 3.8 Earthquakes 90 3.9 Volcanic Eruption 96 3.10 Tsunami 98 3.11 Fire 99 3.11.1 Chemical Exposures in Firefighting 100 3.11.2 Additional Hazards to Firefighters 107 3.11.3 Wildland Fires 108 3.12 Transportation Incidents 109 3.12.1 Aircraft Incidents 109 3.12.2 Rail Incidents 111 3.13 Pandemic 113 3.14 Radiological Incident 116 3.15 Terrorism Attack: Chemical or Biological Release 118 3.16 Summary 120 References 120 4 Regulatory Requirements and Their Applicability in Emergency Response 127 4.1 Hazard Communication 128 4.2 Personal Protective Equipment 129 4.3 Respiratory Protection 132 4.3.1 Respirator Selection 133 4.3.2 Medical Qualification for Respirator Wearers 136 4.3.3 Respirator Fit Testing 137 4.3.4 Respirator Care and Maintenance 138 4.3.5 Substance Specific Requirements 139 4.4 Blood-borne Pathogens 139 4.5 Fall Protection 143 4.6 Excavations 144 4.7 Confined Space 146 4.8 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) 147 4.9 Noise exposures 148 4.10 Sanitation and Temporary Labor Camps 151 4.11 Operation of Heavy Equipment 154 4.12 General Duty Clause Citations 155 4.13 Heat 156 4.14 Traffic Control 160 4.15 Ergonomics 160 4.16 Fatigue 162 4.17 Food Safety 165 4.18 Summary 165 References 166 5 Safety Training for a Response 171 5.1 Respirators 172 5.2 PPE 173 5.3 Blood-borne Pathogens 174 5.4 Noise 176 5.5 Chemical Hazards (General) 177 5.6 Chemical-Specific Hazards 178 5.7 Asbestos 179 5.8 Lead 180 5.9 Silica 181 5.10 Hexavalent Chromium 181 5.11 Fall Protection 182 5.12 Material Handling Equipment 183 5.13 Heat Exposure 185 5.14 HAZWOPER 187 5.15 Fatigue 189 5.16 Distracted Driving 191 5.17 OSHA 10- and 30-Hour Training 191 5.18 OSHA Disaster Site Worker Outreach Training Program 193 5.19 Delivering Training 198 5.20 Learning Styles 199 5.21 Efficiency 200 5.22 Summary 201 References 201 6 Industrial Hygiene and Medical Monitoring 205 6.1 Exposure Evaluation and Respirator Selection 205 6.2 Respirator Medical Evaluation 206 6.3 Blood-borne Pathogens and Hepatitis B Vaccines 209 6.4 Medical Evaluations Following Needlestick Injuries and Other Blood-borne Pathogen Exposure Incidents 210 6.5 Hearing Tests and Audiograms 212 6.6 Lead 214 6.7 Silica 217 6.8 Asbestos 219 6.9 Hexavalent Chromium 220 6.10 Benzene 222 6.11 Cadmium 224 6.12 Other Substance-Specific Standards 227 6.13 First Aid and Emergency Medical Response 227 6.14 HAZWOPER 227 6.15 Diving 230 6.16 Ergonomics 232 6.17 Payment for Medical Exams 232 6.18 Logistics of Conducting Medical Surveillance 232 6.19 Recordkeeping 1910.1020 234 6.20 Summary 235 References 235 7 Psychological Hazards Related to Emergency Response 237 7.1 Neurophysiological Response to Fear and Stress 238 7.2 Acute Stress Disorder 239 7.3 Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder 240 7.4 Complex Post Traumatic Stress Disorder 241 7.5 Cumulative Traumatic Stress Exposures 242 7.6 Risk Factors for Developing PTSD 244 7.7 Compassion Fatigue and Secondary Traumatic Stress 245 7.8 Coping Mechanisms 246 7.9 The Impact of Preexisting Conditions 247 7.10 Stress, Trauma, and Decision-Making 248 7.11 Substance Abuse 250 7.12 First Responder Suicides 251 7.13 Prevention: Mental Health Wellness 253 7.14 The Role of Critical Incident Stress Debriefing (CISD) 255 7.15 Additional Treatment Options 258 7.16 Psychological First Aid 259 7.17 Mental Health First Aid 263 7.18 Responders in Their Own Community: Missing or Deceased Family Members 264 7.19 Stress Management Programs 265 7.20 Summary 266 References 266 8 Safety Officer Duties During an Incident Response 273 8.1 Initial Response and the Planning “P” 273 8.2 The Operations “O” 282 8.3 The Incident Action Plan (IAP) 282 8.4 Incident Objectives 285 8.5 Strategies 285 8.6 Tactics 288 8.7 Incident Safety Analysis 290 8.8 The Planning Meeting 300 8.9 Development of the Incident Action Plan (IAP) 301 8.10 ICS Form 208: Safety Message/Plan 309 8.11 Demobilization Planning 350 8.12 The Operations Briefing 351 8.13 New Operational Period Begins 352 8.14 Summary 355 References 356 9 Assistant Safety Officers, Technical Specialists, and Other Safety Support Roles 357 9.1 Assistant Safety Officer 358 9.2 Duties of Assistant Safety Officers 360 9.3 Technical Specialists 361 9.4 Industrial Hygienists 363 9.5 Toxicologist 365 9.6 Health Physicist 365 9.7 Safety Engineer 366 9.8 Competent Persons 367 9.9 Health and Safety Trainer 367 9.10 Respiratory Protection Program Administrator 367 9.11 Decontamination Specialist 369 9.12 Field Observer for Safety Officer 371 9.13 Occupational Medicine Specialist 371 9.14 Behavioral Health Specialist 372 9.15 Environmental Monitoring 373 9.16 Risk Assessor 374 9.17 Food Safety Specialist 375 9.18 Environmental Health/Sanitation Specialist 376 9.19 Safety Support for Temporary Support Facilities 376 9.20 Summary 377 References 377 10 Integrating Safety into Emergency Planning 379 10.1 The Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act 379 10.2 State Emergency Response Commissions (SERC) 380 10.3 Tribal Emergency Response Commissions (TERC) 381 10.4 Local Emergency Planning Committees (LEPCs) 381 10.5 Emergency Planning Under the National Response Framework 384 10.6 Community Emergency Response Teams 387 10.7 Emergency Planning Guidance from the United Nations 387 10.8 NFPA 1600 389 10.9 Regulated Industries 390 10.10 Process Safety Management–Emergency Response 390 10.11 HAZWOPER Emergency Planning Requirements 391 10.12 Airport Emergency Plans 392 10.13 Passenger Train Emergency Preparedness Plan (PTEPP) 395 10.14 Consolidation of Plans Written to Meet Differing Regulatory Requirements 399 10.15 Integrating Responder Safety Considerations into Emergency Plans 400 10.16 Participation as a Stakeholder to Incorporate Worker Safety into Emergency Plans 402 10.17 Summary 403 References 403 11 Safety in Drills and Exercises 405 11.1 Types of Exercises 406 11.2 Exercise Requirements for Airports 408 11.3 Exercise Requirements for Passenger Railroads 410 11.4 Exercising Emergency Plans Under OSHA’s Process Safety Management Standard and HAZWOPER 412 11.5 Oil Response Plan Training, Drill, and Exercise Requirements 414 11.6 Other Industries 415 11.7 National Exercise Program 416 11.8 Homeland Security Exercise and Evaluation Program (HSEEP) 419 11.9 Moving Toward a Common Approach to Exercises 427 11.10 Exercise Safety Plan 428 11.11 Summary 429 References 430 12 Safety in Continuity of Operations 433 12.1 National Essential Functions 433 12.2 Critical Infrastructure 434 12.3 Importance of Continuity 435 12.4 Essential Functions in Organizations 437 12.5 Risk Mitigation 439 12.6 Continuity Plans and the Employees That Carry Them Out 441 12.7 Continuity Safety Plans 443 12.8 Reasonable Accommodations During Continuity Operations 445 12.9 Medical Support for Employees During Continuity Operations 446 12.10 Information Technology Disaster Recovery Plans 447 12.11 Safety Program Essential Records 447 12.12 Pandemic Planning 448 12.13 Training, Testing, and Exercising Continuity of Operations Plans 452 12.14 Reconstitution and the New Normal 453 12.15 Summary 454 References 454 Index 457

Read more less

Book SynopsisOffers state-of-the-art principles and strategies gleaned from high-profile projects to help readers manage design This guide to managing design process within the commercial design and construction industry addresses a growing pain point in an industry where collaborative approaches to project delivery are outpacing the way professionals work. It synthesizes issues by investigating the why, how, and who of the discipline of managing design, and gives the what and when to apply the solutions given various project delivery and contracting methods. The book features candid interviews with over 40 industry leadersarchitects, engineers, contractors, owners, educators, technology evangelists, and authorswhich present a broad look at current issues and offer paths to future collaboration and change. Managing Design: Conversations, Project Controls and Best Practices for Commercial Design and Construction Projects is a self-help book for design and construction that prTable of ContentsPreface xiii Foreword xviiCharles Thomsen, Randy Deutsch Introduction xxiii Premise Mission Methods Issues Context Themes Movement Part 1 Perspectives 1 Chapter 1 The Interviews 3 Chapter 2 Client Empathy: Listening, Collaboration, and Expertise 9Chuck Thomsen, FAIA, FCMAA, Past Chairman, 3D/I International Beverly Willis, FAIA, Beverly Willis Architects Inc. Chapter 3 Owner Leadership: Programs, Users, and Talking 19Barbara White Bryson, Ed.D., FAIA, Associate Dean for Research and Academic Affairs, University of Arizona, College of Architecture, Planning and Landscape Architecture, John Moebes, AIA, Senior Construction Director, Crate & Barrel\ Arthur E. Frazier III, AIA, Director, Facilities Management and Services, Spelman College Chapter 4 Building Learning Organizations: Knowledge and Research 33James P. Cramer, Hon. AIA, Chairman Emeritus, Design Futures Council Renee Cheng, FAIA, Dean, College of Built Environments, University of Washington, Randy Deutsch, AIA, Associate Director, Graduate Studies, University of Illinois Chapter 5 Firm Culture: Management and Attitudes 51Scott Simpson, FAIA, NCARB, LEED AAP, Former President & CEO, The Stubbins Associates; Senior Fellow, Design Futures Council, Thompson Penney, FAIA, CEO, LS3P, John Busby, FAIA, FAIA, Agatha Kessler, Assoc. AIA, Chairman, Fentress Architects Chapter 6 Strategy: Early Questions, Planning Horizons, and Socialization 71Phil Bernstein, FAIA, Associate Dean and Senior Lecturer, Yale School of Architecture, Margaret Gilchrist Serrato, PhD, MBA, AIA, ASID, LEED AP, Workplace Foresight Architect, Herman Miller, David Gilmore, President, CEO, DesignIntelligence Chapter 7 Process: Lean Scheduling – Agile and Efficient 91Bruce Cousins, AIA, Founder, Sword Inc., San Francisco, Denver, Santa Fe, Chad Roberson, AIA, LEED AP BD+C, Principal, Clark Nexsen, Asheville, N.C. Chapter 8 Collaborators: Performative Design (Better Together) 101Marc L’Italien, FAIA, Principal, Associate Vice President, HGA, Bob Carnegie, AIA, Director of Architecture, HOK Houston, Matthew Dumich, FAIA, Senior Project Manager, Adrian Smith +, Gordon Gill Architecture Chapter 9 Design and Budgets: Architect/Contractor Collaboration and Trust 117Jeffrey Paine, FAIA, Founding Principal, Duda|Paine Architects, Peter Styx, AIA, Director of Architecture, AECOM, Minneapolis Chapter 10 Art and Architecture: Design Leadership and Conviction 129Phil Freelon, FAIA, Design Director, Perkins+Will, Allison Grace Williams, FAIA, Principal Provocateur, AGWms_studio Chapter 11 Engineers and The Consultant’s Mindset: Leading From Behind 139Daniel Nall, FAIA, FASHRAE, LEED Fellow, BEMP, HBDP, CPHC, Formerly, Regional Director, Syska & Hennessy SH Group, New York, Kurt Swensson, PhD, PE, LEED AP, Founding Principal, KSi Engineers Chapter 12 Contractors: Risk and Design Assist Expertise 151John Rapaport, with John Lord, David Scognamiglio, and Jeremy Moskowitz, Component Assembly Systems, Inc./Component West, Don Davidson and Jeff Giglio, CEO and Chairman, Inglett & Stubbs, Wayne Wadsworth, DBIA, LEED AP, Executive Vice President, Holder Construction Company, Jon Lewis, General Superintendent, Holder Construction Company Chapter 13 Technology: Leveraging Data 175Arol Wolford, Hon. AIA, Owner, VIMaec, Building Systems Design, Casey Robb, FCSI, CDT, CCPR, LEED AP, CF Robb Consulting Services, LLC, Josh Kanner, Founder, SmartVidio Chapter 14 Entrepreneurship: Vertical Integration and Value Propositions 191Scott Marble, AIA, William H. Harrison Chair, Professor, School of Architecture, Georgia Tech, David Fano, Chief Growth Officer, WeWork, New York Chapter 15 Change Agents: Advocacy, Equity, and Sustainability 201Simon Joaquin Clopton, MS, Emily Grandstaff-Rice, FAIA, LEED AP BD+C, ID+C, WELL AP, NCARB, NCIDQ, Senior Associate, Arrowstreet, Boston, 2018 AIA Director-At-Large Part 2 Project Design Controls: A Framework for Balance, Change, and Action 211 Chapter 16 Project Design Controls: A Framework for Balance, Change, and Action 213 Origins: Looking, Seeing, Borrowing, and Common Sense Navigation and Adoption: Internalization and Sharing Toolmaking: What Gets Measured Gets Done Boundaries, Limits, and Constraints: Enemies or Friends? The Litmus Test: Project Design Controls Chapter 17 Level 0: Subsurface (Contractual/Forming) 223 Project Design Controls Supporting Collaboration Other Resources Chapter 18 Level 1: Foundation (Planning/Organizing) 229 Goals and Objectives Roles and Responsibilities Communication Protocols BIM/VDC/Digital Infrastructure Programming and Research Project Analysis Kickoff Meeting Project Definition Package (PDP) Chapter 19 Level 2: Structure (Measuring/Baseline) 241 Tangible, Measurable Project Design Controls: The “Structural” Baseline Chapter 20 Level 3: Systems (Relating/Collaboration) 263 Owner, Architect, Contractor: The Team Chapter 21 Level 4: Enclosure (Leading/Strategic) 271 Change Options and Value Analysis Decision Support: Issue Tracking and Completion Consultant Coordination Chapter 22 Context: Supply Network, Market Forces, Emerging Technology 273 Supply Network Market Forces Emerging Technologies Other Considerations Chapter 23 Understanding and Using the Framework 279 Order and Logic: “Visual Onomatopoeia” Processes: Repeatable, Shared, One Off? Causes and Effects, Actions and Reactions When Does Design Management Happen? Problems (and Solutions) How to Know How to Coach Self-Evaluation Quiz: Managing Design Litmus Test Chapter 24 Case Studies 299 Case Study 1: Georgia Tech Manufacturing Research Center, Atlanta Case Study 2: Zoo Atlanta Action Conservation Research Center, Atlanta, Georgia Case Study 3: Flint Riverquarium Case Study 4: Hayden Library Reinvention, Arizona State University, Tempe, Arizona Case Study 5: Emory University Campus Life Center, Atlanta, Georgia Chapter 25 Actions 319 What Works In Search of [Design] Excellence: [Designed and] Built to Last Forty Questions My Take Where to Focus: Drivers It’s Up to You The Ideal Project Take Action The Team A Final Request Epilogue 333 Future Vision Prognostications and Advice Organizational Systems Thinking: The 7-S+1 Model Reach and Closure: Design Futures Council Summit on the Future of Architecture, 2018 Continuing Constants and Encouragement Answers Acknowledgments 347 About the Author 349 Bibliography 351 Photo Credits 355 Illustrations 357 Index 359

Read more less

Book SynopsisHYDROGEOLOGY Hydrogeology: Principles and Practice provides a comprehensive introduction to the study of hydrogeology to enable the reader to appreciate the significance of groundwater in meeting current and future environmental and sustainable water resource challenges. This new edition has been thoroughly updated to reflect advances in the field since 2014 and includes over 350 new references. The book presents a systematic approach to understanding groundwater starting with new insights into the distribution of groundwater in the Earth's upper continental crust and the role of groundwater as an agent of global material and elemental fluxes. Following chapters explain the fundamental physical and chemical principles of hydrogeology, and later chapters feature groundwater field investigation techniques in the context of catchment processes, as well as chapters on groundwater quality and contaminant hydrogeology, including a section on emerging contamination from miTable of ContentsList of colour plates xi List of boxes xiv Preface to the third edition xvi Preface to the second edition xvi Preface to the first edition xvii Acknowledgements xviii Symbols and abbreviations xix About the companion website xxiii 1. Introduction 1 1.1 Scope of this book 1.2 What is hydrogeology? 1.3 Early examples of groundwater exploitation 1.4 History of hydrogeology 1.5 The water cycle 1.5.1 Groundwater occurrence in the upper continental crust 1.5.2 Groundwater-related tipping points 1.5.3 Groundwater discharge to the oceans 1.5.4 Global groundwater material and elemental fluxes 1.5.5 Human influence on the water cycle 1.6 Global groundwater resources 1.6.1 Global groundwater abstraction 1.6.2 Global groundwater depletion and sea level rise 1.7 Groundwater resources in developed countries 1.7.1 Groundwater abstraction in the United Kingdom 1.7.1.1 Management and protection of groundwater resources in the United Kingdom 1.7.2 Groundwater abstraction in Europe 1.7.2.1 European Union Water Framework Directive 1.7.3 Groundwater abstraction in North America 1.7.3.1 Management and protection of groundwater resources in the United States 1.7.4 Groundwater abstraction in China 1.8 Groundwater resources in developing countries Further reading References 2. Physical hydrogeology 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Porosity 2.3 Hydraulic conductivity 2.4 Isotropy and homogeneity 2.5 Aquifers, aquitards and aquicludes 2.6 Darcy’s Law 2.6.1 Hydraulic properties of fractured rocks 2.6.2 Karst aquifer properties 2.6.3 Sinkholes and land subsidence 2.7 Groundwater potential and hydraulic head 2.8 Interpretation of hydraulic head and groundwater conditions 2.8.1 Groundwater flow direction 2.8.2 Water table and potentiometric surface maps 2.8.3 Types of groundwater conditions 2.9 Transmissivity and storativity of confined aquifers 2.9.1 Release of water from confined aquifers 2.10 Transmissivity and specific yield of unconfined aquifers 2.11 Equations of groundwater flow 2.11.1 Steady-state saturated flow 2.11.2 Transient saturated flow 2.11.3 Transient unsaturated flow 2.12 Analytical solution of one-dimensional groundwater flow problems 2.13 Groundwater flow patterns 2.14 Classification of springs and intermittent streams 2.15 Transboundary aquifer systems 2.16 Submarine groundwater discharge 2.17 Groundwater resources of the world 2.18 Hydrogeological environments of the United Kingdom 2.18.1 Sedimentary rocks 2.18.2 Metamorphic rocks 2.18.3 Igneous rocks Further reading References 3. Groundwater and geological processes 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Geological processes driving fluid flow 3.3 Topography-driven flow in the context of geological processes 3.4 Compaction-driven fluid flow 3.5 Variable-density driven fluid flow 3.5.1 Salinity gradients leading to variable-density flow 3.5.2 Hydrothermal systems driven by variable-density flow 3.6 Regional groundwater flow systems driven predominantly by variable-density flow 3.6.1 Fluctuating sea-level and its impact on the distribution of groundwater salinity in coastal areas 3.6.2 Brines in continental aquifers 3.7 Regional groundwater flow systems driven predominantly by shifting topography and stress changes 3.7.1 Mountain building and erosion 3.7.2 Impact of glaciations on regional hydrogeology 3.8 Coupling and relative importance of processes driving fluid flow Further reading References 4. Chemical hydrogeology 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Properties of water 4.3 Chemical composition of groundwater 4.4 Sequence of hydrochemical evolution of groundwater 4.5 Groundwater sampling and graphical presentation of hydrochemical data 4.6 Concept of chemical equilibrium 4.6.1 Kinetic approach to chemical equilibrium 4.6.2 Energetic approach to chemical equilibrium 4.7 Carbonate chemistry of groundwater 4.8 Adsorption and ion exchange 4.9 Redox chemistry, 172 4.10 Groundwater in crystalline rocks 4.11 Geochemical modelling Further reading References 5. Environmental isotope hydrogeology 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Stable isotope chemistry and nomenclature 5.3 Stable isotopes of water 5.4 Stable isotopes of nitrogen and sulfur 5.4.1 Nitrogen stable isotopes 5.4.2 Sulphur stable isotopes 5.5 Age dating of groundwater 5.5.1 Law of radioactive decay 5.5.2 14C dating 5.5.3 36Cl dating 5.5.4 Tritium dating 5.5.5 3H/3He dating 5.6 Noble gases Further reading References 6. Groundwater and catchment processes 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Water balance equation 6.3 Precipitation and evapotranspiration 6.3.1 Precipitation measurement 6.3.2 Evapotranspiration measurement and estimation 6.4 Soil water and infiltration 6.4.1 Soil moisture content and soil water potential 6.4.2 Calculation of drainage and evaporation losses 6.4.3 Infiltration theory and measurement 6.5 Recharge estimation 6.5.1 Borehole hydrograph method 6.5.2 Soil moisture budget method 6.5.3 Chloride budget method 6.5.4 Temperature profile methods 6.6 Stream gauging techniques 6.6.1 Velocity area methods 6.6.1.1 Surface floats 6.6.1.2 Current metering 6.6.1.3 Acoustic Doppler current profiler 6.6.2 Dilution gauging 6.6.3 Ultrasonic, electromagnetic and integrating float methods 6.6.4 Slope-area method 6.6.5 Weirs and flumes 6.7 Hydrograph analysis 6.7.1 Quickflow and baseflow separation 6.7.2 Unit hydrograph theory 6.8 Surface water – groundwater interaction 6.8.1 Temperature-based methods of detection 6.8.2 Simulating river flow depletion 6.8.2.1 Analytical solutions 6.8.2.2 Catchment resource modelling 6.8.2.3 Global-scale surface water-groundwater modelling Further reading References 7. Groundwater investigation techniques 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Measurement and interpretation of groundwater level data 7.2.1 Water level measurement 7.2.2 Well and borehole design and construction methods 7.2.3 Borehole hydrographs and barometric efficiency 7.2.3.1 Groundwater level fluctuations in the Bengal Basin Aquifer 7.2.4 Construction of groundwater level contour maps 7.3 Field estimation of aquifer properties 7.3.1 Piezometer tests 7.3.2 Pumping tests 7.3.2.1 Thiem equilibrium method 7.3.2.2 Theis non-equilibrium method 7.3.2.3 Cooper–Jacob straight-line method 7.3.2.4 Recovery test method 7.3.2.5 Principle of superposition of drawdown 7.3.2.6 Leaky, unconfined and bounded aquifer systems 7.3.3 Tracer tests 7.3.4 Downhole geophysical techniques 7.3.4.1 Examples of downhole geophysical logging 7.3.5 Surface geophysical techniques 7.3.5.1 Seismic refraction survey method 7.3.5.2 Electrical resistivity survey method 7.3.5.3 Electromagnetic survey method 7.3.5.4 Gravity survey method 7.3.5.5 Examples of surface geophysical surveying 7.4 Remote sensing methods 7.5 Groundwater modelling Further reading References 8. Groundwater quality and contaminant hydrogeology 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Water quality standards 8.2.1 Water hardness 8.2.2 Irrigation water quality 8.3 Transport of contaminants in groundwater 8.3.1 Transport of non-reactive dissolved contaminants 8.3.1.1 One-dimensional solute transport equation 8.3.2 Transport of reactive dissolved contaminants 8.3.3 Transport of non-aqueous phase liquids 8.3.3.1 Hydrophobic sorption of non-polar organic compounds 8.3.4 Effects of density and heterogeneity 8.4 Sources of groundwater contamination 8.4.1 Urban and industrial contaminants 8.4.2 Municipal landfill wastes 8.4.3 Faecal, domestic and cemetery wastes 8.4.4 Microplastic contamination 8.4.5 Agricultural contaminants 8.4.6 Saline water intrusion in coastal aquifers 8.4.7 Saline water intrusion on small oceanic islands Further reading References 9. Groundwater pollution remediation and protection 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Groundwater pollution remediation techniques 9.2.1 Pump-and-treat 9.2.2 Permeable reactive barriers 9.2.3 Monitored natural attenuation 9.3 Groundwater pollution protection strategies in developed countries 9.3.1 Groundwater vulnerability mapping and aquifer resource protection 9.3.2 Source protection zones 9.3.3 Risk assessment methods 9.3.4 Groundwater vulnerability assessment and mapping for the protection of carbonate (karstic) aquifers 9.3.5 Spatial planning and groundwater protection 9.4 Groundwater protection strategies in developing countries Further reading References 10. Groundwater resources, governance and management 10.1 Introduction 10.2 Groundwater resources schemes 10.2.1 Large-scale groundwater development schemes 10.2.2 Regional-scale groundwater development schemes 10.2.3 Managed aquifer recharge 10.2.3.1 Artificial storage and recovery schemes 10.2.3.2 Riverbank filtration schemes 10.2.4 Horizontal well schemes 10.3 Wetland hydrogeology 10.3.1 Impacts of groundwater exploitation on wetlands 10.3.2 Hydrogeology of dune slacks 10.4 Climate change and groundwater resources 10.4.1 Groundwater response time to climate change 10.4.2 Groundwater pumping and greenhouse gas emissions 10.4.3 Impact of climate change on cold-region hydrogeology 10.4.4 Adaptation to climate change 10.5 Groundwater and energy resources 10.5.1 Geothermal energy 10.5.2 Groundwater source heat pumps 10.5.3 Groundwater and shale gas exploration 10.6 Future challenges for groundwater governance and management Further reading References Appendices 1. Conversion factors 2. Properties of water in the range 0–100°C 3. The geological timescale 4. Symbols, atomic numbers and atomic weights 5. Composition of seawater and rainwater References 6. Values of W(u) for various values of u 7. Values of q/Q and v/Qt corresponding to selected values of t/F for use in computing the rate and volume of stream depletion by wells and boreholes 8. Complementary error function 9. Drinking water quality standards and Lists I and II Substances 10. Review questions and exercises References Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisModern water conveyance and storage techniques are the product of thousands of years of human innovation; today we rely on that same innovation to devise solutions to problems surrounding the rational use and conservation of water resources, with the same overarching goal: to supply humankind with adequate, clean, freshwater. Water Resources Engineering presents an in-depth introduction to hydrological and hydraulic processes, with rigorous coverage of both core principles and practical applications. The discussion focuses on the engineering aspects of water supply and water excess management, relating water use and the hydrological cycle to fundamental concepts of fluid mechanics, energy, and other physical concepts, while emphasizing the use of up-to-date analytical tools and methods. Now in its Third Edition, this straightforward text includes new links to additional resources that help students develop a deeper, more intuitive grasp of the material, while the depth

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn authoritative guide to the theory and practice of static and dynamic structures analysis Static and Dynamic Analysis of Engineering Structures examines static and dynamic analysis of engineering structures for methodological and practical purposes. In one volume, the authors ? noted engineering experts ? provide an overview of the topic and review the applications of modern as well as classic methods of calculation of various structure mechanics problems. They clearly show the analytical and mechanical relationships between classical and modern methods of solving boundary value problems. The first chapter offers solutions to problems using traditional techniques followed by the introduction of the boundary element methods. The book discusses various discrete and continuous systems of analysis. In addition, it offers solutions for more complex systems, such as elastic waves in inhomogeneous media, frequency-dependent damping and membranes of arbitrary Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Preface xiii Introduction xv Chapter 1: Methods of Dynamic Design of Structural Elements 1 1.1 The Method of Separation Variables 1 1.2 The Variational Methods 7 1.3 Integral Equations and Integral Transforms Methods 11 1.4 The Finite Element Method 17 1.5 The Finite Difference Method 25 1.6 The Generalized Method of Integral Transformation 27 1.7 The Method of Delta-Transform 44 1.8 The Generalized Functions in Structural Mechanics 63 1.9 General Approaches to Constructing Boundary Equations, and Standardized Form of Boundary Value Problems 67 1.10 The Relationship of Green’s Function with Homogeneous Solutions of the Method of Initial Parameters 80 1.11 The Spectral Method of Boundary Elements 83 1.12 The Compensate Loads Method 89 Chapter 2: Boundary Elements Methods (BEM) in the Multidimensional Problems 93 2.1 The Integral Equations of Boundary Elements Methods 93 2.2 The Construction of Boundary Equations by the Delta-Transformation Technique 103 2.3 The Equivalence of Direct and Indirect BEM 114 2.4 The Spectral Method of Boundary Elements (SMBE) in Multidimensional Problems 118 2.5 The Problems Described by the Integro-Differential System of Equations 124 Chapter 3: Oscillation of Bars and Arches 131 3.1 The Nonlinear Oscillations of Systems with One Degree of Freedom 131 3.2 The Nonlinear Oscillations of Systems with Multiple-Degrees-of-Freedom 141 3.3 The Nonlinear Oscillations of Systems with Distributed Mass 154 3.3.1 Simply Supported Beams 156 3.3.2 Beams With Built-in Ends 157 3.3.3 Beams With One End Hinged Support and Another End Built-in Support 157 3.3.4 The Cantilever Beam 158 3.4 The Oscillations of the Beam of the Variable Cross-sections 161 3.5 The Optimum Design of the Bar 167 3.6 The Oscillations of Flexural-Shifted (Bending-Shifted) Bars Under the Seismic Impacts 170 3.7 Oscillations of Circular Rings and Arches 176 3.8 The Free Oscillations of System “Flexible Arch-Rigid Beam” 182 3.9 The Results of Dynamic Testing Model of Combined System Rigid-beam and Flexible Arch 195 3.10 The Oscillations of the Combined System Taking into Account its Extent at a Given Harmonic Motion Base 207 3.11 The Determination of the Reactions of Multiple Spans Frame Bridges, Extended Buildings, and Structures Taking into Account the Initial Phase of Passing (Propagation) of the Seismic Wave 224 Chapter 4: Oscillation of Plates and Shells 243 4.1 The Design of the Cantilever Plate of Minimal Mass Working on the Shift with the Assigned Fundamental Frequency 243 4.2 The Experimental and Theoretical Research of Oscillation of a Cantilever Plate with Rectangular Openings 254 4.3 The Oscillations (Vibrations) of Spherical Shells 262 4.4 The Application of the Spectral Method of Boundary Element (SMBE) to the Oscillation of the Plates on Elastic Foundation 265 Chapter 5: The Propagation of Elastic Waves and Their Interaction with the Engineering Structures 271 5.1 The Propagation of Seismic Waves in the Laminar Inhomogeneous Medium 271 5.2 Diffraction of Horizontal Waves on the Semi-cylindrical Base of Structure 277 5.3 Method of Calculation of the Lining of Tunnels to Seismic Resistance 285 5.4 A Study of the Action of Seismic Wave on the Rigid Ring Located in the Half-plane 298 5.5 Calculations of Underground Structures with Arbitrary Cross-section under Seismic Action Impact 306 Chapter 6: The Special Features of the Solution of Dynamic Problems by the Boundary Element Methods (BEM) 315 6.1 One Method of Calculation: The Hilbert Transform and its Applications to the Analysis of Dynamic System 315 6.2 Construction of Green’s Function for Bases Having Frequency-Dependent Internal Friction 324 6.3 The Green’s Functions of Systems with the Frequency-Independent Internal Friction 332 6.4 The Numerical Realization of Boundary Element Method (BEM) 342 6.5 The Construction of the Green’s Function of the Dynamic Stationary Problem for the Elasto-Viscous Half-Plane 351 Chapter 7: The Questions of the Static and Dynamic Analysis of Structures on an Elastic Foundation 365 7.1 The Kernel of the Generalized Model of Elastic Foundation (Base) 378 7.2 The Determination of the Characteristics of the Generalized (Unified, Integrated) Model of the Elastic Foundation (Base) 393 7.3 Contact Problem for the Rigid Die, Lying on the Generalized Elastic Base 397 7.4 On One Method of Calculation of Structures on an Elastic Foundation 404 7.5 The Calculation of the (Non-isolated) Beams and Plates, Lying on an Elastic Foundation, Described by the Generalized Model 408 7.6 The Forced Oscillations of a Rectangular Plate on an Elastic Foundation 415 7.7 The Calculation of the Membrane of Arbitrary Shape on an Elastic Foundation 428 Appendix A: Certificate of Essential Building Data 443 Appendix B: Contact Stresses on the Sole of the Circular Die and the Sole of the Plane Die 455 B.1 Contact Stresses on the Sole of the Circular Die. 455 B.2 Contact Stresses on the Sole of the Plane Die. 457 References 459 Index 483

Read more less

Book SynopsisA unique and ground-breaking book from two leading specialists on adhesion and adhesives for wood and lignocellulosic materials The book is a comprehensive treatment covering a wide range of subjects uniquely available in a single source for the first time. A material science approach has been adopted in dealing with wood adhesion and adhesives. The approach of the authors is to bring out hierarchical cellular and porous characteristics of wood with polymeric cell wall structure, along with the associated non-cell wall extractives, which greatly influence the interaction of wood substrate with polymeric adhesives in a very unique manner not existent in the case of other adherends. Environmental aspects, in particular formaldehyde emission from adhesive bonded wood products, has been included. A significant feature of the book is the inclusion of polymeric matrix materials for wood polymer composites.

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsList of Abbreviations xxv Introduction xxxiii 1 History of Facilities Management 1 2 Key Drivers of Facilities Management 11 3 Activities in Facilities Management 23 4 Delivering Facilities Management – Strategy 29 5 Outsourcing 43 6 Financial Management 48 7 Property and Estates Management 84 8 Property Legislation and Leases 99 9 Developing New Buildings 119 10 Project Management 147 11 Space Management 160 12 Workplace and Accommodation Management 192 13 Procurement 198 14 Contracts and Contract Management 214 15 Legislation 227 16 Legislation Affecting Facilities Management Activities 237 17 Fire Safety and Legislation 254 18 Electrical Supplies and Electrical Safety 277 19 Accessibility and Inclusive Built Environments 287 20 First Aid at Work 296 21 Asbestos 304 22 Water Supplies and Water Safety 313 23 Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 334 24 Business Continuity 344 25 Maintenance – Definitions and Strategies 357 26 Mechanical and Electrical Systems and Their Maintenance 371 27 Information and Communications Technology 392 28 Grounds and External Areas 412 29 Fabric Maintenance 437 30 Energy Management 444 31 Front of House 468 32 Housekeeping and Cleaning Services 484 33 Security Management 506 34 Customer and Stakeholder Relations 524 35 Waste Management 538 36 Catering and Hospitality Services 556 37 Quality Management 575 38 Document Management Services 592 39 Sustainability and Environmental Issues 606 40 Management of the Facilities Management Function 632 Index 653

Read more less

Book SynopsisUNDERWATER INSPECTION AND REPAIR FOR OFFSHORE STRUCTURES Benefit from a much-needed, up-to-date handbook on underwater inspection and repair processes and technologiesUnderwater Inspection and Repair for Offshore Structures fills a gap in the literature to provide an overview of the inspection and repair processes for both steel and concrete offshore structures. Authors and noted experts on the topic John V. Sharp and Gerhard Esdal guide readers through the reasons why inspection and repair are performed and how both are linked to the management of structural integrity, statutory requirements, and various types of damage. The book addresses critical topics, including the execution and planning of inspection and repair, the tools and methods used, and their deployment underwater. The authors put particular focus on steel and concrete offshore oil and gas installations, but the content is also applicable to the substructures of offshore wind turbines. Underwater Inspection and Repair fTable of ContentsPreface xiii Definitions and abbreviations xv 1 Introduction to Underwater Inspection and Repair 1 1.1 Background 1 1.2 Why Do We Inspect and Repair Structures 3 1.3 Types of Offshore Structures 6 1.3.1 Fixed Steel Structures 6 1.3.2 Floating Structures 8 1.3.3 Concrete Platforms 9 1.4 Overview of this Book 10 1.5 Bibliographic Notes 11 References 11 2 Statutory Requirements for Inspection and Repair of Offshore Structures 13 2.1 Introduction 13 2.2 Examples of Country Statutory Requirements 14 2.2.1 Introduction 14 2.2.2 Regulation in the US Offshore Industry 15 2.2.3 Regulation in the UK Offshore Industry 16 2.2.4 Regulation in the Norwegian Offshore Industry 17 2.3 Standards and Recommended Practices for Steel Structures 17 2.3.1 Introduction 17 2.3.2 API RP-2A and API RP-2SIM (Structural Integrity Management) 18 2.3.3 API RP-2FSIM (Floating Systems Integrity Management) 21 2.3.4 ISO 19902 22 2.3.5 ISO 19901-9 23 2.3.6 NORSOK N-005 23 2.4 Standards and Recommended Practices for Mooring Systems 24 2.4.1 Introduction 24 2.4.2 API RP-2MIM (Mooring Integrity Management) 25 2.4.3 IACS Guideline for Survey of Offshore Moorings 26 2.5 Standards and Guidance Notes for Concrete Structures 27 2.5.1 Introduction 27 2.5.2 ISO 19903—Concrete Structures 27 2.5.3 Department of Energy Guidance Notes 31 2.5.4 NORSOK N-005—Concrete Structures 32 2.6 Discussion and Summary 33 References 34 3 Damage Types in Offshore Structures 37 3.1 Introduction 37 3.1.1 General 37 3.1.2 Corrosion 38 3.1.3 Cracking Due to Fatigue 40 3.1.4 Dents, Bows and Gouges Due to Impact 41 3.1.5 Cracking Due to Hydrogen Embrittlement 42 3.1.6 Erosion, Wear and Tear 42 3.1.7 Brittle Fracture 43 3.1.8 Grout Crushing and Slippage 43 3.2 Previous Studies on Damage to Offshore Structures 43 3.3 Previous Studies on Damage to Fixed Steel Structures 44 3.3.1 MTD Underwater Inspection of Steel Offshore Structures 44 3.3.2 MTD Review of Repairs to Offshore Structures and Pipelines 46 3.3.3 PMB AIM Project for MMS 47 3.3.4 HSE Study on Causes of Damage to Fixed Steel Structures 50 3.3.5 Single-Sided Closure Welds 51 3.3.6 MSL Rationalization and Optimisation of Underwater Inspection Planning Report 52 3.3.7 Studies on Hurricane and Storm Damage 54 3.4 Previous Studies on Damage to Floating Steel Structures 57 3.4.1 D.En. Studies on Semi-Submersibles 57 3.4.2 SSC Review of Damage Types to Ship-Shaped Structures 57 3.4.3 Defect Type for Tanker Structure Components 59 3.4.4 Semi-Submersible Flooding Incident Data 59 3.5 Previous Studies on Damage Types to Mooring Lines and Anchors 61 3.5.1 Introduction and Damage Statistics for Moorings 61 3.5.2 API RP-2MIM Overview of Damage Types to Mooring Lines 62 3.5.3 HSE Studies on Mooring Systems 63 3.5.4 Studies on Corrosion of Mooring Systems 64 3.5.5 Studies on Fatigue of Mooring Systems 64 3.6 Previous Studies on Concrete Structures 66 3.6.1 Concrete in the Oceans Project 66 3.6.2 Durability of Offshore Concrete Structures 67 3.6.3 PSA Study on Damage to Offshore Concrete Structures 68 3.7 Previous Studies on Marine Growth (Marine Fouling) 70 3.8 Summary of Damage and Anomalies to Offshore Structures 72 3.8.1 General 72 3.8.2 Damage Types Specific to Steel Structures 72 3.8.3 Damage Types Specific to Concrete Structures 75 3.8.4 Summary Table of Damage to Different Types of Structures 75 3.9 Bibliographic Notes 76 References 76 4 Inspection Methods for Offshore Structures Underwater 79 4.1 Introduction to Underwater Inspection 79 4.2 Previous Studies on Inspection 81 4.2.1 Introduction 81 4.2.2 SSC Survey of Non-Destructive Test Methods 81 4.2.3 Underwater Inspection / Testing / Monitoring of Offshore Structures 84 4.2.4 HSE Handbook for Underwater Inspectors 85 4.2.5 MTD Underwater Inspection of Steel Offshore Structures 85 4.2.6 Department of Energy Fourth Edition Guidance Notes on Surveys 86 4.2.7 HSE Detection of Damage to Underwater Tubulars and Its Effect on Strength 87 4.2.8 MSL Rationalization and Optimisation of Underwater Inspection Planning Report 89 4.2.9 Projects on Testing of Inspection Methods and Their Reliability 93 4.2.10 Concrete in the Oceans Programme 96 4.3 Inspection and Inspection Methods 100 4.3.1 Introduction 100 4.3.2 Visual Inspection 100 4.3.3 Ultrasonic Testing Methods 103 4.3.4 Electromagnetic Methods 104 4.3.5 Radiographic Testing 106 4.3.6 Flooded Member Detection 106 4.3.7 Rebound Hammer 108 4.3.8 Chloride Ingress Test 108 4.3.9 Electro-Potential Mapping 109 4.3.10 Cathodic Protection Inspection 111 4.4 Deployment Methods 112 4.4.1 Introduction 112 4.4.2 Divers 113 4.4.3 ROV and AUV 114 4.4.4 Splash Zone Access 116 4.4.5 Summary of Inspection Methods and Their Deployment 117 4.5 Competency of Inspection Personnel and Organisations 117 4.5.1 Introduction 117 4.5.2 Regulatory Requirements on Competency 119 4.5.3 Requirements on Competency in Standards 119 4.5.4 Certification and Training of Inspectors 121 4.5.5 Trials to Study Inspector Competency 121 4.5.6 Organisational Competency 122 4.6 Reliability of Different Inspection Methods Underwater 124 4.7 Inspection of Fixed Steel Structures 126 4.8 Inspection of Concrete Structures 128 4.9 Inspection of Floating Structures and Mooring Systems 133 References 137 5 Structural Monitoring Methods 141 5.1 Introduction 141 5.1.1 General 141 5.1.2 Historical Background 142 5.1.3 Requirements for Monitoring in Standards 145 5.2 Previous Studies on Structural Monitoring Methods 146 5.2.1 MTD Underwater Inspection of Steel Offshore Installations 146 5.2.2 HSE Review of Structural Monitoring 146 5.2.3 HSE Updated Review of Structural Monitoring 148 5.2.4 SIMoNET 150 5.3 Structural Monitoring Techniques 151 5.3.1 Introduction 151 5.3.2 Acoustic Emission Technique 151 5.3.3 Leak Detection 152 5.3.4 Global Positioning Systems and Radar 152 5.3.5 Fatigue Gauge 153 5.3.6 Continuous Flooded Member Detection 153 5.3.7 Natural Frequency Monitoring 153 5.3.8 Strain Monitoring 154 5.3.9 Riser and Anchor Chain Monitoring 155 5.3.10 Acoustic Fingerprinting 155 5.3.11 Monitoring with Guided Waves 155 5.4 Structural Monitoring Case Study 155 5.5 Summary on Structural Monitoring 157 5.6 Bibliographic Notes 159 References 159 6 Inspection Planning, Programme and Data Management 161 6.1 Introduction 161 6.1.1 General 161 6.1.2 Long-Term Inspection Plan 162 6.1.3 Approaches for Long-Term Inspection Planning 163 6.1.4 Inspection Programme 167 6.1.5 Integrity Data Management 170 6.1.6 Key Performance Indicators 173 6.2 Previous Studies on Long-Term Planning of Inspections 173 6.2.1 PMB AIM Project for MMS 173 6.2.2 MSL Rationalization and Optimisation of Underwater Inspection Planning Report 174 6.2.3 HSE Study on the Effects of Local Joint Flexibility 175 6.2.4 HSE Ageing Plant Report 176 6.2.5 Studies on Risk-Based and Probabilistic Inspection Planning 176 6.2.6 EI Guide to Risk-Based Inspection Planning 180 6.3 Summary on Inspection Planning and Programme 180 6.3.1 Introduction 180 6.3.2 Fixed Steel Platforms 181 6.3.3 Floating Steel Structures 182 6.3.4 Concrete Platforms 183 6.4 Bibliographic Notes 184 References 184 7 Evaluation of Damage and Assessment of Structures 187 7.1 Introduction 187 7.2 Previous Studies on Evaluation of Damaged Tubulars 189 7.2.1 Remaining Fatigue Life of Cracked Tubular Structures 189 7.2.2 Static Strength of Cracked Tubular Structures 195 7.2.3 Effect of Multiple Member Failure 199 7.2.4 Corroded Tubular Members 201 7.2.5 Dent and Bow Damage to Underwater Tubulars and Their Effect on Strength 205 7.2.6 Studies on Assessment of System Strength 208 7.2.7 PMB AIM Project for MMS 209 7.2.8 MSL Significant JIP for MMS 211 7.2.9 MSL Assessment of Repair Techniques for Ageing or Damaged Structures 214 7.3 Previous Studies on Evaluation of Damaged Plated Structures 215 7.3.1 Introduction 215 7.3.2 SSC Studies on Residual Strength of Damaged Plated Marine Structures 216 7.4 Previous Studies on Evaluation of Damaged Concrete Structures 218 7.4.1 Department of Energy Assessment of Major Damage to the Prestressed Concrete Tower 218 7.4.2 Department of Energy Review of Impact Damage Caused by Dropped Objects 220 7.4.3 HSE Review of Durability of Prestressing Components 220 7.4.4 HSE Review of Major Hazards to Concrete Platforms 220 7.4.5 Department of Energy Review of the Effects of Temperature Gradients 221 7.4.6 Concrete in the Oceans Review of Corrosion Protection of Concrete Structures 221 7.4.7 Norwegian Road Administration Guideline V441 222 7.5 Practice of Evaluation and Assessment of Offshore Structures 223 7.5.1 General 223 7.5.2 Fixed and Floating Steel Structures 225 7.5.3 Concrete Structures 230 References 232 8 Repair and Mitigation of Offshore Structures 239 8.1 Introduction to Underwater Repair 239 8.2 Previous Generic Studies on Repair of Structures 242 8.2.1 UEG Report on Repair to North Sea Offshore Structures 242 8.2.2 MTD Study on Repairs of Offshore Structures 242 8.2.3 UK Department of Energy Fourth Edition Guidance Notes 247 8.2.4 DNV GL Study on Repair Methods for PSA 248 8.3 Previous Studies on Repair of Tubular Structures 250 8.3.1 Grout Repairs to Steel Offshore Structures 250 8.3.2 UK Joint Industry Repairs Research Project 252 8.3.3 UK Department of Energy and TWI Study on Repair Methods for Fixed Offshore Structures 254 8.3.4 UK Department of Energy–Funded Work on Adhesive Repairs 257 8.3.5 Residual and Fatigue Strength of Grout-Filled Damaged Tubular Members 260 8.3.6 Fatigue Life Enhancement of Tubular Joints by Grout Injection 261 8.3.7 ATLSS Projects on Repair to Dent-Damaged Tubular Members 261 8.3.8 ATLSS Projects on Repair to Corrosion Damaged Tubulars 263 8.3.9 MSL Strengthening, Modification and Repair of Offshore Installations 265 8.3.10 MSL Underwater Structural Repairs Using Composite Materials 266 8.3.11 HSE Experience from the Use of Clamps Offshore 267 8.3.12 MSL Study on Neoprene-Lined Clamps 269 8.3.13 MSL Repair Techniques for Ageing and Damaged Structures 270 8.3.14 MMS Studies on Hurricane Damage and Repair 273 8.3.15 BOEME Report on Wet Weld Repairs to US Structures 274 8.4 Previous Studies on Repair of Concrete Structures 276 8.4.1 Introduction 276 8.4.2 Repair of Major Damage to Concrete Offshore Structures 277 8.4.3 Scaling of Underwater Concrete Repairs 278 8.4.4 Assessment of Materials for Repair of Damaged Concrete Underwater 280 8.4.5 Effectiveness of Concrete Repairs 285 8.5 Previous Studies on Repair of Plated Structures 286 8.6 Repair of Steel Structures 289 8.6.1 Introduction 289 8.6.2 Selection of Mitigation and Repair Methods 290 8.6.3 Machining Methods (Grinding) 295 8.6.4 Re-Melting Methods 297 8.6.5 Weld Residual Stress Improvement Methods (Peening) 297 8.6.6 Stop Holes and Crack-Deflecting Holes 298 8.6.7 Structural Modifications 300 8.6.8 Underwater Welding 301 8.6.9 Doubler Plates 305 8.6.10 Removal of Structural Elements 305 8.6.11 Bonded-Type Repairs 306 8.6.12 Structural Clamps and Sleeves 307 8.6.13 Grout Filling of Members 310 8.6.14 Grout Filling of Tubular Joints 312 8.6.15 Installation of New Structural Elements 312 8.6.16 Summary of Steel Repairs 313 8.7 Repair of Corrosion and Corrosion Protection Systems 316 8.7.1 Introduction 316 8.7.2 Repair of Damaged Coatings 318 8.7.3 Replacement of Corroded Material 318 8.7.4 Repair or Replacement of the Corrosion Protection System 318 8.8 Repair of Mooring Systems 319 8.9 Repair of Concrete Structures 320 8.9.1 Introduction 320 8.9.2 Choice of Repair Method 322 8.9.3 Concrete Material Replacement 323 8.9.4 Injection Methods 325 8.9.5 Repair of Reinforcement and Prestressing Tendons 326 8.9.6 Summary of Concrete Repairs 327 8.10 Overview of Other Mitigation Methods 328 8.11 Bibliographic Notes 329 References 329 9 Conclusions and Future Possibilities 337 9.1 Overview of the Book 337 9.2 Emerging Technologies 338 9.3 Final Thoughts 340 References 341 Index 342

Read more less

Book SynopsisHazardous Wastes An illuminating, problem-solving approach to source area analysis, environmental chemodynamics, risk assessment, and remediation In the newly revised second edition of Hazardous Wastes: Assessment and Remediation, a team of distinguished researchers delivers a foundational and comprehensive treatment of all aspects of hazardous waste problems. The book offers two sectionsone on assessment and the following on remediationwhile exploring topics crucial to the study of environmental science and engineering at the senior or master's level. This latest edition includes a new emphasis on the chemistry of emerging contaminants, including perfluorinated compounds, 1,4-dioxane, methyl tert-butyl ether, and personal care products. It also offers updated data on contaminant Threshold Limit Value, Reference Dose, Slope Factor, Reference Concentration, and Inhalation Unit Risk. New remediation chapters also provide many design problems, incorporating economic analyses and the selection of various design alternatives. Approximately 200 new end-of-chapter problemswith solutionshave been added as well. Readers will also find: A thorough introduction to hazardous wastes, including discussion of pre-regulatory disposal and hazardous waste legislationComprehensive discussions of common hazardous wastes, including their nomenclature, industrial uses, and disposal historiesIn-depth explorations of partitioning, sorption, and exchange at surfaces, as well as volatilization Extensive descriptions of the concepts of hazardous waste toxicology and quantitative toxicology Perfect for senior- and masters-level college courses in hazardous wastes in Environmental Science, Environmental Engineering, Civil Engineering, or Chemical Engineering programs, Hazardous Wastes: Assessment and Remediation will also earn a place in the libraries of professional environmental scientists and engineers.Table of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xix Acronyms and Abbreviations xxi About the Companion Website xxv 1 Introduction 1 Part I Assessment 35 2 Common Hazardous Wastes: Nomenclature, Industrial Uses, Disposal Histories 39 3 Common Hazardous Wastes: Properties and Classification 121 4 Source Analysis 161 5 Partitioning, Sorption, and Exchange at Surfaces 191 6 Volatilization 223 7 Abiotic and Biotic Transformations: Parallel Pathways 241 8 Contaminant Release and Transport from the Source 289 9 Concepts of Hazardous Waste Toxicology 317 10 Quantitative Toxicology 346 11 Hazardous Waste Risk Assessment 366 Part II Remediation and Treatment 385 12 Approaches to Hazardous Waste Minimization, Remediation, Treatment, and Disposal 387 13 Design of Sorption- and Partitioning-Based Treatment Processes 420 14 Design of Volatilization-Based Treatment Processes 472 15 Design of Abiotic Transformation-Based Treatment Processes 493 16 Design of Biotic Transformation-Based Treatment Processes 530 17 Mitigation of Residuals 570 Appendix References 668 Index 675

Read more less